Professional Documents
Culture Documents
TECHNIQUES
JOCELYN H. BRUCE-GREGORIOS,
M.D.
MARC-ELI MEDINA FALDAS
Contributing Author
HISTOPATHOLOGIC TECHNIQUES
Copyright
by Jocelyn H. Bruce-Gregorios, M.D.
All Rights Reserved.
No part of this book may be reproduced, stored in retrieval system or transmitted, in any form or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior permission of the
authors.
Published by:
JOCELYN H. BRUCE-GREGORIOS, M.D.
U.S. EDITION
DEDICATED
To JEANNE-JEANNE, MY ANGEL. . . . .
To JHAY-JHAY, MY HOPE . . . .
To JIM-BOY, MY JOY . . .
To MOM AND DAD, MY INSPIRATION
PREFACE
This book was initially written to provide fundamental knowledge and
basic principles designed to help the histotechnologist with common time
consuming issues including safety in the laboratory and prevention of artifacts
associated with fixation, dehydration, embedding, microtomy and staining of
tissues that are important for proper diagnosis of disease. Much of the discussion
is centered on techniques and guidelines in tissue processing since the primary
work of a histotechnologist is to provide the pathologist with well-preserved and
adequately processed material that can be used to make a proper interpretation
and diagnosis of disease.
While immunohistochemistry and in situ hybridization have replaced
many histochemical techniques, some stains remain in wide use today. Various
chapters focus on frequently used histochemical methods including their
mechanisms, precautions and guidelines for all the steps in the process of
staining. Various chapters focus on frequently used histochemical methods
including their mechanisms, precautions and guidelines during the process of
staining. While immunohistochemistry and in situ hybridization have replaced
many histochemical stains, many techniques are still based on established
principles that remain in wide use today. It includes a brief course in
immunology, covering topics of antigens, antibodies, antigen-antibody reactions,
and an explanation of required steps in immunostaining procedures.
I am much indebted to Dr. Stephen Vernon, Dr. Parvin Ganjei and Bonnie
Cohen who co-authored some of the chapters in the previous edition of this
book. For this edition, I am privileged to have Marc-Eli Faldas as my co-author
on immunohistochemistry. On a personal level, I dedicate this book to my
parents, Marcelo and Jacinta Bruce. I would like to especially thank and
acknowledge my sister Evelyn for supporting me in this endeavor, and her twin
Eva for serving as my second eye in reviewing this manuscript.
As has been in the past, I do not claim originality of the ideas presented in
this book, particularly on the techniques that have been established by and
adapted from various authorities in the field. Many of the methods described are
also being used in the Department of Pathology, University of Miami Miller
School of Medicine and Jackson Memorial Hospital. “Histopathologic
Techniques” is designed to be a practical reference guide for practicing
histotechnologists and students alike. I hope that this book has achieved its
purpose.
Jocelyn H. Bruce-Gregorios, M.D.
Miami, Florida
June 2017
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. Risk Management
General safety precautions; Types of Hazards; Chemical Hazards;
Labeling; Storage of hazardous chemicals; Physical hazards;
Electrical hazards; Biological hazards; Handling spills; First aid
measures; Ergonomics; When using a microscope; Maintaining
proper posture.
2. Use and Care of the Microscope
Compound microscope; Viewing heads; Main framework of
compound microscope; Parts of the lens system; Magnification and
calibration; Bright field microscopy; Dark field microscopy; Phase
contrast microscopy; Polarized light microscopy; Care and
maintenance of the compound microscope; Fluorescence
microscope; Care and maintenance of fluorescent microscope;
Electron microscope; Transmission electron microscope; Scanning
electron microscope; Care and maintenance of electron microscope;
Radiation safety guidelines.
3. Examination of Fresh Tissue
Fine needle aspiration; Core needle biopsy; Incisional biopsy;
Excisional biopsy; Punch biopsy; Shave biopsy; Curettings; Teasing
or dissociation; Squash preparation; Smear preparation; Streaking;
Spreading; Pull-apart; Impression smear; Frozen section; Cold
knife procedure; Cryostat procedure; Mounting of tissue block;
Freezing previously fixed tissue; Examination of nerve and muscle;
Special processing techniques; Freeze drying; Freeze-substitution.
4. Conventional Tissue Processing
Fixation; Dehydration; Clearing; Infiltration; Embedding; Section-
cutting; Mounting of tissue cutting; Staining; Automatic tissue
processing; Factors that impact processing; Technical
considerations.
5. Rapid Tissue Processing
Microwave processing; microwave oven; Staining Methods; Vacuum
assisted processor; rapid tissue processors; Microwave techniques;
Precautionary measures.
6. Fixation
Goals of fixation; Objectives of fixation; Methods of fixation;
Mechanisms of fixation; Benefits of fixation; Effects of fixatives in
general; Characteristics of a good fixative; Types of fixatives;
Secondary fixation; Post-chromatization; Washing out; General
precautions; Difficulties caused by improper fixation; Fixation
artifacts; Lipid fixation; Carbohydrate fixation; Protein fixation;
Fixation for electron microscopy; Fixation for
immunohistochemistry; Practical consideration; Antigen retrieval;
Effect of heat; Microwave fixation.
7. Chemical Fixatives
Cross-linking fixatives; Denaturing fixatives; Formaldehyde and
formalin; Buffered formalin; Advantages of formalin; Disadvantages
of formalin; Factors that influence formalin fixation; Precautions;
10% formol-saline; 10% neutral buffered formalin; Zinc formalin;
Formol-sublimate; Paraformaldehyde; Karnovsky’s fixative;
Glutaraldehyde; Methyl alcohol; Isopropyl alcohol; Ethyl alcohol;
Carnoy’s fixative; Clarke’s solution; Alcoholic formalin; Formol
acetic alcohol; Gendre’s fixative; Newcomer’s fluid; Mercuric
chloride; Zenker’s solution; Helly’s solution; Lillie’s B-5 fixative;
Heidenhain’s Susa; Osmium tetroxide; Fleming’s solution; Chromate
fixatives: Chromic acid; Potassium dichromate; Muller’s fluid;
Orth’s fluid; Picric acid fixatives: Bouin’s solution; Hollande’s
solution; Brasil’s fixative; Glacial acetic acid; Lead fixative;
Trichloracetic acid; Acetone; Michel’s solution.
8. Decalcification
Acid decalcifying agents; Strong mineral acids; Aqueous nitric acid;
Formol nitric acid; Perenyi’s fluid; Phloroglucin Nitric Acid;
Hydrochloric acid; Von Eber’s fluid; Formic acid; Formic acid-
sodium citrate solution; Trichloroacetic acid; Sulfurous acid;
Flemming’s fluid; Citric acid-citrate buffer solution; chelating
agents; Neutral EDTA; Other techniques; Ion exchange resins;
Electrophoresis; Microwave oven decalcification; Factors
influencing decalcification; Endpoint of decalcification; Treatment
following decalcification; Surface decalcification; Tissue softeners.
9. Dehydration
Alcohol; Ethanol; Butyl alcohol; Tertiary butanol; Isopropanol;
Pentanol; Acetone; Dioxane; Cellosolve; Triethylphosphate;
Tetrahydrofuran; Dehydrating agents for electron microcopy.
10. Clearing
Characteristics of a good clearing agents; Xylene; Toluene; Benzene;
Chloroform; Cedarwood oil; Aniline oil; Clove oil; Carbon
tetrachloride; Tetrahydrofuran; Dioxane; Other xylene substitutes;
Terpenes; Limonene; Orange oil; Chlorinated hydrocarbons;
Coconut oil; Bleached palm.
11. Impregnation and Embedding
Paraffin wax impregnation; Manual processing; Automatic
processing; Precautions with automatic processing; Vacuum
embedding; Embedding procedure; Practical considerations;
Substitutes for paraffin wax; Paraplast; Embeddol; Carbowax;
Dimethyl sulfoxide; Celloidin; Nitrocellulose; Gelatin impregnation;
Embedding; Embedding molds; Double embedding; Resin embedding;
Polyester plastics; Acrylic plastics; Glycol methacrylate; Methyl
methacrylate; Practical considerations.
12. Microtomy
Rocking microtome; Rotary microtome; Sliding microtome; Freezing
microtome; Cold microtome (cryostat); Ultrathin microtome; Care of
the microtome; Safety measures; Microtome knives; Honing;
Precautions during honing; Stropping; Precautions during stropping;
Disposable blades; Glass knives; Diamond knives; Other equipment.
13. Cutting Sections
Types of sections; Paraffin sections; Coarse trimming; Fine trimming;
Knife clearance and bevel angles; Cutting paraffin embedded
sections; Flotation; Mounting sections; Faults/ problems observed
during section-cutting; Celloidin embedding.
14. Electron Microscopy
Principle of electron microscopy; Transmission electron microscope;
Processing of tissue for electron microscopy; Primary fixation;
Glutaraldehyde; Paraformaldehyde; Rinsing; Secondary fixation;
Dehydration; Infiltration; Embedding; Polymerization; Processing
tissue for electron microscopy; Trimming; Ultramicrotomy; Staining
ultrathin sections; Lead citrate; Uranyl acetate; Phosphotungstic
acid; Problems during processing; Practical considerations; Scanning
electron microscope; Fundamental principles of scanning electron
microscopy; Preparation of samples for scanning electron microscopy;
Cleaning; Drying; Mounting; Gold coating; Radiation safety
concerns; Scanning tunneling electron microscope (STEM).
15. Adhesives and Mounting Media
Adhesives; Mayer’s egg albumin; Dried albumin; Gelatin; Gelatin-
formaldehyde mixture; Poly-L-Lysine; APES; Mounting medium;
Aqueous mounting media; Glycerin jelly; Farrant’s medium; Apathy’s
medium; B run’s fluid; Resinous mounting media; Canada balsam;
DPX; XAM; Clarite; Mountants for immunochemical staining; Cover
slipping; Ringing; Broken slides.
16. Principles of Staining
Staining of paraffin sections; Histological staining; Direct staining;
Indirect staining; Accentuator; Mordant; Progressive staining;
Regressive staining; Differentiation; Differential staining;
Metachromatic staining; Metallic impregnation; Vital staining;
Intravital staining; Supravital staining; Hematoxylin and eosin (H&E)
staining; Frozen section staining; Precautions in staining;
Collodionization of sections; Re-staining of old sections;
Histochemical staining; Immunohistochemical staining.
17. Stains and Staining Solutions
Natural dyes; Hematoxylin; Cochineal dyes; Orcein; dyes; Acid dyes;
Basic dyes; Neutral dyes; Aluminum hematoxylin solutions; Blueing;
Ehrlich’s hematoxylin; Harris hematoxylin; Cole’s hematoxylin;
Mayer’s hematoxylin; Iron hematoxylin solutions; Regaud’s
hematoxylin; Weigert’s hematoxylin; Heidenhain’s hematoxylin;
Phosphotungstic acid hematoxylin; Eosin; Aqueous eosin Y;
Romanowsky stains; Van Gieson’s stain; Acridine orange; Acridine
red 3B; Alcian blue; Alizarin red S; Aniline blue; Azocarmine; Basic
fuchsin; Feulgen reagent; Schiff’s reagent; Mallory’s fuchsin stain;
Gomori stain; Benzidine; Bismarck brown; Carmine; Giemsa, Gram’s
iodine; Masson’s trichrome; Methylene blue; Oil Red O; Osmium
tetroxide; Periodic acid Schiff (PAS), Prussian blue, Von Kossa;
Wright stain; Lysochromes.
18. Staining of Carbohydrates
Periodic Acid Schiff (PAS) reaction; General principles of PAS
staining; Schiff reagent; Staining of glycogen; PAS with diastase; Best
carmine method; Staining of mucin; Acid mucopolysaccharides;
Metachromatic staining; Alcian blue stain; Toluidine blue; Combined
Alcian blue-PAS-Hematoxylin stain; Gomori’s aldehyde fuchsin stain;
Mucicarmine stain; Colloidal iron technique; Fluorescent acridine
orange technique; Neutral mucopolysaccharides.
19. Staining of Lipids
Simple lipids; Compound lipids; Derived lipids; Adipose tissue;
Lipofuscin; Fat stains and Sudan dyes; Sudan black method; Sudan IV
stain for lipids; Oil Red O method; Osmic acid stain for fat; Nile blue
sulfate method; Histochemical methods; Free fatty acids; Cholesterol;
Cerebrosides; Gangliosides.
20. Staining of Proteins and Nucleic Acids
Simple proteins; Conjugated proteins; Derived proteins; Fibrous
proteins; Globular proteins; Membrane proteins; Nucleic acids;
Principles of staining; Hematoxylin and eosin stain; Histochemical
identification of proteins; Alkaline Fast Green method for basic
proteins; Peracetic acid-alcian blue for cystine and cysteine; Alcian
blue-PAS stain for proteoglycans; Staining of nucleic acids; Feulgen
staining for nuclear DNA; Methyl green-pyronin method for RNA and
DNA; Fluorescent staining for DNA and RNA; Immunohistochemistry;
Antigen retrieval; Electron microscopy; Polyacrylamide gel
electrophoresis; In-situ hybridization; Polymerase chain reaction
(PCR); Reverse transcription polymerase chain reaction (RT-PCR);
In-situ PCR.
21. Enzyme Histochemistry
Oxidative enzymes; Dehydrogenases; Staining for succinic
dehydrogenase; Oxidases; Cytochrome oxidase; Tyrosinase; Dopa
oxidase; Peroxidases; Hydrolytic enzymes; Phosphatases; Alkaline
phosphatases; Gomori calcium method for alkaline phosphatase; Acid
phosphatase; Gomori lead method for acid phosphatase; 5-
Nucleotidase; Lead method for 5-nucleotidase; Adenosine
triphosphatase (ATPase); ATPase staining pH 9.4, 4.6 and 4.2;
Nonspecific esterase; α-naphthyl acetate method for nonspecific
esterase; Indoxyl acetate method for nonspecific esterase;
Chloroacetate esterase; Acetyl-cholinesterase; Tetrazolium method for
monoamine oxidase; Phosphorylase; Aldolase; Sulfatase.
22. Immunohistochemistry
Polyclonal antibodies; Monoclonal antibodies; Preparing tissue for
immunohistochemistry; Proteolytic enzyme digestion; Paraffin
sections; Pre-treatment of tissue sections; Heat-induced epitope
removal (HIER); Microwave antigen removal; Pressure cooking
antigen removal; Antigens; Epithelial tumor markers; Intermediate
filament markers; Neuroendocrine markers; Germ cell tumor markers;
Mesenchymal tumor markers; Cell proliferation markers; Cancer-
associated genes; Infectious agent markers; Controls; Chromogenic
methods; Enzyme labeling; Direct technique; Enhanced polymer one-
stop staining (EPOS); Indirect technique; Soluble enzyme immune
complex technique; Paraffin wax section immunoperoxidase technique;
Peroxidase-antiperoxidase (PAP) technique; Blocking unwanted
nonspecific staining; Avidin-Biotin Complex (ABC) technique; Labeled
Streptavidin Biotin (LSAB) technique; Immunofluorescence method;
Direct immunofluorescence technique; Indirect immunofluorescence
technique; Frozen section immunofluorescence; In-situ hybridization.
23. Pigments and Minerals
Endogenous pigments; Exogenous pigments; Artifact pigments;
Hemoglobin; Hemosiderin; Hematoidin; Hematin; Hemozoin;
Prussian blue stain; Lillie’s method for ferric and ferrous iron; Perl’s
Prussian blue method for hemosiderin; Gomori’s Prussian blue stain
for iron; Turnbull’s blue reaction for ferrous iron; Leuco patent blue V
stain for hemoglobin; Bile pigments and hematoidin; Modified
Fouchet’s technique for liver bile pigments; Gmelin technique for bile
and hematoidin; Schmorl’s ferric ferricyanide method for reducing
substances; Lipofuscin; Gomori’s aldehyde fuchsin technique for
lipofuscin; Mallory’s fuchsin stain for hemofuscin; Melanin; Masson-
Fontana method for melanin; Schmorl’s method; Removal of melanin
pigments; Minerals; Calcium deposits on tissues; Modified Von-
Kossa’s method for calcium; Alizarin red S method for calcium; Metal
substitution; Copper; Modified Rhodanine technique for copper;
Urates and pyrophosphates; Gomori’s methenamine silver stain for
urate crystals; Carbon; Formaldehyde deposits; Removing formalin
pigments; Mercuric chloride deposits; Osmium tetroxide deposits;
Chrome deposits; Silica; Tattoo pigments; Starch or talcum powder.
24. Staining of Bone Marrow and Blood Elements
Bone marrow preparations; Bone marrow aspirate; Squash smear;
Spread smear; Bone marrow core biopsy; Romanowsky stains; May-
Grunwald stain; Jenner stain; Giemsa stain; Wright’s stain; Wright-
Giemsa stain; May-Grunwald-Giemsa stain; Perl’s Prussian blue stain;
Myeloperoxidase stain; Masson’s trichrome stain for GMA plastic bone
marrow sections; Ancillary procedures; Lymph node biopsies; Fine
needle aspiration; Excisional biopsy; Sentinel lymph node biopsy;
Processing lymph node biopsies; Special studies.
25. Staining of Connective Tissue
Loose connective tissue; Adipose tissue; Dense connective tissue;
Cartilage; Bone tissue; Reticular connective tissue; Elastic tissue;
Blood plasma; Reticulin stain; Gomori’s silver impregnation stain;
Gordon Sweets’ method; Collagen; Van Gieson’s stain for collagen;
Masson’s trichrome stain; Gomori’s one-step trichrome stain; Movat
pentachrome stain; Mallory’s aniline blue stain; Azocarmine stain;
Elastic stain; Van Gieson stain; Verhoeff’s elastic method; Verhoeff-Van
Gieson stain; Aldehyde fuchsin elastic stain; Luna staining method and
protocol for elastic fibers and mast cells; Orcein stain; Krajian’s
technique; Basement membrane; Jones’ impregnation technique;
Fibrin; MSB technique for fibrin; Mallory’s Phosphotungstic acid
hematoxylin (PTAH) method; Fibrinoid; Hyalin; Amyloid; Congo red
methods; Metachromatic staining; Crystal violet method; Fluorescent
staining with Thioflavine-T.
26. Staining of Muscle and Bone
Voluntary striated muscle; Involuntary smooth muscle; Striated cardiac
muscle; Open muscle biopsies; Needle biopsy samples; Paraffin
sections; Cryostat method; Technical considerations; Gomori’s
trichrome stain for paraffin sections; Gomori’s trichrome stain for frozen
muscle; Mallory’s phosphotungstic acid hematoxylin (PTAH); Periodic
Acid Schiff (PAS) stain; Sudan black stain; Oil red O stain; Heidenhain’s
iron hematoxylin method; Histochemical stains; Muscle fiber types;
ATPase stain; Succinate dehydrogenase stain; NADH stain; α-glycero-
phosphate dehydrogenase stain; Myophosphorylase stain; Nonspecific
esterase; Acid phosphatase; Bone; Schmorl’s picro-thionin method;
Ground section preparation of bones; Alizarin red S staining protocol
for calcium; Von-Kossa staining protocol for calcium.
27. Staining of Nervous Tissue
Central nervous system; Astrocytes; Oligodendrocytes; Microglia;
Fixation and processing; Staining techniques; Staining of Nissl bodies;
Cresyl fast violet for paraffin sections; Staining of astrocytes; Cajal’s
gold sublimate method; Modified PTAH stain for reactive astrocytes;
Modified Holzer’s method for astrocytic processes; Staining for
oligodendrocytes and microglial cells; Myelin sheath; Weigert-Pal
technique for staining normal myelin; Kluver-Barrera Luxol fast blue
stain for myelin with Nissl counterstain; Luxol fast blue and H&E stain;
Luxol fast blue-PAS-H&E stain; Weil’s method for myelin sheaths;
Baker’s chromic-acid hematin method for myelin; Marchi method for
degenerating myelin; Microwave modification of Bielschowsky’s
technique for neurofibrillary tangles and plaques; Bodian stain for
nerve fibers and nerve endings; Sevier-Munger technique; Golgi’s silver
staining technique; Modified Golgi method; Glial fibrillary acidic
protein; Neu-N antibody staining protocol; Myelin basic protein (MBP)
antibody staining protocol; Peripheral nervous system; Fixation and
processing; Peripheral myelin in paraffin sections; Methylene blue-
azure II-basic fuchsin stain; Osmium tetroxide.
28. Staining of Microorganisms
Bacteria; Negative staining; Simple staining; Differential staining;
Gram stain; Modified Brown-Brenn method; Gram-Twort stain;
Mycobacteria; Acid-fast stain; Ziehl-Neelsen stain; Fite stain;
Microwave auramine-rhodamine fluorescent technique; Helicobacter
pylori; Toluidine blue stain; Cresyl violet acetate method; Legionella
pneumophilia; Dieterle method for spirochete; Spirochetes; Warthin-
Starry method for spirochetes; Steiner and Steiner microwave
procedure; Fungi and actinomycetes; Grocott methenamine silver
(GMS) stain; Viruses; Lendrum’s Phloxine-Tartrazine method for viral
inclusions; Orcein method for hepatitis B-surface antigen; Protozoans;
Giemsa stain for parasites.
29. Cytologic Techniques
Exfoliative cytology; Smear preparation; Cervical smear; Impression
smear; Sputum smear; Bronchoscopy specimens; Smears of gastric
secretions and aspirates; Smears of breast secretion; Collection
technique; Fine needle aspiration; Slide preparation; Body fluids; Cell
suspensions; Preparation of cytospin slides; Urinary tract specimen;
Body cavity effusions; Fixation; Wet fixation; Precautions observed
during fixation; Staining methods in cytology; Papanicolaou smear; Pap
stain procedure for gynecologic specimen; Cells found in cervico-
vaginal smears; Vaginal hormonal cytology; Staining procedure for non-
gynecologic specimens; Modified Papanicolaou staining; May-
Grunwald Giemsa stain; Mounting; Immunohistochemistry.
CHAPTER 1
RISK MANAGEMENT AND SAFETY IN THE LABORATORY
Risk management pertains to the process of ensuring and maintaining
personal as well as environmental health and safety in the laboratory. It is
everyone's responsibility to minimize risks associated with day-to-day activity
by using safety guards and checking the quality of reagents. The first step is to
identify all electrical, mechanical and biological hazards that can potentially
cause harm in the laboratory. An inventory of chemical reagents must be on hand
and obsolete chemicals should be routinely disposed of.
Standard operating procedures must be detailed to include control of
hazardous substances, risk assessments, and other health and safety information
relevant to handling of specimens. One of the most common accidents in the
laboratory involves cutting of one's finger or hand on microtome knives. The
risk manager should develop a system whereby all incidents and accidents are
reported, no matter how small. Each incident should be investigated and, where
possible, additional measures should be taken to ensure that the incident does not
happen again.
A set of written, standardized operating procedures (SOPs) are usually
mandated by accrediting or regulatory agencies to ensure that the laboratory is
safe. This includes detailed procedures for handling hazardous substances and
personal hygiene practices. Records of regulatory compliance, risk assessment,
causes and prevention of occupational injury or illness, health and safety
training, personal protective equipment and hazardous waste disposal practices
must be kept indefinitely.
Unidentifiable, questionable, old or obsolete reagents and chemicals in
poorly labeled containers should be set aside for disposal. A file of hazardous
chemicals from Material Safety Data sheets are now available from databases on
the Internet and should be readily accessible in the laboratory. All hazardous
agents must be listed and evaluated, including normal use, disposal, and risks
associated with spillage.
Many laboratories contain significant risks, and the prevention of laboratory
accidents requires great care and constant vigilance. The laboratory environment
can be a hazardous place to work. Laboratory workers are exposed to numerous
potential hazards including chemical, biological, physical and radioactive
hazards, as well as musculoskeletal stresses. Many workers are unaware of the
potential hazards in their work environment that make them more vulnerable to
injury. All laboratories need to have a written program stating the policies,
procedures, and responsibilities that serve to protect employees from the health
hazards associated with that particular workplace. Measures to protect against
laboratory accidents include safety training and enforcement of laboratory safety
policies. The following are general safety precautions that must be observed
when working in the laboratory:
Protect the hands and forearms by wearing either gloves and a laboratory
coat or suitable long gloves to avoid contact of the toxic material with the
skin. Wash hands frequently throughout the day and before leaving the
lab.
Procedures involving volatile toxic substances and those involving solid
or liquid toxic substances that may result in the generation of aerosols
should be conducted in a fume hood or other suitable containment
device.
The laboratory workplace should be well-ventilated, clean and organized.
Smoking, sleeping, eating and drinking are prohibited in the laboratory.
Do not store food and drinks in laboratory refrigerators.
Do not wear shorts, sandals, or open-toed shoes in laboratory.
Minors or personal pets are not permitted in the laboratory.
Secure any dangling jewelry, restrain loose clothing, and tie back long
hair that might get caught in equipment before starting work.
Use of cell phones and music headphones should be avoided while
working in the lab. They can be distracting and can increase the potential
for an accident to occur. They can also become contaminated if handled
while working with hazardous materials.
Every instrument used in the laboratory should meet electrical safety
specifications and have written instructions regarding its use.
Eye wash station, safety shower and first aid kits should be standard
facilities in a laboratory. Fire extinguishers, emergency shower systems,
emergency eye washers, first aid, emergency blankets, and hoods must
be checked monthly.
To avoid the unnecessary purchase of chemical materials, a detailed list
of chemical materials must be prepared. Only a minimum amount of
volatile chemicals must be kept in the laboratory.
Chemical material should be stored and safely secured where there is
sufficient ventilation. Combustible chemical material must be stored in a
heat resistant cabinet. Acids and bases must be separately stored.
Every chemical compound used in the laboratory should have a materials
safety data sheet on file that specifies the nature, toxicity, and safety
precautions to be taken when handling the compound.
All chemical material must be labeled with the name, characteristics,
danger level, and precautionary measures.
Laboratories must have available appropriate protective gears for all
individuals: safety devices, goggles, gloves, lab coats, and face-shields.
The laboratory must have a method for disposal of hazardous wastes.
Collect and seal absorbed material into labelled containers for disposal.
Tissues that are collected should be stored in formalin and may be
disposed by incineration or by putting them through a "tissue grinder"
attached to a large sink (similar to a large garbage disposal unit). Used
chemicals must not be released into soil, drains and waterways. Use an
absorbent such as sand, “kitty litter” or a commercial product to collect
spills and contain spread.
One must always be cautious when handling electrical appliances and
must be aware of the location of safety devices (fire extinguisher,
emergency shower system). Extinguishers with water, carbon dioxide,
dry chemical powder or foam are all suitable depending on other
products involved in a fire. Fire safety procedures should be posted.
There must not be any obstacle in the vicinity of the laboratory door.
Avoid handling the sharp ends of instruments. Use forceps or other tools
to remove sharp instruments from baskets and autoclaves. Workers
should use appropriate hand protection when hands are exposed to
hazards such as cuts, lacerations or thermal burns.
Laboratory accidents must be documented and investigated with incident
reports and industrial accident reports. Obtain medical advice (first aid
officer, doctor, poisons information center, ambulance) immediately if
major exposure occurs.
TYPES OF HAZARDS
An important first step in protecting worker health and safety is recognizing
workplace hazards. Most hazards encountered fall into three main categories:
chemical, physical or biological.
Chemical Hazards
Cleaning agents and disinfectants, drugs, anesthetic gases, solvents, paints,
and compressed gases are examples of chemical hazards. Potential exposures to
chemical hazards can occur both during use and with poor storage. The potential
for harm or injury could be significant if chemicals are misused or mishandled.
The “lab standard” applies to the laboratory use of chemicals and mandates
written in the Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) that address the particular
hazards and precautions required for safe use.
Explosive chemicals include picric acid. Certain silver solutions may
explode upon aging, which is why they should never be stored after use.
Oxidizers are harmless by themselves, but may initiate or promote combustion
and present a serious fire risk when in contact with certain substances. Examples
include sodium iodate, mercuric oxide and chromic acid.
Permissible Exposure Limits (PELs), Threshold Limit Values (TLVs), or
Occupational Exposure Limits (OELs) are some of the terms used to define the
maximum allowable airborne concentration of a chemical (vapor, fume or dust)
to which a worker may be exposed. While they represent a concentration at or
below which it is safe for most people to work, some individuals may react
adversely even below such limits due to hypersensitivity or allergy.
Labeling
Every chemical should be labeled with certain basic information, including:
Chemical name and, if a mixture, names of all ingredients;
Manufacturer's name and address if purchased commercially, or name of
person making the reagent;
Date purchased or made;
Expiration date, if known;
Hazard warnings and safety procedures.
The different types of chemicals include:
Irritants are chemicals that cause reversible inflammatory effects at the
site of contact with living tissue, especially the skin, eyes and respiratory
passages.
Corrosive chemicals cause destruction or irreversible alterations when
exposed to living tissue, or destroy certain inanimate surfaces (generally
metal). A chemical may be corrosive to tissue but not to steel, or vice-
versa. Few are corrosive to both.
Sensitizers cause allergic reactions in some exposed workers, not just in
hypersensitive individuals. Sensitization may occur at work because of
the high exposure level.
Carcinogens are substances that induce tumors, not only in experimental
animals but also in humans. Examples of carcinogenic chemicals include
chloroform, chromic acid, formaldehyde, nickel chloride and potassium
dichromate. Carcinogenic dyes include auramine, basic fuchsin, and any
dye derived from benzidine (including Congo red and diamino-
benzidine).
Toxic materials are capable of causing death by ingestion, skin contact
or inhalation at certain specified concentrations. These include methanol,
chromic acid, osmium tetroxide and uranyl nitrate.
Storage of hazardous chemicals
Standard precautions will provide laboratory workers with good protection
from most toxic substances. In addition, records that include amounts of material
used and names of workers involved should be kept as part of the laboratory
notebook record of the project. To minimize hazards from accidental breakage of
apparatus or spills of toxic substances in the fume hood, they should be stored in
pans or trays made of polyethylene or other chemically resistant material. The
apparatus should be mounted above trays of the same type of material.
Alternatively, the working surface of the hood can be fitted with a
removable liner of adsorbent plastic-backed paper. These materials will contain
spilled toxic substances in the absorbent liner and greatly simplify subsequent
cleanup and disposal. Any material that comes in contact with toxic substances
should be disposed of as a toxic substance. Vapors that are discharged from the
apparatus should be trapped or condensed to avoid adding substantial amounts of
toxic vapor to the hood exhaust air. Areas where toxic substances are being used
and stored must have restricted access, and warning signs must be posted if a
special toxicity hazard exists.
All volatile substances having high chronic toxicity must be stored in a
ventilated storage area. Use a secondary tray or container having sufficient
capacity to contain the material in case the primary storage container fails. All
containers of substances in this category should have labels that identify the
contents and include a warning such as: WARNING! HIGHLY TOXIC OR
SUSPECTED CARCINOGEN. Storage areas for substances in this category
must have limited access, and special signs should be posted if a special toxicity
hazard exists. Any area used for storage of substances of high chronic toxicity
must be maintained under negative pressure with respect to the surroundings.
Most laboratory chemicals can be safely stored in conventional cabinets.
However, storage of chemicals above eye level must be avoided. Dangerous
liquids are best stored below countertop height to minimize the risk of bodily
exposure in case a bottle is dropped and broken. Dangerous reagents must be
stored in plastic or plastic-coated glass bottle. Certain flammable liquids that
present unusual fire and explosion risk must never be stored in a refrigerator or
freezer unless these appliances are certified as suitable for an explosive
atmosphere. Only small quantities must be made available as needed, and they
must be used up completely if possible. Do not keep any leftover flammable
liquid.
Flammable liquids should be stored in cabinets and safety containers that
are approved by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA).
Flammables liquids requiring refrigeration should be stored in either explosion-
proof or flammable resistant refrigerators and freezers.
Most chemicals are readily absorbed through the skin and can cause other
health effects and/or contribute to the dose absorbed by inhalation of the
chemical from the air. Many studies indicate that absorption of chemicals
through the skin can occur without being noticed by the worker. In many cases,
skin is a more significant route of exposure than the lung. This is particularly
true for non-volatile chemicals which are relatively toxic and which remain on
work surfaces for long periods of time. As a general rule during the process of
dilution, concentrated acids should be added to water (never water to acid) in
order to prevent splashing, and should be done under a chemical fume hood.
Hypochlorite solutions are classified as irritants and corrosives. Undiluted
bleach solution is corrosive to stainless steel, and thorough rinsing in stainless
steel sinks must follow its use to remove the residue. Bleach solutions should not
be autoclaved.
Never mix different chlorine solutions or store them with cleaning products
containing ammonia, ammonium chloride, or phosphoric acid. Combining these
chemicals could result in release of chlorine gas, which can cause nausea, eye
irritation, tearing, headache, and shortness of breath. These symptoms may last
for several hours. A worker exposed to an unpleasantly strong odor after mixing
a chlorine solution with a cleaning product should leave the room or area
immediately and remain out of the area until the fumes have cleared completely.
Cryogens are used to produce substances with temperatures below -153°C
(-243°F), such as liquid nitrogen and a boiling point of -196oC (-321°F), that are
commonly used in laboratories. Although not a cryogen, solid carbon dioxide or
dry ice which converts directly to carbon dioxide gas at -78°C (-109°F) is also
often used in laboratories. Cryogens, as well as dry ice, can be hazardous to
workers if not handled properly. Dry ice or liquid nitrogen should never be
handled with bare hands. Do not pour cold liquid onto the edge of a glass Dewar
flask when filling because the flask may break and implode.
To dispose of dry ice, allow it to sublimate or evaporate to the atmosphere in
a well-ventilated area where CO2 vapor cannot build up. Do not dispose of dry
ice in sewers, sinks, or toilets. The extreme cold can fracture ceramic fixtures or
crack polyvinyl chloride (PVC) piping. If flushed down plumbing, the gas
buildup can cause an explosion. Do not place dry ice in trash cans or similar
containers. The extreme cold and resulting condensation can destroy these
receptacles.
Physical Hazards
The most obvious physical hazards are slips and falls from working in wet
locations and the ergonomic hazards of lifting, pushing, pulling, and repetitive
tasks. Other physical hazards often unnoticed are electrical, mechanical,
acoustic, or thermal in nature. Ignoring these can have potentially serious
consequences.
Many operations in the lab can result in lab workers assuming sustained or
repetitive awkward postures such as looking at slides on a microscope for
extended periods. What is found acceptable for brief or occasional use may
become problematic if performed for long durations or very frequently. Pain is a
good indicator that something is wrong. Work must be conducted in a neutral,
balanced posture.
Containers of sharp objects are found everywhere in pathology laboratories,
and following a few safety rules can help prevent accident reports such as
getting stuck with a needle or other sharp objects. Only clearly labeled puncture-
proof and leak proof containers must be used for “sharps”. The container must
be replaced when three-fourths full to prevent over-filling. Employees must be
trained never to remove the covers of these receptacles or attempt to transfer
their content. Inspect all glassware before use. Discard any broken, cracked, or
chipped glassware.
Many injuries also stem from poor housekeeping. Slips, trips, and falls are
very common but can be easily avoided. Start with safe and organized storage
areas. Clean the work area throughout the day and before leaving the lab for the
day. Keep all aisles and walkways in the lab clear to provide a safe walking
surface and an unobstructed exit. Material storage areas should be organized in
order not to create hazards. Bags, containers and bundle stored in tiers should be
stacked, blocked, interlocked, and limited in height so that they are stable and
secured against sliding or collapse. Do not block doors or access to emergency
equipment (i.e. fire extinguishers, eyewashes, etc.), emergency shut-offs, and
utility controls (i.e. electrical panels). Storage areas should be free from an
accumulation of materials that could cause tripping, fire, explosion, or harboring
of pests. Work areas must be kept clean and free of unnecessary chemicals. If
necessary, clean equipment after use to avoid the possibility of exposing the next
person who uses it.
Combustibles are substances whose vapors will ignite at or above a certain
temperature (or flash point) or in the presence of an ignition source. Combustible
liquids pose little risk of fire under routine laboratory conditions, but they will
burn readily during a fire. In the USA, OSHA defines "flash point" as 100°F
(38°C) while the Department of Transportation defines it as 141°F (or 60.5°C).
Flammables have flash points below the temperature specified above, but
require specially designed storage rooms, cabinets and containers, to control and
prevent vapors from building up around electrical devices that spark.
Fire is a serious hazard that one faces in a typical laboratory. While proper
procedures and training can minimize the chances of an accidental fire,
laboratory workers should still be prepared to deal with a fire emergency when it
occurs. In dealing with a laboratory fire, all containers of infectious materials
should be placed into autoclaves, incubators, refrigerators, or freezers for
containment. Laboratories, especially those using solvents in any quantity, have
the potential for causing flash fires, explosion, rapid spread of fire, and high
toxicity of products of combustion (heat, smoke, and flame).
Electrical Hazards
In the laboratory, workers may be exposed to electrical hazards including
electric shock, arc blasts, electrocution, fires and explosions. Potential exposures
to electrical hazards can result from faulty electrical equipment/instrumentation
or wiring, damaged receptacles and connectors, or unsafe work practices.
Damaged electrical cords can lead to possible shocks or electrocutions.
Electrical hazards are potentially life threatening but can be easily avoided.
First, equip all electrical power outlets in wet locations with ground-fault circuit
interrupters (GFCIs) to prevent accidental electrocutions. GFCIs are designed to
“trip” and break the circuit when a small amount of current begins flowing to
ground. Wet locations usually include outlets within six feet of a sink, faucet, or
other water source and outlets located outdoors or in areas that get washed down
routinely. Specific GFCI outlets can be used individually, or GFCIs can be
installed in the electrical panel to protect entire circuits. One will not be
protected from electric shock if a 3-pronged plug is not inserted into a 3-prong
outlet. Before turning equipment on, all power cords must be checked to be sure
that they are in good condition.
Another very common electrical hazard is the improper use of flexible
extension cords. Avoid using extension cords whenever possible. If you must use
one, obtain a heavy- duty one that is electrically grounded, with its own fuse,
and install it safely. Extension cords should not go under doors, across aisles, be
hung from the ceiling, or plugged into other extension cords. A flexible electrical
cord may be damaged by door or window edges, by staples and fastenings, by
equipment rolling over it, or simply by aging. Do not use these as a substitute for
permanent wiring. The cord insulation should be in good condition and continue
into the plug ends. Never repair cracks, breaks, cuts, or tears with tape. Either
discard the extension cord or shorten it by installing a new plug end. Take care
not to run extension cords through doors or windows where they can become
pinched or cut. And always be aware of potential tripping hazards when using
them. Use only grounded equipment and tools and never remove the grounding
pin from the plug ends. Also, do not use extension cords in a series—just get the
right length of cord for the job.
If you see a person being electrocuted, DO NOT TOUCH THEM! The
electricity can go through you, too. If possible, turn off the power (pull the plug
or trip the circuit breaker), or use an item made of non-conductive material (e.g.,
wooden broom handle) to pry him or her away from the contact. Call 911
immediately.
Biological Hazards
Biohazards refer to anything that can cause disease in humans, regardless of
their source. Biohazards include infectious agents and their toxins as well as
contaminated solutions, specimens or objects. Allergens, are one of the most
important health hazards, yet they are frequently overlooked. Molds and fungi
produce and release millions of spores small enough to be air, water, or insect-
borne which may have negative effects on human health including allergic
reactions, asthma, and other respiratory problems.
If biological materials are used in the area, they should not be stored in
hallways, in unlocked freezers or in refrigerators. Biohazard signs should be
placed in appropriate areas.
Pathologists, histotechnologists and technicians may be exposed to a certain
level of risk when handling and processing potentially infectious specimen
through inhalation of aerosols, contact with non-intact skin and contact with
mucous membranes (eyes, nose, mouth). Fresh tissue and body fluids must
always be considered potentially infectious, and grossing of specimen has the
highest risk of all histological activities. Fixed specimens have a much less risk
because nearly all infectious agents are deactivated by histological fixation,
although tissues must be thoroughly fixed for this to happen. Complete
penetration by alcohol will destroy all infectious agents except prions.
Prions are infectious agents that cause spongiform encephalopathies such as
Creutzfeld-Jakob disease (CJD), scrapie and mad cow disease. Normal steam
sterilization does not inactivate these particles, and common effective treatments
like sodium hypochlorite or phenol will create artefacts in tissue. Tissue from
patients with suspected CJD can be decontaminated by immersing the specimen
in formalin for 48 hours, followed by treatment in concentrated formic acid for 1
hour, and additional formalin fixation for another 48 hours.
Small dust-like particles generated from sectioning may become airborne,
particularly when performing cryostat sections of fresh tissue. Cryogenic sprays
can magnify this risk, and therefore should not be used to freeze potentially
infectious tissue. Cutting areas or surfaces may be sterilized with chlorine bleach
or a suitable commercial disinfectant, and warning signs should be posted in labs
handling infectious materials. Disinfectants should be on hand for sanitizing
bench tops and treating spills. Biological safety cabinet(s) must be certified
within the last 12 months of use.
Handling Spills
The laboratory worker must be prepared for potential accidents or spills
involving toxic substances. Lab workers must be trained in handling toxic
materials and spill clean-up before beginning work with toxic substances.
Small spills are defined as those that can be safely handled by the immediate
staff. Spill neutralizing and containment kits should be available immediately
outside the hazardous work area. These may be commercially purchased or
assembled from common materials, and should include protective equipment and
clean up aids, such as good quality latex or nitrile gloves similar in thickness to
dishwashing gloves, disposable plastic aprons for chemical spills and disposable
gowns for biohazards, dustpan and brush for powders, sponges, towels and mops
for liquids, adsorbent material (kitty litter or a commercial sorbent), bleach
(sodium hypochlorite for biohazards), baking soda for acids, vinegar (5% acetic
acid) for alkalis, a commercial neutralizing product, a sealable plastic bucket and
heavy plastic bags for containment of the salvaged waste.
If the amount of spilled material is limited to a few grams or milliliters, it
can be simply wiped off with towel or sponge, while protecting the hands with
suitable gloves. The towel or sponge must be disposed of appropriately after use;
do not put it into the general trash, and protect the room from its vapors by
sealing it within an impermeable plastic bag or container.
For significant spills of dangerous materials, all personnel should evacuate
the room or immediate vicinity where the accidental spilled occurred, and first
aid must be given to anyone who has gotten splashed or is feeling the effects of
vapors. If the spill is large, the area must be sealed off and an experienced
emergency response team must be called.
If there is a major spill outside of the hood, the room or appropriate area
should be evacuated and necessary measures should be taken to prevent
exposure of other workers. Spills must be cleaned by personnel wearing suitable
personal protective apparel. If a spill of a toxic material occurs outside the hood,
an air-supplied full-face respirator may be needed. The work space and
equipment should be decontaminated with 10% bleach solution. Avoid creating
dust. Contaminated pipette tips, tubes, weighing trays, gloves, paper towel,
napkins and any other clean up debris must be disposed of as hazardous waste.
After removal of gloves, wash hands thoroughly with soap and copious amounts
of water.
First Aid Measures
With laboratory chemicals, the most common accidents requiring first aid
are ingestion, eye contact and extensive skin contact. Laboratory technicians and
technologists should have basic training in dealing with these situations, and
yearly safety training should include first aid information and preparedness in
the event of chemical accidents, including accidental ingestion of hazardous
chemicals. First aid kits must be easily accessible and refilled on a regular basis.
When providing first aid treatment to a person that has been exposed to
chemical, infectious or toxic waste products, the following precautions should be
observed:
• Immediately remove the person from the source of contamination and
move to fresh air.
• If the person is not breathing, do not use mouth to mouth, or mouth to
nose ventilation, because of the danger to the rescuer. Instead, use a
resuscitation bag and mask.
• If pulse is absent, start external cardiac massage and follow standard
Advanced Cardiovascular Life Support (ACLS) guidelines.
• Give 100% oxygen by mask if available.
• Remove all contaminated clothing and footwear into a sealable
collection bag and launder contaminated clothing thoroughly.
For accidental skin contact with hazardous chemicals, the affected area
should be washed with copious amounts of water for 15-30 minutes. Emergency
showers should be as accessible as eye wash stations. If the hazardous substance
is not readily water-soluble, use soap with the water wash. Immediately remove
contaminated clothing and launder before re-use. Seek medical assistance
following skin contact.
Splashing of dangerous chemicals into the eyes is also a common accident.
Symptoms include redness, pain, blurred vision, and eye damage. All
laboratories should be equipped with emergency eyewash stations, either as
standing devices or small appliances affixed to sink faucets. Current
recommendations are to have such devices no more than 100 feet from
hazardous work areas, and the water temperature should be controlled to a range
of 15-35°C. In case of accidental splashing, the affected eye should be rinsed for
15-30 minutes, pulling the lids away from the eyeball, prior to seeking
emergency health care. Portable eyewash bottles are not recommended because
they pour too little liquid and may become contaminated with microorganisms.
Ergonomics
Laboratory work activities can introduce ergonomic risk factors that are
associated with muscular-skeletal disorders. Laboratory-associated ergonomic
risks are the same as those found in the office and general industry. These risk
factors include awkward or sustained postures, highly repetitive movements,
excessive force or strain, contact stresses, and vibration.
Awkward postures occur when body parts are positioned away from
their neutral position. These postures can put stress on the joint and its
associated muscles.
Contact stress is a sustained contact between a body part and an external
object. Examples include: resting the wrist or forearm against a sharp
edge/corner.
Duration is the period of time that a body part is exposed to an
ergonomic risk factor. Longer durations of exposure increase the
severity of the risk.
Repetition is the repeated performance of motion that includes other
ergonomic risk factors such as force and/or awkward posture. Severity
of the risk increases with higher repetition of motions with ergonomic
risk factors.
Static postures occur when a body part is held in a single position over a
long period of time. The severity of a static posture can increase if the
posture is awkward, applies continual force, and/or is held for long
durations. Examples include: sitting or standing in single position for a
long duration.
When Using a Microscope
Sit close to the work surface.
Avoid leaning on hard edges.
Keep elbows close to their sides.
Adjust chair, workbench, or microscope as needed to maintain an
upright head position.
Elevate, tilt or move the microscope close to the edge of the counter
to avoid bending the neck.
Take short breaks. Every 15 minutes, close the eyes or focus on
something in the distance.
Every 30-60 minutes, get up to stretch and move. Alternate between
sitting and standing positions.
When possible, plan work tasks to include a variety of movements to
avoid static postures or repetitive motions.
Avoid contacting or resting wrists or forearms on sharp edges.
When seated, the thighs should be parallel to the floor and feet firmly
planted on the floor or on a foot rest.
Maintaining proper posture:
Keep your back straight, maintain all 3 natural curves in your spine.
Distribute your weight evenly on both hips.
Keep your head and neck aligned over your shoulders.
Sit back in your chair; your back should be supported by the seat back.
Adjust your chair height so that your hips are slightly higher than your
knees.
Be sure your feet are supported by the floor or a footrest.
Avoid sitting for long periods of time; get up from your chair at least
once every hour.
Do not twist or bend your back from a seated position.
REFERENCES
Banks I, Gamble M. (2002) Managing the Laboratory, Chapter 1. In: Bancroft J.D. and Gamble M, eds.
Theory and Practice of Histological Techniques, 2nd ed. London: Churchill Livingstone, IL.
Berte LM. (2000) New Quality Guidelines for Laboratories. Medical Laboratory Observer, March 2000.
"Biological Agents and Biological Toxins". Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
Brown P, Gibbs CJ, Gajdusek D, Cathala F, LaBauge R. (1986) Transmission of Creutzfeldt-Jakob
disease from formalin-fixed, paraffin-embedded human brain tissue. N Engl J Med 315:1614–5.
Centers for Disease Control. (1988) Guidelines for Protecting the Safety and Health of health care
workers, CDC Publication # 88-1 19. Washington DC: US Government Printing Office.
Dapson RW. (2002) Safety in the laboratory. In: Bancroft, J.D., Gamble, M. Theory and Practice of
Histological Techniques, 5th Ed, London: Churchill Livingstone, 1: 1-32.
Dapson JC, Dapson RW. (1995) Hazardous Materials in the Histopathology laboratory: regulations,
risks, handling and disposal. 3rd Ed. Battle Creek, MI: Anatech ·Ltd.
ES&H Manual. (2015) Chapter 29: Safe Handling of cryogenic liquids". Lawrence Berkeley National
Laboratory. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)".
Identifying and Evaluating Hazards in Research Laboratories. (2013) Guidelines developed by the
Hazards Identification and Evaluation Task Force of the American Chemical Society’s Committee on
Chemical Safety: American Chemical Society.
Jungbauer FH, van der Harst JJ, Groothoff JW, Coenraads PJ. (2004) Skin protection in nursing work:
promoting the use of gloves and hand alcohol. Contact Dermatitis 51:135–40
Kiernan JA. (l999) Histological and Histochemical Methods: Theory and Practice. Laboratory Safety
PPE | Yale Environmental Health and Safety". www.ebs.yale.edu.
Lunn G, Sansone EB. (1990) Destruction of hazardous chemicals in the Laboratory. New York: John
Wiley.
Masterton R, Teare L, Richards J. (2002) Hospital Infection Society/Association of Medical
Microbiologists. Towards a Consensus II. Workshop I. Hospital-acquired infection and risk
management. J Hosp Infect 51:17–20.
Montgomery L. (1995) Health and Safety Guidelines for the Laboratory - Chicago: American Society
of Clinical Pathologists Press.
National Committee for Clinical Laboratory Standards. (1989) Guidelines for Laboratory Safety,
Document GPJ7- P. Villanova, PA: NCCLS.
National Research Council. (1989) Prudent Practices for Disposal of Hazardous Chemicals from
Laboratories. Washington, DC: National Academy Press.
Rutala W, Weber D. (1997) Use of inorganic hypochlorite (bleach) in healthcare facilities. Clin
Microbiol Rev: 597–610.
Sitwell LB, Attack E, Izukawa D. (1988) Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease in histopathology technicians. N
Engl J Med 318:854.
"Stanford University: SLAC Environment, Safety, and Health Manual, Chapter 36, Stanford University.
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Laboratory safety Teare EL, Masterton RG. (2003) Risk management in
pathology: J Clin Pathol. 56(3): 161–163.
Wilkins D WA, Cossar YE, Miller DC. (1988) Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease in histopathology technicians.
N Engl J Med 318:853–4.
https://www.lanl.gov/safety/electrical/docs/elec_hazard_awareness_study_guide: "Fire Hazards
control".
https://www.utexas.edu/safety/ehs/lab/manual/4_guidelines.html
http://www.kostic.niu.edu/labsafetyrules.html
https://www.osha.gov/Publications/laboratory/OSHAfactsheet-laboratory-safety-ergonomics.pdf
.
CHAPTER 2
USE AND CARE OF THE MICROSCOPE
The microscope is one piece of equipment that is used by both the
pathologist and the histotechnologist. The pathologist examines the slide under
the microscope to identify a disease process or an abnormality that will directly
affect the patient's treatment. The histotechnologist examines the same slide
microscopically for quality control to determine whether all technical processes
are done properly and if a slide of diagnostic quality has been achieved. It is
therefore important for the histotechnologist to be knowledgeable and skilled in
the use of the microscope. The microscope enlarges images and allows the
visualization of morphologic cellular details that are too small to be seen by the
naked eyes. With the aid of lenses, the unstained section allows the majority of
light to pass through, but without adequate distinction between various tissue
structures. Stains and dyes are used to give contrast to the tissue by creating light
absorption of varying degrees, uniquely taken up by each tissue element, and
seen microscopically as colors. To be useful, a microscope must accomplish
three things: (1) it must magnify the object, (2) it must resolve the details of the
object, and (3) it must make these details visible.
There are many types of microscopes. The most common (and the first to be
invented) is the optical compound microscope, which uses light to image the
sample. Other major types of microscopes are the electron microscope (both the
transmission electron microscope and the scanning electron microscope), the
ultra-microscope, and the various types of scanning probe microscope.
COMPOUND MICROSCOPE
A compound light microscope is a microscope with more than one lens and
its own light source. In this type of microscope, there are ocular lenses in the
binocular eyepieces and objective lenses in a rotating nosepiece closer to the
specimen. Because it contains its own light source at its base, a compound light
microscope is also considered a bright field microscope, which means that the
specimen is lit from below and viewed from above. Illumination comes from
below and contrast in the sample is caused by absorbance of some of the
transmitted light in dense areas of the sample. Bright-field microscopy is the
simplest and most popular of all techniques used for illumination of samples in
light microscopes. The typical appearance of a bright-field microscopy image is
a dark sample on a bright background, hence the name. With bright field
illumination, the sample’s contrast comes from its absorption of the light, as
opposed to dark field illumination where the contrast comes from the sample
scattering the light.
The compound microscope consists of the lens system condenser, objective
and ocular. The condenser brings the parallel rays of light to a point of focus in
the plane of the object. The objective magnifies the object being viewed and
focuses a real image in the upper part of the body tube. The ocular further
magnifies the image formed by the objective.
To effectively use the microscope, it is necessary to know its parts and
basics of magnification. The compound microscope currently in use for surgical
pathology consists of its framework and its two separate lens system.
Viewing Heads
Monocular Heads - only use one eyepiece when viewing the specimen.
You are restricted if you want to use an LCD camera because this would occupy
the eyepiece. However, monocular microscopes are light weight and are
inexpensive.
Binocular heads have two eyepieces and are more convenient and
comfortable to use. It is the most common choice.
Trinocular Heads - have a third eyepiece tube that can be used by another
person simultaneously or by an LCD camera. The trinocular option is more
expensive than the other two types.
Usually the heads can be set to a 45 degree or a 30 degree angle with sliding
or hinge adjustment for inter-pupillary distance. These options are based on
individual preference.
The main framework of the Compound Microscope consists of:
1. Base -provides support for the microscope. The base should be large and
solid enough to allow the microscope to stand by itself.
2. Arm - supports and holds the magnifying and adjustment system. It can
be used as a handle for carrying the microscope.
3. Stage - is the flat platform where the slide is placed for examination.
4. Substage - is located directly under the stage and holds the condenser
and diaphragm.
5. Mechanical Stage - permits movement of the stage while holding the
slide in the phase of focus.
The parts of the lens system are:
1. Nosepiece - is located at the end of the body tube for holding the
objectives.
3. Objectives - consist of a system of lenses located at the end of the body
tube that is held in place by the nosepiece and is closer to the slide under
examination. The purpose of the objective is to increase or decrease
magnification. The objectives are mounted on a revolving turret allowing
for the change of objectives. When one objective is focused on the turret,
all lenses will be approximately in focus. If this is true, the microscope is
said to be Par focal.
4. Focal length - is the distance between outer lens of objective and the
cover glass of the slide under examination.
In order to enable the pathologist to diagnose the presence or absence of
disease, the histotechnologist needs to produce a tissue section of good quality
that allows for adequate interpretation of microscopic cellular changes. Solid
tissues need to be fixed and processed to preserve their structures, and eventually
impregnated with an appropriate hardening substance to permit making thin
slices suitable for staining and microscopic evaluation. This can be
accomplished by preserving and carefully processing solid structures and tissues
in the following order: 1. Fixation
2. Decalcification (optional)
3. Dehydration
4. Clearing
5. Impregnation (Infiltration)
6. Embedding
7. Trimming
8. Section-Cutting (Microtomy)
9. Staining
10. Mounting
11. Labeling
“Tissue processing” describes the various steps required to take the tissue from
fixation to the state where it is completely infiltrated with a suitable histological
wax and can be embedded ready for section cutting on the microtome.
Once the tissue has been fixed, it must be processed into a form in which it
can be made into thin microscopic sections. Wet fixed tissues (in aqueous
solutions) cannot be directly infiltrated with paraffin. First, the water from the
tissues must be removed by dehydration. This is usually done with increasing
concentrations of alcohol (70% to 95% to 100%). Because water and paraffin are
not miscible, the specimens must be gradually dehydrated to achieve complete
replacement of water with alcohol. Once successfully dehydrated, the next step
is called "clearing" and consists of removing the dehydrating agent (alcohol)
with a substance that will be miscible with the embedding medium (paraffin).
The commonest clearing agent is xylene. Finally, the tissues are infiltrated with
an embedding agent (almost always paraffin).
Overview of the steps in tissue processing for paraffin sections
1. Fixation
It is important that tissues are handled carefully and appropriately fixed as
soon as possible after arriving in the laboratory. The specimen is placed in a
liquid fixing agent (fixative) such as formaldehyde solution (formalin). This will
slowly penetrate the tissue causing chemical and physical changes that will
harden and preserve the tissue and protect it against subsequent processing steps.
Formalin, usually as a phosphate-buffered solution, is the most popular fixative
for preserving tissues that will be processed for paraffin embedding. Ideally,
specimens should remain in fixative long enough for it to penetrate the tissue
and then for an additional period in order to allow the chemical reactions of
fixation to reach equilibrium (fixation time). Fixation is a critical step in the
preparation of histological sections. If it is not carried out under optimal
conditions or if fixation is delayed, a tissue specimen can be irreversibly
damaged. Following fixation, appropriately trimmed specimens are placed in
suitable labelled cassettes (small perforated baskets) to segregate them from
other specimens. Formalin-fixed, paraffin-embedded tissues may be stored
indefinitely at room temperature, and nucleic acids (both DNA and RNA) may
be recovered from them decades after fixation.
2. Dehydration
Because melted paraffin wax is hydrophobic (not miscible with water), most
of the water in a specimen must be removed before it can be infiltrated with wax.
This process is commonly carried out by immersing specimens in a series of
ethanol (alcohol) solutions with increasing concentration to avoid excessive
distortion of tissue until a water-free tissue in alcohol is reached. Water soluble
proteins are removed at lower concentrations of ethanol. When ethanol
concentration is increased to 100%, certain lipids may be dissolved. A typical
dehydration sequence for specimens not more than 4mm thick would be: 70%
ethanol 15 min
90% ethanol 15 min
100% ethanol 15 min
100% ethanol 15 min
100% ethanol 30 min
100% ethanol 45 min
Fatty tissues such as breast or lipoma may be inadequately processed in
what is normally a successful schedule for other tissues. Ethanol is a poor fat
solvent. To ensure complete dehydration, a superior fat solvent such as acetone
or isopropanol should be added before the final absolute ethanol, and chloroform
or trichloroethane used as the transition solvent.
3. Clearing
The dehydrated tissue is transferred to an intermediate solvent that is fully
miscible with both ethanol and paraffin wax. The term “clearing” has been
chosen because many (but not all) clearing agents impart an optical clarity or
transparency to the tissue due to their relatively high refractive index. Another
important role of the clearing agent is to remove a substantial amount of fat from
the tissue which otherwise presents a barrier to wax infiltration. Following the
dehydration, the tissue is immersed in one to three different xylene immersions.
In these stages, the ethanol is gradually replaced with xylene and when the tissue
is embedded, the xylene will then be replaced by the molten paraffin wax. A
typical clearing sequence for specimens not more than 4mm thick would be:
Xylene 20 min
Xylene 20 min
Xylene 45 min
4. Infiltration
The cleared tissue is infiltrated with a suitable histological wax (usually
paraffin) which is liquid at 60°C and then allowed to cool to 20°C in order to
solidify into a consistency that allows sections to be cut. These waxes are
mixtures of purified paraffin wax and various additives that may include resins
such as styrene or polyethylene that allow them to be sectioned thin enough on a
microtome, forming ribbons that can flatten fully when floated on a warm water
bath.
To completely displace the clearing agent, a typical paraffin infiltration
sequence of paraffin for specimens not more than 4mm thick would be:
Paraffin wax 30 min
Paraffin wax 30 min
Paraffin wax 45 min
5. Embedding
Once the tissue has been processed it is ready to be oriented into a paraffin
block and subsequently sectioned. After infiltration with wax, the tissue is
oriented and placed in a mold that is filled with molten wax to form a solid tissue
block that can later be clamped into a microtome for sectioning. The infiltrated
tissue is removed from the cassette and very carefully oriented in a suitably sized
metal mold so that the “plane of section” can be determined. Correct orientation
of tissue in a mold is the most important step in embedding. Incorrect placement
of tissues may result in diagnostically important tissue elements being missed or
damaged during microtomy. Usually tissues are embedded with the surface to be
cut facing down in the mold. After orienting the section, the mold is filled with
molten wax. The main part of the labelled cassette is placed on top of the mold
and topped up with more wax. The whole mold is placed on a cold plate to
solidify. When this is completed the block with its attached cassette can be
removed from the mold and is ready to be sectioned on a microtome. The choice
of mold will depend on the type of chuck in the microtome that will be used to
section the tissue. Stainless steel, ceramic, paper, plastic, and aluminum foil
molds can be used. The basic method is the same for each.
Double embedding is the process by which tissues are first embedded or
fully infiltrated with a supporting medium such as agar or nitrocellulose, then
infiltrated a second time with wax in which they are also embedded. Double
embedding in agar-paraffin is a reliable and convenient method of handling
minute and friable tissue fragments such as curetting and endoscopic biopsies,
which can be lost during tissue processing. It also overcomes the difficulty of
manipulating small tissue fragments during embedding and facilitates correct
orientation and identification of tissues for histochemistry and
immunohistochemistry. The tissues may shrink by the time they are infiltrated
with wax, but if adequately processed, they will still show good morphological
detail and allow for accurate histopathological evaluation.
6. Section-cutting
Once the tissues have been embedded, they must be cut into sections that are
thin enough to be placed on a slide. This is done with a microtome. Good
microtomy techniques will minimize artifacts that can lead to difficult diagnostic
interpretation of special stains. One of the most directly correlated factors is the
thickness in which a specimen is cut. Specimens for routine Hematoxylin and
Eosin (H&E) are cut 3–5 μm in thickness. Tissues to be examined for amyloid
deposits are better sectioned at 8–12 μm, whereas kidney biopsies should be cut
at 2 μm for optimal viewing of the structures of glomeruli. Paraffin wax does not
provide a sufficiently hard matrix for cutting very thin sections for electron
microscopy. Epoxy resins are the most commonly employed embedding media
for semi-thin and ultrathin sections, but acrylic resins are also used, particularly
where immunohistochemistry is required. Thicker sections (0.35μm to 5μm) of
resin-embedded tissue can also be cut for light microscopy. Again, the
immiscibility of most epoxy and acrylic resins with water necessitates the use of
dehydration, usually with ethanol.
The microtome is nothing more than a knife with a mechanism for
advancing a paraffin block across the knife. Knives are either of the standard
thick metal variety or thin disposable variety (like a disposable razor blade).
Usually this distance can be set, for most paraffin embedded tissues at 6 to 8
microns. Plastic blocks (methacrylate, araldite, or epon) are sectioned with glass
or diamond knives that can cut sections down to about 1 micron. Thin sections
for electron microscopy (0.25 micron) are best done with a diamond knife. The
glass slides containing the specimen are then placed in a warm oven for about 15
minutes to help the section adhere to the slide. If this heat might harm such
things as antigens for immunostaining, then this step can be bypassed and glue-
coated slides can be used instead to pick up the sections.
It is important to have a properly fixed and embedded block or much artifact
can be introduced during the sectioning. Common artifacts include tearing,
ripping, creases, holes or folding of sections, etc. Once sections are cut, they are
floated on a warm water bath that helps remove wrinkles. Then they are picked
up on a glass microscopic slide. The tissue slide is drained and may be gently
heated to evaporate the layer of water between the sections and the glass. When
all the water is gone, the slide may be heated enough to melt the wax, a
procedure that may improve adhesion.
7. Mounting of Tissue Sections
Paraffinized ribbons of serial tissue sections can be removed from the
microtome knife as they are cut, by using a wooden tongue depressor blade. In
this process, a slight traction is exerted on the end of the ribbon, stretching it
gradually over the wooden blade while floating in a warm water bath. The
temperature of the warm bath should be kept at 5–10oC below the melting point
of the embedding wax. If it is too hot, desiccated-looking sections will result,
while cool water baths will produce excessive wrinkling of the tissue. Adding a
few drops of ethyl alcohol to the water may facilitate the mounting of tissue
sections. The ribbon must not be left in the bath for more than 1 or 2 minutes, or
over-hydration of the tissue will be produced, simulating the appearance of
edema fluid when examined microscopically. Because tissue sections do not
adhere well to untreated glass slides, a bonding agent also must be a component
of the water bath. Albumin, and poly-L-lysine are all suitable additives of this
type.
One of the most serious issues faced in histotechnology is misidentification
of tissues, which includes mislabeled specimens, block identification problems,
and tissue contaminants. A potentially dangerous mistake that can take place
when mounting sections from flotation baths is the “shedding” of friable small
tissue fragments that float freely on the surface of the water, and which may be
inadvertently picked up when mounting slides from subsequently processed but
unrelated cases. Known as ‘‘floaters’’, these tiny pieces of unrelated tissue
commonly cause problems in interpretation of the biopsies by the pathologist.
For example, a small piece of unrelated cancerous tissue may inadvertently
“float” and be deposited on the slides of a subsequent case that is being
evaluated for the presence of malignancy.
This may lead to an inaccurate diagnosis and result in medicolegal liabilities
on both the pathologist and the histotechnologist. Meticulous cleaning of the
microtome water bath and frequent clearing or changing of the water will
alleviate the danger of rare contaminants being carried over to subsequent
sections being mounted. Also, the technologist must routinely skim, or otherwise
clear, the surface of the water bath between cases. Another source of floater-type
artefact is the ‘‘tongue blade metastasis,’’ wherein tissue adheres to a wooden
applicator stick that is used to float successively prepared ribbons from two
different cases. In cases where the specimen is limited in size (such as skin,
bronchoscopy and gastrointestinal biopsies), it is advisable to save any
unmounted paraffin ribbon (with appropriate identification) from such cases for
at least a week after they are accessioned, so that remounts can be prepared
when additional sections are requested, without the need for further microtomy
of the tissue block.
8. Staining
The tissue sections mounted on the slide are nearly invisible under a light
microscope so they must be stained to create contrast. After drying in a 60oC, the
slide is passed through another series of chemical reagents. Xylene removes the
paraffin and absolute alcohol removes the xylene. The tissue on the slide is then
rehydrated to prepare it for staining. Most staining procedures in the laboratory,
aside from antibody-based immunohistochemistry (IHC), use chemicals or dyes
that will bind or have affinity for certain components of the cells and
extracellular components. The chemical properties of these dyes produce the
visual appearance that is seen under the microscope. Different staining
procedures are done depending on the tissue component that is being studied.
Potential contamination during the staining procedure may be much higher
than having “floaters” when mounting sections from a water bath. The tissue is
deparaffinized during the first steps in preparing the slides for staining. As the
slides are dipped up and down into the staining baths, the deparaffinized tissue
can fragment and small dis-cohesive pieces can break free and be lifted on the
slide. Contamination in the staining solution is dependent on the volume of
slides being stained and the time point during the day that the samples are taken.
Because the stainer baths are a potential reservoir of tissue contaminants,
changing the staining fluids may alleviate some of the potential for carryover
from this source. And, as higher numbers of the contaminating fragments are
localized to the first xylenes and alcohols, frequently changing these baths in
particular may also be useful.
Automatic Tissue Processing
Tissue processing can be performed manually (hand processing), but when
there is a large volume of tissues that need to be processed, it is more convenient
and much more efficient to use an automated tissue processing machine (“tissue
processor”). This machine allows the specimens to be infiltrated with a sequence
of different solvents finishing in molten paraffin wax. The specimens are in an
aqueous environment to start with (water-based) and must be passed through
multiple changes of dehydrating and clearing solvents (typically ethanol and
xylene) before they can be placed in molten wax (which is hydrophobic and
immiscible with water). The duration and step details of the “processing
schedule” chosen for a particular batch of specimens will depend on the nature
and size of the specimens. The older design of an automatic issue processor is a
carousel which contains a cage in which the tissue cassettes are placed. This
carousel has a number of glass beakers containing solvents and solutions which
ensure that the tissue is dehydrated and cleared ready for paraffin wax
embedding. The carousel vertically agitates the cage in each solution before
moving on to the next solution in the dehydration/ clearing method. The modern
processors have a chamber in which the specimens are held and the different
solutions are pumped in and out of the chamber. In general, the whole process
takes around six hours and is usually set up to run overnight. Tissues that come
off the tissue processor are still in the cassettes and must be manually put into
the blocks by a technician who must pick the tissues out of the cassette and pour
molten paraffin over them. This "embedding" process is very important, because
the tissues must be aligned, or oriented, properly in the block of paraffin.
Tissue preservation requires the use of a fixative that can stabilize the
proteins, nucleic acids and internal components of the tissue by making them
insoluble. A variety of chemical fixatives are available for use, depending on the
type of tissue to be preserved and the cytologic features to be demonstrated.
Each fixative preserves morphology differently. Neutral buffered formalin does
not provide adequate fixation in some cells and tissues, like connective tissues,
mucus, and bone marrow. Fixatives other than alcohol or formalin may be
preferred in certain circumstances and may be necessary for special studies and
techniques. Substitutes for formalin are available that may provide adequate
fixation with reduced risk of occupational health and safety hazards and
improvements to staining results.
There are two major groups of chemical fixatives, classified according to
their mechanism of action:
Crosslinking Fixatives (e.g., Aldehydes) that act by creating covalent
chemical bonds between proteins in tissue. This anchors soluble proteins
to the cytoskeleton, and lends additional rigidity to the tissue.
Precipitating (or denaturing) fixatives (e.g., alcoholic fixatives) that act
by reducing the solubility of protein molecules and (often) by disrupting
the hydrophobic interactions that give many proteins their tertiary
structure. The precipitation and aggregation of proteins is a very different
process from the crosslinking that occurs with the aldehyde fixatives.
Crosslinking fixatives – Aldehydes
By far the most commonly used fixative in histology is formaldehyde,
which fixes the tissues by forming cross-linkages in the proteins, particularly
between lysine residues. This cross-linkage does not harm the structure of
proteins greatly, so that antigenicity is not lost. Therefore, formaldehyde is good
for immunohistochemical techniques. The standard solution is 10% neutral
buffered formalin or approximately 3.7%-4.0% formaldehyde in phosphate-
buffered saline. A buffer prevents acidity that would promote autolysis and cause
precipitation of formol-heme pigment in the tissues. Its effects are reversible
with excess water and the presence of buffer prevents formalin pigmentation.
Other benefits of formaldehyde include long term storage and good tissue
penetration. It is particularly good for immunohistochemistry techniques, and
formaldehyde vapor can be used as a fixative for cell smears.
Formaldehyde and Formalin
The terms “formalin” and “formaldehyde” are often used interchangeably,
although the chemical composition of each fixative is different. Formaldehyde is
a gas produced by the oxidation of methyl alcohol, and is soluble in water to the
extent of 37-40% weight in volume. The commercially available solution of
formaldehyde contains 35-40% gas by weight (equivalent to 40% stock or
concentrated formalin). Pure stock solution of 40% formalin is unsatisfactory for
routine fixation since high concentrations of formaldehyde tend to over-harden
the outer layer of the tissue and affect staining adversely. Formalin is made with
formaldehyde but the percentage denotes a different formaldehyde
concentration. For example, 10% neutral-buffered formalin (NBF or simply
formalin) is really a 4% formaldehyde solution. This is because formalin is
prepared from commercial-grade 37 to 40% formaldehyde, by diluting the
concentrated formalin 1:10 in phosphate buffer. It is recommended that
laboratories avoid the use of concentrated formalin solutions by purchasing
commercially prepared 10% formalin.
A. Buffered Formalin
The most widely used fixative for routine histology is 10% neutral buffered
formalin (NBF, approximately 4% formaldehyde), buffered to pH 7 with
phosphate buffer. This fixative can effectively prevent autolysis and provide
excellent preservation of tissue and cellular morphology. It is considered the
fixative of choice for many other procedures that require paraffin embedding,
including immunohistochemistry and interphase Fluorescent In-Situ
Hybridization (FISH).
Formalin usually contains about 10% methanol, which is added by the
manufacturer to retard the formation of higher polymers that eventually fall out
of solution as paraformaldehyde. Old bottles of formalin, especially after storage
in a cold place, often contain deposits of this white powder.
For routine fixation in 10% NBF, dissect the specimen as soon as possible
and immerse it in a large volume of fixative (at least 10-20x volume of fix to
tissue). Place at 4oC and fix ‘overnight’. After fixation, wash the tissue well in
several changes of Phosphate Buffered Saline (PBS). The tissue may be stored in
cold PBS for short periods of time (2 or 3 days) and will be safe in ethanol since
there is no danger of bacterial degradation. However, it should not be stored in
70% ethanol for an extended period. Storage in PBS with sodium azide added at
4oC is a better alternative. The safest of all is to promptly fix, wash and deliver
the samples either in phosphate buffered formalin or in alcohol for processing
and embedding.
Small (10×10×3 mm) pieces fixed in NBF for 12-24 hours will generally
show good cytoplasmic preservation and nuclear detail. “Overnight” fixation
(i.e., 8-12 hours) is generally indicated for 10 mm thick slices of tissues.
Fixation with formaldehyde is largely complete in 24 hours, but cross-linking
reactions continue for at least two weeks. Large, soft specimens such as whole
human brains require 2-4 weeks in NBF to become firm enough to cut into slices
from which samples can be taken for histology. Variations in time and conditions
of fixation cause the majority of problems in histochemistry. There is some
evidence that aldehydes continue to react with nucleic acids longer than after
they are placed in fixative so that up to 30% may be lost during usual fixation.
Physical entrapment of these very large molecules by the protein matrix may
play a part in the retention of nucleic acids within the tissue.
At temperatures normally used for fixation (20o-22°C), native DNA and
RNA do not react with formaldehyde. If reaction mixtures are heated, at about
45°C in case of RNA and 65°C for DNA, reaction begins to take place due to the
uncoiling of DNA and RNA. A similar phenomenon is observed in the case of
reactions between glutaraldehyde and nucleic acids. This is important to note,
because only at the elevated temperatures used when tissues are infiltrated with
paraffin or resin, can a reaction with any remaining fixative take place. This lack
of reaction potentially allows archival material to be used for DNA analysis in
disease.
For in-situ hybridization, there is no significant difference between fixation
in neutral buffered formaldehyde, Bouin’s Solution or zinc formaldehyde.
Advantages of using Formalin:
1. It is cheap, readily available, easy to prepare, and relatively stable,
especially if stored in buffered solution.
2. It is compatible with many stains, and therefore can be used with various
staining techniques depending upon the need of the tissues.
3. It does not over-harden tissues, even with prolonged periods of fixation,
as long as solutions are regularly changed.
4. It penetrates tissues well.
5. It preserves fat and mucin, making them resistant to subsequent
treatment with fat solvents, and allowing them to be stained for
demonstration.
6. It preserves glycogen.
7. It preserves but does not precipitate proteins, thereby allowing tissue
enzymes to be studied. It does not make tissues brittle, and is therefore
recommended for nervous tissue preservation.
8. It allows natural tissue colors to be restored after fixation by immersing
formalin-fixed tissues in 70% alcohol for one hour, and is therefore
recommended for colored tissue photography.
9. It allows frozen tissue sections to be prepared easily.
10. It does not require washing out, unless tissues have stayed in formalin
for excessively long periods of time.
Disadvantages:
1. Fumes are irritating to the nose and eyes and may cause sinusitis,
allergic rhinitis, or excessive lacrimation.
2. The solution is irritating to the skin and may cause allergic dermatitis
on prolonged contact.
3. It may produce considerable shrinkage of tissues.
4. It is a soft fixative and does not harden some cytoplasmic structures
adequately enough for paraffin embedding.
5. If unbuffered:
a. Formalin reduces both basophilic and eosinophilic staining of
cells, thereby reducing the quality of routine cytologic staining.
Acidity of formic acid may, however, be used to an advantage
when applying the silver impregnation technique of staining.
b. It forms abundant brown pigment granules on blood-containing
tissues, e.g., spleen, due to blackening of hemoglobin.
6. Prolonged fixation may produce:
a. Bleaching of the specimen and loss of natural tissue colors.
b. Dispersal of fat from the tissue into the fluid.
c. Dissolution or loss of glycogen, and urate crystals
FACTORS THAT INFLUENCE FORMALIN FIXATION
Post-Mortem or Post-Surgical Interval. Rapid fixation by formalin is
essential because autolysis begins immediately following disruption of blood
and can influence the cellular morphology and staining. The time interval
between death and fixation should be minimized and controlled whenever
possible. If there is a necessary delay in fixation, the tissue should be immersed
in cold phosphate-buffered saline (PBS). Tissues should not be allowed to dry
before (or after) fixation. For certain studies, vascular perfusion with fixative
may be recommended.
Composition of Fixative. Formaldehyde fixation is usually optimal near
physiological pH and ionic strength. Unfortunately, formalin is not stable and
will gradually acidify to form more complex polymers which can have adverse
effects on the tissue. This can be minimized by appropriate buffering and
addition of small amounts of methanol. Commercial preparations in proper
specimen containers are strongly recommended, but should not be used beyond
the expiration date (usually 2 years), because of its short life span.
Volume of Fixative Tissues should be immersed in a 10-20-fold volume of
fixative. Large amounts of blood or protein-rich fluid can decrease the effective
fixative concentration. If necessary, this problem can be minimized by briefly
washing the tissue with PBS prior to fixation. If the fixative becomes cloudy or
bloody after tissue is immersed, the fixative should be changed.
Fixation Time. Fixation with 10% NBF at room temperature for a
minimum of 24 hours at room temperature is recommended in most instances.
However, some bloody, fatty or fetal tissues may require significantly longer
fixation, e.g., up to 48- 72 hours. If the fixed tissue shows internal areas with
normal coloration upon staining, the tissue should be left in fixation for a longer
time period. Small surgical biopsies are sometimes fixed for only 6 hours, but 12
or more hours will often provide a better result. Inadequate-fixation can cause
artefacts following exposure to alcohol during the subsequent tissue processing,
or it can cause damage during decalcification. Too much-fixation can impair
staining, and complicate sectioning.
Temperature. An increase in temperature can increase the rate of fixation
but can also increase the rate of autolysis. Primary fixation in the cold can slow
autolysis, but it also slows the process of fixation, and premature cooling of a
specimen in fixative can lead to inadequate fixation.
Tissue Thickness. Formalin fixation is dependent on diffusion of the fixative
into the tissue. The thicker the tissue, the more time is required to obtain
complete penetration and crosslinking of tissue proteins. If the specimen is too
thick, the center of the tissue can suffer from autolysis or incomplete fixation.
For this reason, tissues should be no thicker than 3-5 mm. Careful slicing of
tissues and solid organs before transferring them to fixative can greatly influence
the efficiency of fixation by increasing exposed surface area and decreasing total
thickness. This is particularly important for fatty, bloody organs and
encapsulated tissues. When slicing tissues, it is important to use a sharp, clean
blade to minimize compression artifacts. For very soft tissues, it is sometimes
helpful to stiffen the tissue by brief fixation prior to cutting of thinner sections
and additional fixation. Tubular organs can be cross-sectioned at small intervals
to enhance exposure of the lumen to the fixative. Any luminal contents (like
feces and mucus) should also be removed.
Post-Fixation Storage. Non-coagulant fixatives such as formalin continue to
crosslink proteins as long as they are in contact with the tissue. If there is to be a
delay in processing after complete fixation (usually 24 hours or more), the fixed
tissue can be stored for up to 3 days in the cold in 70% ethanol. However, it is
essential that the tissue is completely fixed prior to transfer to the alcohol.
Premature transfer of incompletely fixed tissue to alcohol precludes normal
tissue processing.
Mixture of Fixatives
Two aldehyde fixative mixtures have been particularly useful for electron
cytochemistry. The best known mixture of fixative is Karnovsky's
paraformaldehyde-glutaraldehyde solution. Acrolein is another aldehyde which
has been introduced as a mixture with glutaraldehyde or formaldehyde. It
penetrates tissues rapidly, preserves morphology and enzyme activity at low
concentrations, and may be used for immersion fixation of surgical biopsies.
Precautions:
1. Prolonged storage of formaldehyde, especially at very low temperature,
may induce precipitation of white para-formaldehyde deposits and
produce turbidity although this, in itself, does not impair the fixing
property of the solution. Precipitates may be removed by filtration or by
addition of I0% methanol.
2. Methanol added as a preservative to formaldehyde will prevent its
decomposition to formic acid or precipitation to paraformaldehyde, but it
serves to denature protein, thereby rendering formalin unsuitable as a
fixative for electron microscopy.
3. Concentrated solutions of formaldehyde must NEVER be neutralized
since this might cause violent explosions.
4. Room should be properly ventilated with adequate windows and
preferably with an exhaust fan to prevent inhalation of fumes and
consequent injury to the eyes and nose.
5. Dermatitis may be avoided by the use of rubber gloves when handling
specimens fixed in formalin.
6. The bleaching of tissues may be prevented by changing the fluid
fixative every three months.
7. Natural tissue colors may be restored by immersing tissues in 70%
alcohol after fixation.
8. Brown or black crystalline precipitate formed by the action of formic
acid with blood can be removed from the sections prior to staining by
treatment with saturated alcoholic picric acid or a 1% solution of
potassium hydroxide in 80% alcohol. The use of neutral (phosphate)
buffered formalin will prevent the pigmentation.
9. If fatty tissues are to be stored for a long time, cadmium or cobalt salts
can be added to prevent dispersion of fat out into the fluid.
10. After use, formalin should be collected, sealed in appropriately
labelled containers and disposed of by a commercial waste service.
11. All empty containers should be washed thoroughly with water.
12. Formalin should not be released into soil, drains and waterways.
13. Acid reaction due to formic acid formation can be buffered or
neutralized by adding magnesium carbonate or calcium in a wide-mouth
bottle to prevent violent explosion due to insufficient gas space for CO2
release.
14. Calcium acetate may be used to buffer formalin but it leaves a
calcium deposit. The greatest amount of calcium deposit appears
wherever the tissue is most exposed to the fixative (i.e., periphery of the
block, within and around the walls of blood vessels, or in the proximity of
hollow structures).
15. To improve staining and produce firmer and harder consistency,
tissues fixed in formalin for 1 -2 hours may be placed again in Helly's
fluid for 4-6 hours or in formol-sublimate for 4-16 hours (secondary
fixation).
16. Formic acid develops over time producing an acidic solution,
requiring a buffer to remain neutral pH (7.0).
17. Acidic formalin causes hematin pigment deposition in tissues
particularly in hematogenous tissue after storage for extended periods of
time. Methods are available to remove hematin but it is better to prevent
its deposition by maintaining a neutral pH.
20. If post-fixed in osmic acid, the tissue must not be washed in
demineralized water to prevent hypotonicity and bleaching.
22. Fixation of tissue blocks not exceeding 5 mm. in thickness is usually
complete in 6-12 hours at room temperature.
10% Formal-Saline
FORMULA:
40% formaldehyde: 100 ml
Distilled water: 900 ml
Sodium dihydrogen phosphate monohydrate: 4 gm
Disodium hydrogen phosphate anhydrous 6.5 gm
The solution should have a pH of 6.8
Fixation time: 12 – 24 hours
Recommended Application:
This is a simple microanatomical fixative made up of saturated
formaldehyde (40%, by weight volume) diluted to 10% with sodium chloride.
This mixture of formaldehyde in isotonic saline was widely used for routine
histopathology prior to the introduction of phosphate buffered formalin. It is
recommended for fixation of central nervous tissues and general post-mortem
tissues for histochemical examination. It is also recommended for the
preservation of lipids, especially phospholipids. The buffer tends to prevent the
formation of formalin pigment. Many epitopes require antigen retrieval for
successful immunohistochemical (IHC) staining procedure following its use.
Most pathologists feel comfortable interpreting the morphology produced with
this type of fixative. It often produces formalin pigment.
Advantages:
1. It penetrates and fixes tissues evenly.
2. It preserves microanatomic and cytologic details with minimum
shrinkage and distortion.
3. Large specimens may be fixed for a long time provided that the
solution is changed every three months.
4. It preserves enzymes and nucleoproteins.
5. It demonstrates fats and mucin.
6. It does not over-harden tissues, thereby facilitating dissection of the
specimen.
7. It is ideal for most staining techniques, including silver
impregnation.
8. It allows natural tissue color to be restored upon immersion in 70%
alcohol.
Disadvantages are similar to formaldehyde with the following additions:
1. It is a slow fixative. The period of fixation is required to be 24 hours or
longer.
2. Formal-saline fixed tissues tend to shrink during alcohol dehydration;
this may be reduced by secondary fixation.
3. Metachromatic reaction of amyloid is reduced.
4. Acid dye stains less brightly than when fixed with mercuric chloride.
10% Neutral-Buffered Formalin
FORMULA:
Mix together:
Sodium Dihydrogen Phosphate (Na2HPO4), anhydrous, 6.5 gm
Sodium Dihydrogen Phosphate (NaH2PO4•H20) 4 gm
Distilled water 900 ml
Adjust pH to 7.4, then add:
40% formaldehyde 100 ml
Advantages are similar to formal-saline with the following additions:
1. It prevents precipitation of acid formalin pigments on postmortem
tissue.
2. It is the best fixative for tissues containing iron pigments and for
elastic fibers which do not stain well after Susa, Zenker’s or
chromate fixation.
3. It requires no post-treatment after fixation and goes directly into 80%
alcohol for processing.
Disadvantages:
1. It is longer to prepare; hence, is time-consuming.
2. Positivity of mucin to PAS is reduced.
3. It may produce gradual loss in basophilic staining of cells.
4. Reactivity of myelin to Weigert's iron hematoxylin stain is reduced.
5. It is inert towards lipids, especially neutral fats and phospholipids.
Zinc formalin (unbuffered)
FORMULA:
Zinc sulphate 1 gm
Deionized water 900 ml
Stir until dissolved, then add –
40% formaldehyde 100 ml
Recommended Applications
Zinc formalin solutions were devised as alternatives to mercuric chloride
formulations. They are said to give improved results with
immunohistochemistry. There are a number of alternative formulas available
some of which contain zinc chloride which is thought to be slightly more
corrosive than zinc sulphate.
Formol-Corrosive (Formol-Sublimate)
FORMULA:
Sat. Aq. Mercuric chloride 90 ml.
Formaldehyde 40% 10 ml.
Fixation time: 3-24 hours
Formol-mercuric chloride solution is recommended for routine post-mortem
tissues.
Advantages:
1. It penetrates small pieces of tissues rapidly.
2. It produces minimum shrinkage and hardening.
3. It is excellent for many staining procedures including silver reticulum
methods.
4. It brightens cytoplasmic and metachromatic stains better than with
formalin alone.
5. Cytological structures and blood cells are well preserved. There is no
need for "washing-out". Tissues can be transferred directly from fixative
to alcohol.
6. It fixes lipids, especially neutral fats and phospholipids.
Disadvantages:
1. Penetration is slow; hence, tissue sections should not be more than 1 cm
thick.
2. It forms mercuric chloride deposits.
3. It does not allow frozen tissue sections to be made.
4. It inhibits the determination of the extent of tissue decalcification.
Paraformaldehyde
Paraformaldehyde is a polymerized form of formaldehyde, usually obtained
as a fine white powder, which depolymerizes back to formalin when heated. It is
suitable for paraffin embedding and sectioning, and also for
immunocytochemical analysis. Paraformaldehyde fixed samples can also be
stained for general histology but the degree of fixation is less vigorous than
Bouin’s so the quality of the morphology obtained will be less. This fixative
allows for subsequent immuno-detection of certain antigens and should therefore
be used when the objective is to study morphology and protein expression
simultaneously. Its effects are reversible by excess water and it avoids formalin
pigmentation. Other benefits include: Long term storage and good tissue
penetration.
Karnovsky’s Fixative (4% Paraformaldehyde-1% Glutaraldehyde in 0.1M
Phosphate Buffer)
Karnovsky’s fixative is a mixture of paraformaldehyde and glutaral-dehyde.
It is suitable for use when preparing samples for light microscopy in resin
embedding and sectioning, and for electron microscopy. This fixative should
always be prepared fresh.
To prepare 8 % Paraformaldehyde (PFA):
1. Working in a fume cupboard wearing appropriate PPE, heat up 90 ml of
water to 65 °C on a hotplate stirrer.
2. Add 8 g of paraformaldehyde (PFA) powder to the warm water. Use a
magnetic stirrer and hotplate to dissolve PFA (approximately 15-20
minutes).
3. Slowly add drops of 1 M sodium hydroxide solution until the solution is
clear. Make up to 100 ml with additional water.
4. Filter the fixative and adjust pH to 7.3-7.4.
5. Allow fixative to cool to room temperature. Store at −20 °C in aliquots.
Frozen aliquots are stable for up to 6 months.
6. Dispense 25 ml for use in fixative.
To prepare 0.2 M phosphate buffer
1. Solution X: Weigh out 35.61 g of disodium monohydrogen phosphate
(Na2HPO4.2H2O) ± make up to 1000 ml with distilled H2O, stir until
dissolved. 1 year shelf life at room temperature.
2. Solution Y: Weigh out 27.6 g of sodium dihydrogen phosphate
(NaH2PO4.H2O) ± make up to 1000 ml with distilled H2O, stir until
dissolved. 1 year shelf life at room temperature.
3. Add 40.5 ml of Solution X to 9.5 ml of Solution Y to give 50 ml 0.2 M
phosphate buffer
4. Adjust to pH 7.4. This is to be used fresh.
To prepare Karnovsky’s Fixative (for 100 ml add the following together)
FORMULA:
8 % paraformaldehyde 25 ml
25 % glutaraldehyde 10 ml
0.2 M phosphate buffer 50 ml.
Make up to 100 ml with distilled water.
This is to be used fresh.
Glutaraldehyde
Another popular aldehyde for fixation is glutaraldehyde, made up of two
formaldehyde residues, linked by a three carbon chain. Glutaraldehyde is a larger
molecule than formaldehyde, and so its rate of diffusion across membranes is
slower than formaldehyde. Consequently, glutaraldehyde fixation on thicker
tissue samples may be hampered, but this problem can be overcome by reducing
the size of the tissue sample.
One of the advantages of glutaraldehyde fixation is that it causes rapid and
irreversible changes, fixes quickly, is well suited for electron microscopy, it fixes
well at 4oC, and it gives best overall cytoplasmic and nuclear detail. However,
like formaldehyde, glutaraldehyde causes deformation of alpha-helix structure in
proteins so it is not good for immunohistochemical staining. Tissues that have
been fixed with a glutaraldehyde-based fixative must be treated with inert
amine-containing molecules prior to the immunoassay. Free, unsaturated
aldehyde groups are available to covalently link amine-containing moieties such
as antibodies. The most efficient aldehyde blockers are ethanolamine and lysine.
A standard fixative (2% buffered glutaraldehyde) followed by secondary
fixation in osmium tetroxide, is satisfactory for electron microscopy. The
glutaraldehyde must be cold and buffered and not more than 3 months old. The
tissue must be as fresh as possible and preferably sectioned and fixed in
glutaraldehyde at a thickness of no more than 1 mm to enhance fixation. It
penetrates very poorly, but gives best overall cytoplasmic and nuclear detail. A
2.5% solution is used for small tissue fragments and needle biopsies fixed in 2-4
hours at room temperature. A 4% solution is recommended for larger tissues less
than 4 mm thick, fixed in 6-8 hours up to 24 hours.
Some fixation protocols call for a combination of formaldehyde and
glutaraldehyde so that their respective strengths complement one another.
Advantages of Glutaraldehyde over Formalin:
1. It has a more stable effect on tissues, giving a firmer texture with better
tissue sections, especially of central nervous tissues.
2. It preserves plasma proteins better.
3. It produces less tissue shrinkage.
4. It preserves cellular structures better; hence, is recommended for
electron microscopy.
5. It is more pleasant and less irritating to the nose.
6. It does not cause dermatitis.
Disadvantages of Glutaraldehyde over Formaldehyde:
1. It is more expensive.
2. It is less stable.
3. It penetrates tissues more slowly.
4. It tends to make tissue (i.e. renal biopsy) more brittle.
5. It reduces PAS positivity of reactive mucin. This may be prevented by
immersing glutaraldehyde-fixed tissues in a mixture of concentrated
glacial acetic acid and aniline oil.
Precautions:
1. The specimen vial must be kept refrigerated during the fixation
process.
2. Solution may be changed several times during fixation by swirling the
vials to make sure that the specimen is in contact with fresh solution all
the time.
PRECIPITATING (ALCOHOLIC) FIXATIVES
Alcohols are protein denaturants and are not used routinely for tissues
because they cause too much brittleness and hardness. The protein denaturants -
methanol, ethanol and acetone - are rarely used alone for fixing blocks unless
studying nucleic acids. They are also very good for cytologic smears because
they act quickly and give good nuclear detail. Spray cans of alcohol fixatives are
marketed to physicians doing PAP smears. Alcohol alone (preferably methanol)
is suitable for fixing thin layer preparations such as blood films or cell cultures.
Solid specimens taken from patients with gout are usually fixed in 95% ethanol
for subsequent histochemical detection of sodium urate crystals, which can be
dissolved out of the tissue by water. Ethanol appears to give the most usable
DNA fragments for polymerase chain reaction (PCR), whereas formaldehyde
limits the size of fragments which can be retrieved.
Alcohol rapidly denatures and precipitates proteins by destroying hydrogen
and other bonds. It must be used in concentrations ranging from 70 to 100%
because less concentrated solutions will produce lysis of cells. Ethanol (95%) is
fast and cheap. Since smears are only a cell or so thick, there is no great problem
from shrinkage, and since smears are not sectioned, there is no problem from
induced brittleness. They are not good for electron microscopy, though, because
they cause tissue shrinkage .
Absolute alcohol can be used to fix and preserve glycogen, pigments, blood,
tissue films and smears. The color of the specimen can be preserved for
photographic work using 80% alcohol. Sometimes the specimen is taken out
from fixative and placed in 80% alcohol to bring out some of the original color.
Glycerin is also used in combination with alcohol for this purpose.
Alcohol (ethanol or methanol) alone instantly coagulates proteins but causes
considerable distortion of the tissue micro-anatomy. These unwanted changes are
opposed by dilution of the alcohol with chloroform (immiscible with water),
water, and/or acetic acid (which coagulates chromatin and opposes shrinkage)
being miscible with water, alcohol and hydrocarbons. There are also many
mixtures containing an alcohol (usually ethanol), formalin, acetic acid and 10%
to 70% water, where the chemical reactions of formaldehyde with proteins are
not retarded by buffering to a near-neutral pH. All these alcoholic fixatives
contain acetic acid, which produces characteristic patterns of coagulated nuclear
chromatin, facilitating the recognition of cell types.
Methyl Alcohol 100%
Advantages:
1. It is excellent for fixing dry and wet smears, blood smears and bone
marrow tissues.
2. It fixes and dehydrates at the same time.
Disadvantages:
1. Penetration is slow.
2. If left in fixative for more than 48 hours, t issues may be over hardened
and difficult to cut.
Isopropyl Alcohol 95% - is used for fixing touch preparations , although some
touch preparations are air dried and not fixed, for certain special staining
procedures such as Wright-Giemsa.
Ethyl Alcohol - is used at concentrations of 70-100%. If the lower
concentrations are used, the RBC's become hemolyzed and WBC's are
inadequately preserved. It may be used as a simple fixative. It is, however, more
frequently incorporated into compound fixatives for better results.
Fixation Time: 18-24 hours
Advantages:
1. It preserves but does not fix glycogen.
2. It fixes blood, tissue films and smears.
3. It preserves nucleoproteins and nucleic acids, hence, is used for
histochemistry, especially for enzyme studies.
4. It fixes tissue pigments fairly well.
5. It is ideal for small tissue fragments.
6. It may be used both as a fixative and dehydrating agent.
Disadvantages:
1. Hemosiderin preservation is less than in buffered formaldehyde.
2. It is a strong reducing agent; hence, should not be mixed with chromic
acid, potassium dichromate and osmium tetroxide which are strong
oxidizing agents.
3. Lower concentrations (70-80%) will cause RBC hemolysis and
inadequately preserve leukocytes.
4. It dissolves fats and lipids, as a general rule. Alcohol-containing fixatives
are contraindicated when lipids are to be studied.
5. It causes glycogen granules to move towards the poles or ends of the
cells (polarization).
6. Tissue left in alcohol too long will shrink, making it difficult or
impossible to cut.
7. It causes polarization of glycogen granules.
8. It produces considerable hardening and shrinkage of tissues.
Carnoy’s Fixative
FORMULA:
Absolute alcohol 60 ml.
Chloroform 30 ml.
Glacial acetic acid 10 ml.
Fixation Time: 1-3 hours
Advantages:
1. It is considered to be the most rapid fixative and may be used for urgent
biopsy specimens for paraffin processing within 5 hours.
2. It fixes and dehydrates at the same time.
3. It permits good nuclear staining and differentiation.
4. It preserves Nissl granules and cytoplasmic granules well.
5. It preserves nucleoproteins and nucleic acids.
6. It is an excellent fixative for glycogen since aqueous solutions are
avoided.
7. It is very suitable for small tissue fragments such as curettings and
biopsy materials.
8. Following fixation for one hour, tissues may be transferred directly to
absolute alcohol-chloroform mixture, thereby shortening processing time.
9. It is also used to fix brain tissue for the diagnosis of rabies.
Disadvantages:
1. It produces RBC hemolysis, dissolves lipids and can produce excessive
hardening and shrinkage.
2. It causes considerable tissue shrinkage.
3. It is suitable only for small pieces of tissues due to slow penetration.
4. It tends to harden tissues excessively and distorts tissue morphology.
5. It dissolves fat, lipids, and myelin.
6. It leads to polarization unless very cold temperatures (-70°C) are used.
7. It dissolves acid-soluble cell granules and pigments.
Clarke’s solution
FORMULA:
Ethanol (absolute) 75 ml
Acetic acid glacial 25 ml
Fixation time: 3 - 4 hours
Recommended Applications
Clarke’s solution has been used on frozen sections and smears. It can produce
fair results after conventional processing if fixation time is kept very short. It
preserves nucleic acids but extracts lipids. Tissues can be transferred directly
into 95% ethanol.
Alcoholic formalin
FORMULA:
40% Formaldehyde: 100 ml
95% Ethanol: 900 ml
0.5 g calcium acetate can be added to ensure neutrality
Fixation time: 12 – 24 hours
Recommended Applications:
Alcoholic-formalin combines a denaturing fixative with the additive and
cross-linking effects of formalin. It is sometimes used during processing to
complete fixation following incomplete primary formalin fixation. It can be used
for fixation or post-fixation of large fatty specimens (particularly breast),
because it will allow lymph nodes to be more easily detected as it clears and
extracts lipids. If used for primary fixation specimens, it can be placed directly
into 95% ethanol for processing.
Formol-acetic alcohol
FORMULA:
Ethanol absolute: 85 ml
40% formaldehyde: 10 ml
Acetic acid glacial: 5 ml
Fixation time: 1 - 6 hours
Recommended Applications
Formol-acetic acid alcohol is a faster acting agent than alcoholic formalin
due to the presence of acetic acid that can also produce formalin pigment. It is
sometimes used to fix diagnostic cryostat sections. If used for primary fixation,
the specimens can be placed directly into 95% ethanol for processing.
Gendre's Fixative
FORMULA:
95% Ethyl alcohol saturated with picric acid 80 ml.
Strong formaldehyde solution 15 ml.
Glacial acetic acid 5 ml.
Post-fixation with phenol-formalin for 6 hours or more can enhance
immunoperoxidase studies on the tissues, and in some cases, electron
microscopy, if it is necessary at a later time to establish a diagnosis.
Advantages:
1. Fixation is faster (fixation time is reduced to one-half).
2. It can be used for rapid diagnosis because it fixes and dehydrates at the
same time, e.g., in the frozen section room.
3. It is good for preservation of glycogen and for micro-incineration
technique (the burning of a minute tissue specimen for identification of
mineral elements from the ashes).
4. It is used to fix sputum, since it coagulates mucus.
Disadvantages:
1. It produces gross hardening of tissues.
2. It causes partial lysis of RBC.
3. Preservation of iron-containing pigments is poor.
4. Formaldehyde does not give as good a morphological picture as
glutaraldehyde.
5. Formaldehyde causes little cross-linking under usual fixation
conditions where low concentrations of proteins are used, while
glutaraldehyde is most effective at cross-linking.
Newcomer's Fluid
FORMULA:
Isopropyl alcohol 60 ml.
Propionic acid 30 ml.
Petroleum 30 ml.
Ether 10 ml.
Acetone 10 ml.
Dioxane 10 ml.
Fixation time: 12-18 hours at 3°C
Advantages:
1. It is recommended for fixing mucopolysaccharides and nuclear
proteins.
2. It produces better reaction in Feulgen stain than Carnoy's fluid.
3. It acts both as a nuclear and histochemical fixative.
METALLIC FIXATIVES
Mercurials fix tissues through an unknown mechanism that increases
staining brightness and gives excellent nuclear detail. However, mercurials
penetrate poorly and produce tissue shrinkage. Their best application is for
fixation of hematopoietic and reticuloendothelial tissues.
1. Mercuric Chloride
Mercuric chloride is the most common metallic fixative, frequently used in
saturated aqueous solutions of 5-7%. Mercuric chloride is widely used as a
secondary fixative reacting with a number of amino acid residues and
accompanied by spectroscopic changes, probably due to reaction with histidine
residues. Mercuric chloride-based fixatives are used as an alternative to
formaldehyde-based fixatives to overcome poor cytological preservation and
include such well-known fixatives as B-5 and Zenker's solution. They penetrate
relatively poorly and cause some tissue hardness, but give excellent nuclear
detail. These fixatives work by additive and coagulative means. The major
advantages of using these fixatives include good penetration resulting in more
intense immunostaining and the preservation of cytological detail that allow for
easier morphological interpretation. These fixatives often contain neutral salt to
maintain tonicity and can be mixed with other fixatives to provide a balanced
solution. Their best application is for fixation of hematopoietic and
reticuloendothelial tissues.
Mercuric chloride penetrates poorly and produces shrinkage of tissues, so it
is usually combined with other fixative agents. Tissues fixed with mixtures
containing mercuric chloride (except Susa) contain black precipitates of
mercury. Mercury deposits are removed from deparaffinized sections before
staining, by treating the section with 0.5% iodine solution in 70% ethanol for 5-
10 minutes. Sections are rinsed in water, decolorized for 5 minutes in 5% sodium
thiosulfate and washed in running water.
Following mercuric chloride post-fixation, the ultrastructural preservation is
poor, but trichrome staining methods also work well and many
immunoperoxidase techniques are satisfactory.
If the glacial acetic acid is replaced by 5 ml of formalin (37–40%
formaldehyde), the resulting solution is Helly's fixative, sometimes also called
"Formol-Zenker". Helly’s fixative is stable for only a few hours because the
formaldehyde and dichromate components react, producing formic acid and
chromic ions; the orange solution becomes greenish.
Advantages:
1. It penetrates and hardens tissues rapidly and well.
2. Nuclear components are shown in fine detail.
3. It precipitates all proteins.
4. It has a greater affinity to acid dyes and is preferred in lieu of
formaldehyde for cytoplasmic staining.
5. Trichrome staining is excellent.
6. It is the routine fixative of choice for preservation of cell detail in
tissue photography.
7. It permits brilliant metachromatic staining of cells.
8. It is recommended for renal tissue, fibrin, connective tissue and
muscle.
Disadvantages:
1. It causes marked shrinkage of cells (this may be counteracted by
addition of acid).
2. It rapidly hardens the outer layer of the tissue with incomplete fixation
of the center; therefore, thin sections should be made.
3. Penetration beyond the first 2-3 millimeters is slow; hence, not more
than 5 mm. thickness of tissues should be used.
4. If left in fixative for more than 1-2 days, the tissue becomes unduly
hard and brittle.
5. It prevents adequate freezing of fatty tissues and makes cutting of
frozen tissues difficult.
6. It causes considerable lysis of red blood cells and removes much iron
from hemosiderin.
7. It is inert to fats and lipids.
8. It leads to the formation of black granular deposits in the tissues.
9. It reduces the amount of demonstrable glycogen.
10. Compound solutions containing mercuric chloride deteriorate rapidly
upon addition of glacial acetic acid to formalin.
11. It is extremely corrosive to metals.
Precautions:
1. Sections must be cleared of mercury deposits before immunostaining.
Black deposits may be removed by adding saturated iodine solution in
95% alcohol, the iodine being decolorized with absolute alcohol in the
subsequent stages of dehydration.
2. Compound solutions must always be freshly prepared.
3. The use of metallic forceps and of metal caps to cover the bottles
containing the fixative should be avoided.
4. Contact of mercuric fixatives with personal jewelries should be avoided.
5. Mercury-containing solutions (Zenker's or B-5) should always be
discarded into proper containers. Mercury, if poured down a drain, will
form amalgams with the metal that build up and cannot be removed.
Zenker's Solution
FORMULA:
Mercuric chloride 5 gm
Potassium dichromate 2.5 gm
Distilled water 100 ml
Acetic acid, glacial 5 ml (to be added just before use)
Heat, cool, filter in brown bottle. Wash sample for 24 hours with
distilled water after fixation.
Fixation time: 12-24 hours
Advantages:
1. It produces a fairly rapid and even fixation of tissues.
2. Stock solutions keep well without disintegration.
3. It is recommended for trichrome staining.
4. It permits brilliant staining of nuclear and connective tissue fibers.
5. It is recommended for congested specimens (such as lung, heart and
blood vessels) and gives good results with PTAH and trichrome staining.
6. It is compatible with most stains.
7. It may act as a mordant to make certain special staining reactions
possible.
8. It is a stable fixative that can be stored for many years.
Disadvantages:
1. Penetration is poor.
2. It is not stable after addition of acetic acid.
3. Prolonged fixation (for more than 24 hours) will make tissues brittle
and hard.
4. It causes lysis of red blood cells and removes iron from hemosiderin.
5. It does not permit cutting of frozen sections.
6. It has the tendency to form mercuric pigment deposits or precipitates.
7. Tissue must be washed in running water for several hours (or
overnight) before processing. Insufficient washing may inhibit or
interfere with good cellular staining.
Precautions:
1. Do not let tissues stay in solution for more than 24 hours.
2. Solutions must always be freshly prepared.
3. Tissues should be cut thin (2-3 mm.) and hollow organs should be
opened to promote complete penetration and fixation.
4. Tissues must be washed out thoroughly in running water to permit
good staining.
5. It produces mercury pigment which should be removed from sections
prior to staining and can produce chrome pigment if tissue is not washed
in water prior to processing. After water washing, tissue should be stored
in 70% ethanol.
6. Mercuric deposits may be removed by immersing tissues in alcoholic
iodine solution prior to staining, through a process known as de-
zenkerization.
Chemically, de-zenkerization is done by oxidation with iodine to form
mercuric iodide, which can be subsequently removed by treatment with sodium
thiosulfate, using the following procedure:
1. Bring slides to water.
2. Immerse in Lugol's iodine (5 minutes).
3. Wash in running water (5 minutes).
4. Immerse in sodium thiosulfate 5% (5 minutes).
5. Wash in running water (5 minutes).
6. Proceed with required water soluble stain.
Zenker-Formol (Helly’s) Solution
FORMULA:
Mercuric chloride, 5 gm
Potassium dichromate, 2.5 gm
Distilled water, 100 ml
40% formaldehyde 5 ml (to be added immediately
before use)
Heat, cool, filter in brown bottle.
Wash sample for 24 hours with distilled water after fixation.
Fixation time: 4 – 24 hours
Practical Applications:
Zenker’s solution is an excellent fixative for bone marrow, extramedullary
hematopoiesis and intercalated discs of cardiac muscle. However, it produces
mercury pigment which should be removed from sections prior to staining and it
can produce chrome pigment if tissue is not washed in water prior to processing.
After water washing, fixed tissue should be stored in 70% ethanol. Because of
the low pH of this fixative, formalin pigment may also occur. Never use metal
forceps to handle tissue.
Advantages:
1. It is an excellent microanatomic fixative for pituitary gland, bone
marrow and blood containing organs such as spleen and liver.
2. It penetrates and fixes tissues well.
3. Nuclear fixation and staining with Helly’s solution is better than with
Zenker's.
4. It preserves cytoplasmic granules well.
Disadvantages:
The disadvantages of Helly's solution are similar to Zenker's except that brown
pigments are produced if tissues (especially blood containing organs) are
allowed to stay in the fixative for more than 24 hours due to RBC lysis. This
may be removed by immersing the tissue in saturated alcoholic picric acid or
sodium hydroxide.
Lillie’s B-5 Fixative
Lillie’s B5 fixative is 4% aqueous formaldehyde with 0.22M mercuric
chloride and 0.22M acetic acid. This mixture enhances nuclear detail, which is
important for identifying normal and abnormal cell types in bone marrow
(hematopoietic tissue) specimens. The coagulation of nuclear chromatin is an
effect of the acetic acid. The mercuric chloride ensures rapid structural
stabilization and also facilitates bright staining by many of the dyes used in
microtechnique. The reasons for this effect on stainability are not understood.
A dirty looking brown crystalline precipitate, probably mercurous chloride
(Hg2Cl2) forms in all parts of tissues fixed in mixtures containing HgCl2. It is
called mercury pigment and before staining must be removed by sequential
treatments with iodine and sodium thiosulfate solutions. Because it contains
mercury, B-5 is subject to toxic waste disposal regulations, which apply to the
fixative solution and every solution thereafter that has been contaminated with
mercury.
FORMULA:
B-5 Stock solution
Mercuric chloride: 12 g
Sodium acetate anhydrous: 2.5 g
Distilled water: 200 ml
Working solution: (prepare immediately before use)
B-5 stock solution: 20 ml
40% formaldehyde: 2 ml
Fixation time: 4 – 8 hours
Practical Applications:
1. Despite its mercuric chloride content and consequent problems with
disposal, this solution is popular for fixation of hematopoietic, bone
marrow biopsies and lymphoid tissue.
2. Rapid fixation can be achieved in 1 1/2 - 2 hours.
3. It produces excellent nuclear detail, provides good results with many
special stains, and is recommended for immunohisto-chemical staining.
4. Sections will require the removal of mercury pigment prior to staining.
5. Tissue should not be stored in this fixative but placed in 70% ethanol
instead.
6. Over-fixation hardens the tissue and makes cutting difficult.
7. The two working solutions are kept separate, since the mixture is
unstable. Mix just prior to use.
8. Some B-5 solutions will form precipitate on standing, but this is of no
consequence.
9. As with all mercuric chloride fixatives, the mercury pigment can be
removed by de-zenkerization.
Heidenhain's Susa Solution – is recommended mainly for tumor biopsies
especially of the skin; it is an excellent cytologic fixative.
FORMULA:
Mercuric chloride 45 gm
Sodium chloride 5 gm
Trichloroacetic acid 20 gm
Glacial acetic 40 ml
Acid Formaldehyde 40% 200 ml
40% Distilled water 800 ml
Fixation time: 3-12 hours
Advantages:
1. It penetrates and fixes tissues rapidly and evenly.
2. It produces minimum shrinkage and hardening of tissues due to the
counter-balance of the swelling effects of acids and the shrinkage effect
of mercury.
3. It permits most staining procedures to be done, including silver
impregnation, producing brilliant results with sharp nuclear and
cytoplasmic details.
4. It permits easier sectioning of large blocks of fibrous connective
tissues.
5. Susa-fixed tissues may be transferred directly to 95% alcohol or
absolute alcohol, thereby reducing processing time.
Disadvantages:
1. Prolonged fixation of thick materials may produce considerable
shrinkage, hardening and bleaching; hence, tissues should not be more
than 1 cm. thick.
2. RBC preservation is poor.
3. Some cytoplasmic granules are dissolved.
4. Mercuric chloride deposits tend to form on tissues; these may be
removed by immersion of tissues in alcoholic iodine solution.
5. Weigert's method of staining elastic fibers is not possible in Susa fixed
tissues.
Precautions:
After using Heidenhain's Susa fixative, the tissue should be transferred
directly to a high-grade alcohol, e.g. 96% or absolute alcohol, to avoid undue
swelling of tissues caused by treatment with low-grade alcohol or water.
OXIDIZING AGENTS
Oxidizing agents include permanganate fixatives (potassium permanganate),
potassium dichromate, chromic acid and osmium tetroxide. The oxidizing
fixatives can react with various side chains of proteins and other biomolecules,
allowing formation of crosslinks that stabilize tissue structure but cause
extensive denaturation despite preserving fine cell structure and are used mainly
as secondary fixative.
Osmium Tetroxide (Osmic Acid; OsO4)
This is a pale yellow powder which dissolves in water (up to 6% at 20°C) to
form a strong oxidizing solution. Fixation with osmium tetroxide or post-
osmication of glutaraldehyde-fixed tissue causes the complete denaturation of
protein. Potassium permanganate and potassium dichromate are also oxidizing
agents but are less reactive towards proteins than is osmium tetroxide.
Osmium tetroxide is traditionally used in electron microscopy both as a
fixative and a heavy metal stain. Osmium tetroxide is a good fixative and
excellent stain for lipids in membranous structures and vesicles. The most
prominent staining in adherent human cells (HeLa) is seen on lipid droplets.
Some intracellular structures are also visualized. Osmium tetroxide functions as
a secondary fixative by reacting with lipids. It is believed that the unsaturated
bonds of fatty acids are oxidized by OSO4 and it is reduced to a black metallic
osmium (MW 254.2) which is electron dense and adds contrast to biological
tissues (secondary stain).
Visualized cellular structures depend on the fixation protocols. In
glutaraldehyde fixation, the nucleoli are visible, but overall nuclear staining is
weak. In paraformaldehyde fixation, the nuclear staining becomes more
prominent, but some intracellular structures are lost. As a first choice, fixing
tissues with a combination, glutaraldehyde and paraformaldehyde are
recommended. Osmium tetroxide penetrates slower than glutaraldehyde (0.5
mm/hr.) and the tissue takes on a progressively blackened appearance depending
upon their lipid content.
Fixation experiments with buffered OsO4 solutions have shown that the
appearance of the fixed cells is conditioned by the pH of the fixative; thus, 1%
OsO4 buffered at pH 7.3-7.5 with acetate-veronal buffer is recommended as an
appropriate fixative for electron microscopy.
Procedure:
1. Wash the sample four times with PBS.
2. Fix with 2% Paraformaldehyde, 0.1% Glutaraldehyde in PBS for 30
minutes.
3. Wash four times with PBS.
4. Wash four times with double distilled water.
5. Prepare 0.1% OsO4 solution by diluting the 4% stock solution in
double distilled water.
6. Incubate the sample with 0.1% OsO4 for 30 minutes.
7. Wash four times with double distilled water.
Advantages:
1 It fixes conjugated fats and lipids permanently by making them
insoluble during subsequent treatment with alcohol and xylene. Fats form
hydrated osmium dioxide, are stained black and therefore are easier to
identify.
2. It preserves cytoplasmic structures well, e.g. Golgi bodies and
mitochondria.
3. It fixes myelin and peripheral nerves well, hence, it is used extensively
for neurological tissues.
4. It produces brilliant nuclear staining with safranin.
5. It adequately fixes materials for ultrathin sectioning in electron
microscopy, since it rapidly fixes small pieces of tissues and aids in their
staining.
6. It precipitates and gels proteins.
7. It shows uniformly granular nuclei with clear cytoplasmic background.
8. Some tissues (e.g. adrenal glands) are better fixed in vapor form of
osmium tetroxide. This eliminates "washing out" of the fixed tissues.
9. Osmium tetroxide completely permeabilizes cell membranes. The
osmolarity of the fixative vehicle or solute is relatively unimportant.
10. It penetrates tissue blocks in a gradient and in large samples the center
of the block may not be as well fixed as the peripheral areas.
11. Over-fixation with osmium tetroxide may result in extraction of cell
components during dehydration and increases the hardness and brittleness
of the tissue (for most tissues, 1mm blocks, should not be exposed to
osmium for less than 0.5 or more than 1.5 hours).
Disadvantages:
1. It is very expensive.
2. It is a poor penetrating agent, suitable only for small pieces of tissues
(2-3 mm. thick).
3. It is readily reduced by contact with organic matter and exposure to
sunlight, forming a black precipitate which settles at the bottom of the
container.
4. Prolonged exposure to acid vapor can irritate the eye, producing
conjunctivitis, or cause the deposition of black osmic oxide in the cornea,
producing blindness.
5. It inhibits hematoxylin and makes counterstaining difficult.
6. It is extremely volatile.
Precautions:
I. Eyes and skin may be protected by working in a fume hood or wearing
protective plastic masks or gloves while using osmium tetroxide.
2. It should be kept in a dark-colored, chemically clean bottle to prevent
evaporation and reduction by sunlight or organic matter.
3. It should be kept in a cool place or refrigerated to prevent deterioration.
4. Addition of saturated aqueous mercuric chloride solution (0.5 to 1
ml/100 ml of stock solution) will prevent its reduction with formation of
black deposits.
5. Black osmic oxide crystals may be dissolved in cold water.
6. To prevent contact of tissues with black precipitate formed in the
bottom of the jar, the tissues may be wrapped in cotton gauze and
suspended in the fluid by means of a thread.
7. Osmic acid-fixed tissues must be washed in running water for at least
24 hours to prevent formation of artefacts.
Flemming's Solution is the most common chrome-osmium acetic acid fixative
used, recommended for nuclear preparation of such sections.
FORMULA:
Aqueous chromic acid 15 ml.
1% Aqueous osmium tetroxide 4 ml.
2% Glacial acetic acid 1 ml.
Fixation time: 24 - 48 bouts
Advantages:
1. It is an excellent fixative for nuclear structures, e.g. chromosomes.
2. It permanently fixes fat.
3. Relatively less amount of solution is required for fixation (less than 10
times the volume of the tissues to be fixed).
Disadvantages:
1. It is a poor penetrating agent; hence, is applicable only to small pieces
of tissues.
2. The solution deteriorates rapidly and must be prepared immediately
before use.
3. Chromic-osmic acid combinations depress the staining power of
hematoxylin (especially Ehrlich's hematoxylin).
4. It has a tendency to form artifact pigments; these may be removed by
washing the fixed tissue in running tap water for 24 hours before
dehydration.
5 It is very expensive.
Flemming's solution without acetic acid - is made up only of chromic and
osmic acid, recommended for cytoplasmic structures particularly the
mitochondria. The removal of acetic acid from the formula serves to improve the
cytoplasmic detail of the cell.
Fixation time: 24 - 48 hours
Advantages and Disadvantages: same as Flemming's solution.
CHROMATE FIXATIVES
Chromic Acid - is used in 1-2% aqueous solution, usually as a constituent of a
compound fixative. It precipitates all proteins and adequately preserves
carbohydrates. It is a strong oxidizing agent; hence, a strong reducing agent (e.g.
formaldehyde) must be added to chrome-containing fixatives before use in order
to prevent counteracting effects and consequent decomposition of solution upon
prolonged standing.
Potassium Dichromate -is used in a 3% aqueous solution.
I. It fixes but does not precipitate cytoplasmic structures.
2. It preserves lipids.
3. It preserves mitochondria (If used in pH 4.5-5.2, mitochondria is fixed.
If the solution becomes acidified, cytoplasm, chromatin bodies and
chromosomes are fixed but mitochondria are destroyed).
Regaud’s (Muller's) Fluid
FORMULA:
Potassium dichromate 3% 80 ml
Strong formaldehyde 40% 20 ml (To be
added just before use).
Fixation time: 12-48 hours
Advantages:
1. It penetrates tissues well.
2. It hardens tissues better and more rapidly than Orth's fluid.
3. It is recommended for the demonstration of chromatin, mitochondria,
mitotic figures, Golgi bodies, RBC and colloid-containing tissues.
Disadvantages:
1. It deteriorates and darkens on standing due to acidity; hence, the
solution must always be freshly prepared.
2. Penetration is slow, hence, tissues should not be thicker than 2-3
mm.
3. Chromate-fixed tissues tend to produce precipitates of sub-oxide,
hence should be thoroughly washed in running water prior to
dehydration.
4. Prolonged fixation blackens tissue pigments, such as melanin; this
may be removed by washing the tissues in running tap water prior to
dehydration.
5. Glycogen penetration is poor; it is therefore, generally
contraindicated for carbohydrates.
6. Nuclear staining is poor.
7. It does not preserve fats.
8. It preserves hemosiderin less than buffered formalin.
9. Intensity of PAS reaction is reduced.
Orth's Fluid
FORMULA:
Potassium dichromate 2.5% 100ml
Sodium sulfate (optional) 1gm
Strong formaldehyde 40% 10 ml (To be
added just before use).
Fixation time: 36-72 hours
Advantages:
1. It is recommended for study of early degenerative processes and tissue
necrosis.
2. It demonstrates rickettsiae and other bacteria.
3. It preserves myelin better than buffered formalin.
Disadvantages: Same as in Regaud's fluid.
PICRIC ACID FIXATIVES
Picrates include fixatives with picric acid. Foremost among these is Bouin's
solution that does almost as well as mercurials with nuclear detail but does not
cause as much hardness. Picrates penetrate tissue well to react with histones and
basic proteins, form crystalline picrates with amino acids and precipitate all
proteins. It is a good fixative for connective tissue, preserves glycogen well, and
extracts lipids to give superior results in immunostaining of biogenic and
polypeptide hormones. However, it causes a loss of basophilia unless the
specimen is thoroughly washed following fixation.
Picric acid is an explosive hazard in dry form. As a solution, it stains
everything it touches yellow, including skin. Like mercuric chloride, picric acid
enhances subsequent staining, especially with anionic (“acid”) dyes. Picric Acid
is normally used in strong saturated aqueous solution (approximately I %). Picric
acid also dyes the tissues, but the yellow color may be removed by treatment
with another acid dye or lithium carbonate. Tissues fixed with picric acid retain
little affinity for basic dyes. It preserves glycogen well but causes considerable
shrinkage of tissue. Washing with changes of 50% and 70% ethanol will remove
most of the yellow color, but the excess picrate may be removed more easily
from the sections when the paraffin wax has been removed. Picric acid is only
sold in the aqueous state. When it dries out, it becomes explosive.
Paraffin sections of formaldehyde fixed tissues are usually immersed for a
few hours in a picric acid solution (Bouin’s fluid is commonly used) before
Trichrome staining. Trichrome stains use combinations of anionic dyes with
phosphotungstic or phosphomolybdic acid to impart contrasting colors to
cytoplasm, collagen fibers and other components of tissues.
Bouin's Solution
The complementary effects of the three ingredients of Bouin’s solution work
well together to maintain morphology. Specimens are usually fixed in Bouin’s
solution for 24 hours. Prolonged storage in this acidic mixture causes hydrolysis
and loss of stainable DNA and RNA. Thorough washing after fixation is
necessary.
FORMULA:
Picric acid saturated aqueous soln. (2.1%) 75 ml
40% formaldehyde 25 ml
Acetic acid glacial 5 ml
Fixation time: 4 – 18 hours
Store at room temperature
Practical Applications:
Bouin's Solution is recommended for fixation of embryos and pituitary
biopsies. It gives very good results with tissue that is subsequently stained with
trichrome. It preserves glycogen well but usually lyses erythrocytes. It is
sometimes recommended for gastro-intestinal tract biopsies, animal embryos and
endocrine gland tissue. It stains tissue bright yellow due to picric acid. Excess
picric should be washed from tissues prior to staining with 70% ethanol.
Because of its acidic nature, it will slowly remove small calcium deposits and
iron deposits.
Advantages:
1. It is an excellent fixative for glycogen demonstration.
2. It penetrates tissues well and fixes small tissues rapidly.
3. The yellow stain taken in by tissues prevents small fragments from
being overlooked.
4. It allows brilliant staining with the trichrome method.
5. It is suitable for Aniline stains (Mallory's, Heidenhain's or Masson's
methods).
6. It precipitates all proteins.
7. It is stable.
Disadvantages:
1. It causes RBC hemolysis and reduces the amount of demonstrable
ferric iron in tissue.
2. It is not suitable for frozen sections because it causes frozen sections to
crumble when cut.
3. Prolonged fixation makes tissues hard, brittle and difficult to section.
Tissues should not be allowed to remain in the fluid for more than 12-24
hours (depending on size).
4. Picrates form protein precipitates that are soluble in water; hence,
tissues must be first rendered insoluble by direct immersion in 70% ethyl
alcohol.
5. Picric acid fixed tissues must never be washed in water before
dehydration.
6. Picric acid will produce excessive staining of tissues; to remove the
yellow color, tissues may be placed in 70% ethyl alcohol followed by 5%
sodium thiosulfate and then washed in running water.
7. Picric acid is highly explosive when dry, and therefore must be kept
moist with distilled water or saturated alcohol at 0.5 to 1% concentration
during storage.
8. It alters and dissolves lipids.
9. It interferes with Azure eosin method of staining; hence, tissues should
be thoroughly washed with alcohol.
Hollande’s Solution
FORMULA:
Copper acetate: 25 gm
Picric acid: 40 gm
40% formaldehyde: 100 ml
Acetic acid: 15 ml
Distilled water: 1000 ml
Dissolve chemicals in distilled water without heat.
Fixation time: 4 – 18 hours
Practical Applications:
It is recommended for gastro-intestinal tract specimens and fixation of
endocrine tissues. It produces less lysis than Bouin’s Solution. It has some
decalcifying properties. The fixative must be washed from tissues if they are to
be put into phosphate buffered formalin on the processing machine because an
insoluble phosphate precipitate will form.
Gendre’s solution
FORMULA:
95% Ethanol saturated with picric acid 800 ml
40% formaldehyde 150 ml
Acetic acid glacial 50 ml
Fixation time: 4 - 18 hours
Practical Application:
This is an alcoholic Bouin’s solution that appears to improve upon ageing. It is
highly recommended for the preservation of glycogen and other carbohydrates.
After fixation the tissue is placed into 70% ethanol. Residual yellow color
should be washed out before staining.
Advantages:
1. It produces minimal distortion of micro-anatomical structures and can
be used for general and special stains. (The shrinking effect of picric acid
is balanced by the swelling effect of glacial acetic acid.) 2. It is an
excellent fixative for preserving soft and delicate structures (e.g.
endometrial curettings).
3. It penetrates rapidly and evenly, and causes little shrinkage.
4. Yellow stain is useful when handling fragmentary biopsies.
5. It permits brilliant staining of tissues.
6. It is the preferred fixative for tissues to be stained by Masson's
trichrome for collagen, elastic or connective tissue. (If tissue is fixed in
formalin, a pre-treatment in Bouin’s solution (as mordant prior to
trichrome stain) is recommended.
7. It preserves glycogen.
8. It does not need "washing out".
Disadvantages:
1. It penetrates large tissues poorly; hence, its use is limited to small
fragments of tissue.
2. Picrates are soluble in water; hence, tissues should not be washed in
running water but rather transferred directly from fixative to 70% alcohol.
3. It is not suitable for fixing kidney structures, lipid and mucus.
4. It destroys cytoplasmic structures, e.g. mitochondria.
5. It produces RBC hemolysis and removes demonstrable ferric iron from
blood pigments.
6. It reduces or abolishes Feulgen reaction due to hydrolysis of
nucleoproteins.
Brasil's Alcoholic Picroformol Fixative
FORMULA
Formaldehyde 37% 2040 ml.
Picric acid 80 gm.
Ethanol or isopropyl alcohol 6000 ml.
Trichloroacetic acid 65 gm.
Overnight tissue fixation by automatic processing technique may utilize 3-4
changes of Brasil's fixative at 1/2 to 2 hours each, succeeded directly by
absolute alcohol.
Advantages:
1. It is better and less "messy" than Bouin's solution.
2. It is an excellent fixative for glycogen.
GLACIAL ACETIC ACID
Acetic acid is a colorless liquid that when undiluted is also called “Glacial”
Acetic Acid because it is a water-free (anhydrous) acetic acid that freezes and
solidifies at about 16°C. Acetic acid does not have much effect on proteins, other
than to enable swelling by the absorption of water. Its major effect is to
precipitate DNA, which is split off from nucleoprotein. For this reason, acetic
acid is valuable for the preservation of nuclei, and is often added to fixatives
specifically to do that. Acetic acid is not used alone for fixation but is
incorporated into other fixatives to form a compound solution, most commonly
at a concentration of approximately 5%.
Advantages:
1. It fixes and precipitates nucleoproteins.
2. It precipitates chromosomes and chromatin materials; hence, is very
useful in the study of nuclear components of the cell. In fact, it is an
essential constituent of most compound nuclear fixatives.
3. It causes tissues (especially those containing collagen) to swell. This
property is used in certain compound fixatives to counteract the shrinkage
produced by other components (e.g. mercury).
Disadvantages:
1. When combined with Potassium Dichromate, the lipid-fixing property
of the latter is destroyed (e.g. Zenker's fluid).
2. It is contraindicated for cytoplasmic fixation since it destroys
mitochondria and Golgi elements of cells.
3. Concentrated acetic acid is corrosive to skin and must, therefore, be
handled with appropriate care, since it can cause skin burns, permanent
eye damage, and irritation to the mucous membranes. These burns or
blisters may not appear until hours after exposure.
4. Latex gloves offer no protection, so especially resistant gloves, such as
those made of nitrile rubber, are worn when handling the compound.
LEAD FIXATIVES
Lead fixatives are used in 4% aqueous solution of basic lead acetate. Lead
oxaloacetate, a primary reaction product precipitate for the visualization of the
activity of glutamic oxaloacetic transaminase in tissue sections, is stable at a
slightly alkaline pH. At concentrations which are used for tissue fixation, a slight
inhibitory effect on glutamic oxaloacetic transaminase activity is produced by
acetone while a glutaraldehyde-formaldehyde mixture results in marked
reduction of activity.
Advantages:
1. It is recommended for acid mucopolysaccharides.
2. It fixes connective tissue mucin.
Disadvantage:
It takes up C02 to form insoluble lead carbonate especially on prolonged
standing. This may be removed by filtration or by adding acetic acid drop by
drop to lower the pH and dissolve the residue.
TRICHLOROACETIC ACID
Trichloroacetic Acid (TCA) is a reagent that is used for the precipitation of
proteins and nucleic acids. It is also used as a decalcifier and fixative in
microscopy. Addition of TCA to a final concentration of 10% (w/v) will
precipitate most proteins from solution. The excess TCA can be removed from
protein pellets by washes with buffer. For the precipitation of nucleic acids, a 5%
solution of ice cold TCA has been used. It is sometimes incorporated into
compound fixatives.
Advantages:
1. It precipitates proteins.
2. Its marked swelling effect on tissues serves to counteract shrinkage
produced by other fixatives.
3. It may be used as a weak decalcifying agent.
4. Its softening effect on dense fibrous tissues facilitates preparation of
such sections.
Disadvantage:
It is a poor penetrating agent, hence, is suitable only for small pieces of
tissues or bones.
ACETONE
Acetone is not recommended as morphological fixative for tissue blocks, mainly
because of its shrinkage and poor preservation effects. Its use is reserved for the
fixation of cryostat sections or for tissues in which enzymes have to be
preserved. Acetone is almost always used alone and without dilution; it fixes by
dehydration and precipitation. It is used to fix specimens at cold temperatures (0
to 4°C). Fixation time may vary from several minutes (for cell smears, cryostat
sections) to several hours (1-24 hours for small tissue blocks).
Advantages:
1. It is recommended for the study of water diffusible enzymes especially
phosphatases and lipases.
2. It is used in fixing brain tissues for diagnosis of rabies.
3. It is used as a solvent for certain metallic salts to be used in freeze
substitution techniques for tissue blocks.
Disadvantages:
1. It produces inevitable shrinkage and distortion.
2. It dissolves fat.
3. It preserves glycogen poorly.
4. It evaporates rapidly.
MICHEL’S SOLUTION
Michel’s Solution provides a stable medium for transport of fresh unfixed
tissues, such as renal, skin and oral mucosa biopsies, which will undergo
subsequent frozen section and immunofluorescence studies. Michel’s Transport
Medium is not suitable for transporting cells for flow cytometry or for tissues
used for fluorescent in-situ hybridization (FISH). It is not a fixative, and is not
suitable for any other use (particularly, for transporting living cells for flow
cytometry). It should be kept refrigerated (not frozen) until use. Specimens may
be kept in it at room temperature for 5 days while in transport until they can be
delivered to the reference laboratory. This simple salt solution maintains pH, but
does not kill most pathogens. Specimens received in transport medium should be
washed in three changes of washing solution (10 minutes for each wash). It is
not suitable for FISH studies.
Procedure:
1. Bring aliquot of Michel Transport Medium or a pre-filled Michel Transport
Medium Vial to room temperature prior to use.
Michel Transport Medium is routinely stored at 4°C. During refrigerated
storage some precipitation may develop on the container bottom.
Precipitation should re-dissolve by allowing the solution to reach room
temperature prior to use.
2. Place fresh tissue in an adequate amount of Michel Transport Medium,
insuring that the specimen will be totally submerged in fluid during transport.
Tissue that has been previously frozen will not provide optimal testing results
and should not be used with Michel Transport Medium.
3. Store and/or transport tissue in Michel Transport Medium up to a maximum
of five days. Care should be taken to maintain cool to ambient temperatures of
4°C to 22°C during transport.
Tissues transported in Michel Transport Medium at room temperature for 5
days prior to fixation and routine processing should provide satisfactory
histological results although morphology detail will not be equal to that of
expediently fixed and processed tissue.
4. Upon receipt, wash the tissue held in Michel Transport Medium in three
changes of Michel Wash Solution for 10 minutes each change.
5. Freeze tissue per laboratory protocol.
6. Tissue placed in Michel Transport Medium may be subsequently processed
for light or electron microscopy. Wash tissue for 2-3 minutes in tap water and
place in appropriate fixative prior to processing.
REFERENCES
Atwood K, Farmilo AJ, Stead RH, Boenisch T. (2003) Fixation & tissue processing. From: Handbook
for Immunochemical Staining Methods. 3rd ed. Carpinteria, CA: DAKO; 18–22, 44–46.
Bancroft JD, Gamble M. (2008) Theory and practice of histological techniques. Churchill Livingstone
Elsevier, Philadelphia, PA.
Brown RW. (2009) Histologic preparations: common problems and their solutions. Northfield, IL:
College of American
Carson, FL, Hladik C. (2009) Histotechnology: A Self Instructional Text. 3rd ed. Chicago, IL: ASCP
Press.
Dapson RW. (1993) Fixation for the 1990's: a review of needs and accomplishments. Biotech
Histochem 68(2):75-82.
Dapson RW. (2007) Glyoxal fixation: how it works and why it only occasionally needs antigen
retrieval. Biotechnic & Histochemistry 82(3): 161-166.
Drury RAB, Wallington EA. (1980) Carleton's histological technique. 5th ed. New York: Churchill
Livingstone.
Eltoum I, Fredenburgh J, Myers RB, Grizzle WE. (2001) Introduction to the theory and practice of
fixation of tissues. J Histotechnol 24:173 -190.
Eltoum I, Fredenburgh J, Grizzle WE. (2001) Advanced concepts in fixation: 1. Effects of fixation on
immunohistochemistry, reversibility of fixation and recovery of proteins, nucleic acids, and other
molecules from fixed and processed tissues. 2. Developmental methods of fixation. J Histotechnol
24:201-210.
Fox CH, Johnson FB, Whiting J, Roller RP. (1985) Formaldehyde fixation. J Histochem Cytochem 33:
845-853, 1985.
Grizzle WE. (2009) Special symposium: fixation and tissue processing models. Biotech Histochem
84(5):185-193.
Henwood A (2010). What is the Best Procedure to Remove Formalin Pigment from Formaldehyde-
Acetic Acid-Alcohol Fixed Tissues? J Histotechnol 33(3):109-111.
Hopwood, D. (1969) Fixatives and fixation: a review. Histochemical Journal 1: 323-360.
Hopwood D. (1996) Fixation and fixatives. In Bancroft J and Stevens A. eds. Theory and practice of
histological techniques. New York: Churchill Livingstone.
Hwang, BJ. Chu, G. (1996) Trichloroacetic Acid Precipitation by Ultracentrifugation to Concentrate
Dilute Protein in Viscous Solution. Biotechniques, 20(6), 982-984.
Karnovsky, M.J. (1965): A Formaldehyde-Glutaraldehyde Fixative of High Osmolarity for use Electron
Microscopy. 1. Cell Biol. 27,137 A.
Kiernan, JA. (2000) Formaldehyde, formalin, paraformaldehyde and glutaraldehyde: What they are and
what they do. Microscopy Today 00-1 pp. 8-12
Kiernan, JA. (2009) Histological and Histochemical Methods. Theory and Practice. 4th ed. chapters 2-
4, pp 12-73. Bloxham, UK: Scion.
Leong AS-Y. (1994) Fixation and fixatives. In Woods AE and Ellis RC eds. Laboratory histopathology.
New York: Churchill Livingstone 4.1-1 - 4.1-26.
Lillie RD, Fullmer HM. (1976) Histopathologic Technic and Practical Histochemistry. 4th ed., New
York: McGraw-Hill. p. 54–57.
Michel B, Milner Y, David K. (1972) Preservation of tissue-fixed immunoglobulins in skin biopsies of
patients with lupus erythematosus and bullous diseases. A preliminary report. J. Invest. Dermatol. 59:
449-452
Oliver C, Jamur MC. (2010) Fixation and embedding. Methods Mol Biol 588:353-362.
Pearse AG. (1980) Histochemistry: Theoretical and Applied. 4th ed. Vol. 1. Edinburgh: Churchill-
Livingstone.
Porter KR, Kallman F. (1953) The properties and effects of osmium tetroxide as a tissue fixative with
special reference to its use for electron microscopy. Experimental Cell Research. 4(1): 127-141.
Prento P, Lyon H. (1997) Commercial formalin substitutes for histopathology. Biotech Histochem
72(5):273-282.
Puchtler H, Waldrop FS, Meloan SN, Terry MS, Connor HM. (1970) Methacarn (methanol-carnoy)
fixation: practical and theoretical considerations. Histochemie 21: 97-116.
Sheehan DC, Hrapchak BB. (1980) Theory and Practice of Histotechnology. 2nd ed. St Louis, MO:
Mosby.
Suresh B. (2003) "Acetic Acid". Chemicals Economic Handbook. SRI International.
Suvarna KS, Layton C, Bancroft JD. (2012) Bancroft's Theory and Practice of Histological Techniques.
Churchill Livingstone.
Thavarajah, R., Mudimbaimannar, V. et al. (2012) Chemical and physical basics of routine
formaldehyde fixation. J Oral Maxillofac Pathol. 16(3): 400–405
Waldrop FS, Puchtler, Terry MS. (1969) Removal of acid hematin-type pigments from sections;
efficacy of alcoholic picric acid solution. Stain Technol 44(6):279-281.
CHAPTER 8
DECALCIFICATION
Decalcification is the removal of calcium ions from a bone or calcified
tissue through a histological process that makes them flexible and easier to cut.
Decalcification adjusts the hard substance of bones to the softness of paraffin
embedding medium.
Bones are the main object of decalcification in a surgical pathology
laboratory, but other specimens, such as teeth, calcified tumors and calcified
heart valves also require this procedure. Decalcification enables the
histotechnologist to cut soft sections of the bone using the microtome, so that
they can be processed like any other soft tissue of the body. Fine detail
radiographs are often used to assist in the selection of appropriate bone
specimens for processing. If the calcified areas in tissue specimens are
substantial, it may be impossible to obtain decent sections without first
decalcifying the entire specimen. One alternative is to apply “surface
decalcification” to a paraffin block, allowing sections to be obtained where the
presence of calcium was not anticipated when the specimen was processed.
Decalcification is a lengthy procedure, as bone pieces have to be left in the
decalcifying agent for several days or even weeks, depending on the size of the
tissue. Many of the grossing and cutting techniques for bone require the use of a
high-speed saw and/or long periods in a decalcifying solution, prior to reducing
the specimen to a size that can be easily processed, embedded and sectioned.
The poor quality of thin sections obtained from these methods often contribute to
the already difficult task of evaluating the pathology and making a correct
diagnosis. A low speed saw may be sufficient to routinely and rapidly reduce
undecalcified surgical specimens of hard tissue, to a thickness of 2–3 mm,
without compromising the integrity of the tissue.
In choosing a technique and processing method, consideration must be given to
the type of investigation being carried out. For example, if a metabolic bone
disease is being investigated and it is necessary to differentiate mineralized bone
from osteoid, or if morphometric measurements are required, it may be
necessary to retain and demonstrate the mineral content by producing sections of
“un-decalcified” bone. As mineralized bone is such a hard material, there is a
limited range of techniques available to produce sections from it. After fixation,
it can be directly sawn into thin wafers and then ground using abrasive surfaces
to produce thin “ground” sections.
The principle of decalcification is fairly simple. Strong mineral acids, such as
10% hydrogen chloride (HCl), or weak organic acids, such as 5-10% formic acid
(HCOOH), form soluble calcium salts in an ion exchange that moves calcium
into the decalcifying solution. The same final effect makes 14% ethylene
diamino tetracetic acid (EDTA) an ideal chelating agent that sequesters metallic
ions, including calcium, in aqueous solutions. It is also possible to prepare bone
specimens by infiltrating them with acrylic or epoxy resins which, when
polymerized, have a hardness equivalent to that of mineralized bone and hence
do not require decalcification at all.
Make sure that the tissue has been adequately fixed and rinsed well to prevent
any undesired reaction with the decalcifying agent. Buffered formalin is a
satisfactory fixative for bone but where the preservation of bone marrow is
important, some laboratories use alternatives such as zinc formalin mixtures, B-
5, formol-acetic alcohol (Davidson’s fixative), or Bouin’s solution.
In order to protect the cellular and fibrous elements of bone from damage caused
by the acids used as decalcifying agents, it is particularly important to
thoroughly fix these specimens prior to decalcification. Decalcification should
be done after fixation and before impregnation, to ensure and facilitate the
normal cutting of sections and to prevent obscuring the microanatomic detail of
such sections by bone dust and other cellular debris. Inadequate decalcification
may result in poor cutting of hard tissues and damage to the knife edge during
sectioning. There are certain specimens e.g., bones, teeth and other calcified
tissues like tuberculous lungs, which contain some amount of calcium that is apt
to interfere with the accurate evaluation and examination of histologic sections.
Hence, one must see to it that all such extraneous materials have been removed
before proceeding to the next step in the tissue processing.
Poorly-fixed specimens become macerated during decalcification and stain
poorly afterwards. This is very noticeable in areas containing bone marrow. It is
therefore common practice for laboratories to extend fixation times for bone
specimens before commencing decalcification. It is important to provide ready
access for the fixative to penetrate the bone, so skin and soft tissue should be
removed from large specimens if practicable. Bone specimens should be sawn
into thin slices as soon as possible to enhance fixation and an adequate volume
of fixative provided. High-quality fine tooth saws should be used to prepare
bone slices. Coarse saws can cause considerable mechanical damage and force
bone fragments into the soft tissues present in the specimen.
Cartilage does not require any softening, except if some calcified areas are
present. It is a waste of time to put toenails in decalcification solution, because
they are composed of insoluble keratin filaments. After fixation, depending on
the amount of adjusted soft tissue, the toenail should be rinsed off with soapy
water once it becomes pliable.
There are three main types of decalcifying agents:
Those based on strong mineral acids
Those based on weaker organic acids
Those composed of chelating agents.
The acids make up a solution of calcium ions while the chelating agents take up
the calcium ions. Dilute mineral acids (hydrochloric or nitric) or formic acid can
be used effectively if the end point of decalcification is monitored carefully.
Nuclear and cytoplasmic detail are compromised if specimens are exposed for
too long to acidic decalcifying agents, which can extract RNA and remove the
purine and pyrimidine bases from DNA. It is also imperative to wash the acid
out of the tissue.
ACID DECALCIFYING AGENTS
Acid decalcifying agents are the most widely used agents for routine
decalcification of large amounts of bony tissues because they are stable, readily
available, and relatively inexpensive as compared to other decalcifying agents.
As soon as fixation is complete, the selected pieces of tissues are usually
placed in a gauze bag and suspended in liberal amounts of decalcifying solution
by means of a thread to ensure complete decalcification and to protect the tissue
from any precipitate that might be settled at the bottom of the container. Due to
the corrosive action of the acid, it is recommended that the thread be dipped in
melted paraffin wax and that use of metal cap containers be avoided.
Strong Mineral Acids
Strong acids such as hydrochloric or nitric acid at concentrations up to 10%
are the most rapid in action but if used longer than necessary will rapidly cause a
loss of nuclear staining and can macerate tissues. It is important that an
appropriate end-point test is used to minimize exposure of the specimens to these
agents. Generally proprietary decalcifiers that are claimed to be rapid in action
are based on strong acids, most commonly hydrochloric acid, and should be used
conservatively with attention to the provided instructions if good results are to be
obtained.
Rapid decalcifying agents are more likely to adversely affect any subsequent
staining. This is especially noticeable in cell nuclei due to failure of nuclear
chromatin to take up hematoxylin and other basic dyes as readily as soft tissues
that have not been exposed to acid solutions or decalcifiers. Staining by acid
dyes will be less affected, although eosin can produce a deep, brick red stain
without differential shading. These effects of decalcifying agents on H&E
staining can be reduced by post-decalcification and removal, and by
appropriately adjusting the staining procedure.
I. NITRIC ACID
Nitric acid is the most common and the fastest decalcifying agent used so
far, utilized both as a simple solution or combined with other reagents. This may
be used as simple aqueous solutions with recommended concentrations of 5-
10%. It is a very rapid decalcifying agent, producing minimal distortion and is,
therefore, recommended for routine purposes. It has, however, the disadvantage
of inhibiting nuclear stains and destroying tissues, especially in concentrated
solutions. The endpoint of decalcification must be carefully watched for, to
prevent progressive tissue damage and impaired staining. This may be prevented
by combining nitric acid with formaldehyde or alcohol.
Aqueous Nitric Acid Solution 10%
FORMULA:
Concentrated nitric Acid 10 ml.
Distilled water added up to 100 ml.
DECALCIFICATION TIME: 12-24 hours
Advantages:
1. It is rapid in action.
2. It produces minimum distortion of tissues.
3. It produces good nuclear staining (although less than in slower acting
agents).
4. The acid may be easily removed by 70% alcohol.
5. It is recommended for urgent biopsy, and for needle and small biopsy
specimens to permit rapid diagnosis within 24 hours or less.
6. It can be used for large or heavily mineralized cortical bone specimen
if decalcification progress is carefully monitored by a decalcification
endpoint test.
Disadvantages:
1 Prolonged decalcification may lead to tissue distortion.
2. It can seriously damage tissue stainability.
3. It imparts a yellow color with nitrous acid, thereby impairing the
staining reaction of the tissue.
4. Old nitric acid solution is particularly damaging and should be replaced
with fresh stock solution.
5. Strong acids tend to be more damaging to tissue antigens for
immunohistochemical staining, and enzymes may be totally lost.
Formol-Nitric Acid
FORMULA:
Concentrated nitric acid 10 ml.
Strong formaldehyde, 40% 5 ml.
Distilled water 85 ml.
DECALCIFICATION TIME: 1-3 days
Advantages:
1. It is rapid-acting; hence, is recommended for urgent biopsies.
2. Nuclear staining is relatively good.
3. It produces less tissue destruction than 10% aqueous nitric acid.
Disadvantages:
1. The yellow color imparted by nitrous acid formation will impair
staining reaction of the cell. This may be prevented by neutralizing the
tissue with 5% sodium sulfate and washing in running tap water for at
least 12 hours. Addition of 0.1% urea to pure concentrated nitric acid will
also make discoloration disappear without considerably affecting the
efficiency of the decalcifying solution.
2. The solution should be used inside a fume hood.
Perenyi’s Fluid
FORMULA:
Nitric acid 10% 40 ml.
Chromic acid 0.5% 30 ml.
Absolute ethyl alcohol 30 ml.
Mix shortly before use. Chromic acid must be collected for proper disposal.
DECALCIFICATION TIME: 2 - 7 days
Advantages:
1. It is recommended for routine purposes.
2. It decalcifies and softens tissues at the same time.
3. Nuclear and cytoplasmic staining is good.
4. Maceration is avoided due to the presence of chromic acid and alcohol.
Disadvantages:
1. It is a slow decalcifying agent for dense bones; hence, is not
recommended for urgent diagnosis.
2. Complete decalcification cannot be determined by chemical test
because a precipitate is formed upon the addition of ammonia to Perenyi's
fluid even in the absence of calcium ion.
This may be dissolved by adding glacial acetic acid drop by drop.
About 0.5 ml. of saturated aqueous ammonium oxalate is then added to
the solution. Reappearance of a white precipitate within 30 minutes will
reaffirm the presence of calcium in the agent, signifying that
decalcification is still incomplete.
Phloroglucin-Nitric Acid
FORMULA:
Concentrated nitric acid 10 ml.
Phloroglucin 1 gm.
Nitric acid 10% 100 ml.
(To be added after disappearance of dense white fumes formed by
combining the first two ingredients.)
DECALCIFICATION TIME: 12-24 hours
Advantage:
It is the most rapid decalcifying agent so far, recommended for urgent cases.
Disadvantages:
1. Nuclear staining is poor.
2. Prolonged decalcification produces extreme tissue distortion.
3. Yellow color must be neutralized with 5% sodium sulfate and
thoroughly washed with running tap water for at least 24 hours.
4. Complete decalcification cannot be determined by chemical means.
When decalcification is complete, the acid must be removed by three
changes of 70% to 90% ethanol, since washing in watery solutions will
lead to excessive swelling and deterioration of tissue. When the sections
are cut, the slides are brought to water and placed in 1% aqueous
lithium carbonate for I hour, washed in later for 15 minutes, and then
stained.
II. HYDROCHLORIC ACID
Hydrochloric acid (HCI) is inferior compared to nitric acid in its role as a
decalcifying agent because of its slower action and greater distortion of tissue
produced on the decalcified section. However, it produces good nuclear staining
and if used in 1% solution with 70% alcohol, may be recommended for surface
decalcification of the tissue blocks.
Rapid proprietary solutions usually contain hydrochloric acid, whereas slow
proprietary mixtures contain buffered formic acid or formalin/formic acid.
Dilution of a proprietary HCl is not deleterious for effective decalcification or
staining, and this is an option if a strong mixture is considered too concentrated.
Von Ebner's Fluid
FORMULA:
Saturated aqueous solution of NaCl 50 ml.
36% concentrated hydrochloric acid 8 ml.
Distilled water 50 ml.
Advantages:
1. It permits relatively good cytologic staining.
2. It is a moderately rapid decalcifying agent.
3. It does not require washing out before dehydration.
4. It is recommended for teeth and small pieces of bone.
Disadvantage:
The extent of decalcification cannot be measured by a chemical test.
WEAK ACIDS such as formic acid are popular and are widely used for
decalcification. Organic acids such as acetic and formic acid are better suited to
bone marrow, since they are not as harsh. However, they act more slowly on
dense cortical bone. Other acids such as trichloracetic acid (TCA) have also been
used. Picric acid and acetic acid are not used alone as decalcifying agents, but
are found as components of Carnoy's and Bouin's fixatives. These fixatives may
act as incidental, albeit, weak decalcifiers, and can be used in urgent cases when
there is only minimal calcification.
III. FORMIC ACID
Formic acid is a moderate-acting decalcifying agent which produces better
nuclear staining with less tissue distortion, and is safer to handle than nitric acid
or hydrochloric acid. It is recommended for routine decalcification of
postmortem research tissues, although not suitable for urgent examinations.
Formic acid can be used as a simple 10% aqueous solution or combined with
formalin or with a buffer. It is slower than the strong acid agents, but it is much
gentler in action and less likely to interfere with nuclear staining. Formic acid in
a 10% concentration is the best all-around decalcifier. Some commercial
solutions are available that combine formic acid with formalin to fix and
decalcify tissues at the same time.
Formic acid is the only weak acid used extensively as a primary decalcifying
agent. Addition of citrate probably accelerates decalcification by chelating the
calcium as it is liberated from the bone.
FORMULA:
Formic acid (Sp. grav. 1.20) 10 ml.
Normal saline 10% 90 ml.
DECALCIFICATION TIME: 2-7 days
Advantages:
1. It may be used both as a fixative and decalcifying agent.
2. It permits excellent nuclear and cytoplasmic staining.
3. It is recommended for small pieces of bones and teeth.
4. It is suitable for most routine surgical specimens, particularly when
immunohistochemical staining is needed.
Disadvantages:
1. It is relatively slow; hence, is not suitable for urgent specimens.
Decalcification may be hastened by increasing the proportion of formic
acid to 25 ml. However, such concentration may make the solution
opaque, thereby interfering with the staining results.
2. It requires neutralization with 5% sodium sulfate, and washing out to
remove the acid from the tissue.
Formic Acid-Sodium Citrate Solution
FORMULA:
Aqueous sodium citrate 20% 50 ml.
Formic acid 45% 50 ml.
DECALCIFICATlON TIME: 3 -14 days
Advantages:
1. It permits better nuclear staining than nitric acid method.
2. It is recommended for autopsy materials, bone marrow, cartilage and
tissues studied for research purposes.
Disadvantages:
1. It is relatively slow; hence, is not recommended for routine purposes
and for dense tissues.
2. It requires neutralization with 5% sodium sulfate.
IV. TRICHLOROACETIC ACID
FORMULA:
Trichloroacetic acid 5 gm.
Formal saline 10% 95 ml.
DECALCIFICATION TIME: 4- 8 days
Advantages:
1. It permits good nuclear staining.
2. It does not require washing out; the excess acid may be removed by
several changes of 90% alcohol, thus improving tissue dehydration.
Disadvantages:
1. It is a weak decalcifying agent, not used for dense tissues, and is
suitable only for small spicules of bone.
2. It is very slow-acting; hence, is not recommended for urgent
examinations.
SULFUROUS ACID -is a very weak decalcifying solution suitable only for
minute pieces of bone.
V. CHROMIC ACID (FLEMMING'S FLUID)
FORMULA:
Chromic acid % 15 ml.
Osmium tetroxide 4 ml.
2% Glacial acetic acid 1 ml.
Advantages:
1. It may be used both as a fixative and decalcifying agent.
2. It may be used for decalcifying minute bone spicules.
Disadvantages:
1. Nuclear staining with hematoxylin is inhibited.
2. It tends to undergo reduction and forms precipitates at the bottom of
the container thus requiring frequent changes of solution.
3. Insoluble pigments are formed when decalcified tissue is dehydrated
with alcohol; hence, tissues must be washed out prior to dehydration.
4. Degree of decalcification cannot be measured by the routine chemical
test.
Caution: Chromic acid is an environmental toxin.
1. Chromic acid is highly corrosive to skin and mucous membranes.
2. It is carcinogenic.
3. Suitable protective material is not readily available or practical for
laboratory use.
4. Drain disposal is not a legitimate option for any solution containing
chromium, including subsequent processing of fluids following fixation
or rinses following staining procedures involving chromium.
VI. CITRIC ACID-CITRATE BUFFER SOLUTION (pH 4.5)
FORMULA:
Citric acid (monohydrate) aqueous solution 7% 5.0 ml.
Ammonium citrate (anhydrous) aqueous solution 7.4% 95.0 ml.
Zinc sulfate aqueous solution. 1% 0.2 ml. Chloroform (as preservative) - a
few drops
DECALCIFICATION TIME: 6 days
Advantages:
1 It permits excellent nuclear and cytoplasmic staining.
2. It does not produce cell or tissue distortion.
Disadvantage:
Its action is too slow for routine purposes.
DECALCIFYING AGENTS – CHELATING AGENTS
Chelating agents are substances which combine with calcium ions and other
salts (e.g. iron and magnesium deposits) to form weakly dissociated complexes
and facilitate removal of calcium salt. The most common chelating agent in the
market is ethylene diamine tetra acetic acid (EDTA) salt, with the commercial
name of Versene, recommended only for detailed microscopic studies. Although
EDTA is traditionally referred as "acid", it does not act like inorganic or organic
acids but it binds metallic ions, notably calcium and magnesium. EDTA
combines with calcium, forming an insoluble nonionized complex (which is why
it is also used as an anticoagulant and water softener). It works by capturing the
calcium ions from the surface of the apatite crystal, slowly reducing its size.
If preservation of nuclear DNA is important, or if histochemical methods for
nucleic acids or enzyme activities are intended, a chelating agent is preferred to
an acid. Usually the disodium salt of EDTA is used, with the pH adjusted to a
level between 7 and 8. Decalcification by EDTA takes much longer than
decalcification by acids – weeks rather than days. Acids have some effects on
the stainability of the tissue. Despite the physical methods having definite
advantages, especially in the speed of processing, the general surgical pathology
practice does not use them, for many reasons. They require closer monitoring,
cleaning and maintenance of the equipment involved.
Because the process is very slow but very gentle (weeks may be required
depending on the size of the specimen), this reagent is not suitable for urgent
specimens. It is more appropriate for research applications where very high
quality morphology is required or particular molecular elements must be
preserved for techniques such as immunohistochemistry (IHC), Fluorescent In
Situ Hybridization (FISH) or Polymerase Chain Reaction (PCR). It is used at a
concentration of approximately 14% as a neutralized solution. The rate at which
EDTA will decalcify is pH dependent. It is generally used at pH7.0. It works
more rapidly at pH10 but some tissue elements can be damaged at alkaline pH.
EDTA does not work in formic acid with pH 3 as a decalcifier. Neutral EDTA,
though being a slow decalcifying agent, gives excellent results for soft-tissue
integrity, and best quality of both soft-tissue and hard-tissue staining. The
optimal pH is 7-7.6, so it is necessary to maintain this narrow window. EDTA
works too slowly under pH 5, owing to insolubility, but over pH 8, tissue
maceration starts due to alkaline sensitive protein bonds. Loaded with
undistributed calcium, the solution can precipitate at the bone surface, which
requires more intensive agitation and more intensive post- decalcification
rinsing.
The tissue is usually placed in EDTA from 1-3 weeks for small specimens, but it
may take 6-8 weeks or longer to totally decalcify dense cortical bone. The
solution should be changed every 3 days, and in the final stage, every day, to
facilitate decalcification.
At present, the application of EDTA as a decalcifying agent in a routine setting is
hampered by the long time required for incubation. However, new methods, such
as decalcification in EDTA using a microwave oven, addition of ammonium
hydroxide to the EDTA solution, electrolytic decalcification, or a one-step
fixation–decalcification in formalin mercuric chloric acid solution, which also
appears suitable for mRNA In Situ Hybridization, might reduce the time of
decalcification considerably.
Neutral EDTA
EDTA disodium salt 250 gm
Distilled water 1750 ml
Bring to pH 7.0 by adding sodium hydroxide (about 25 gm will be
needed).
Neutral EDTA acts slowly but causes little tissue damage. Conventional
stains are largely unaffected.
Advantages:
1. It permits excellent staining results.
2. It produces minimal cell and tissue distortion.
3. It forms minimal histological artifacts, usually caused by
production of CO2 bubbles.
4. Extent of decalcification can be measured by routine chemical test.
5. EDTA is an excellent bone decalcifier for enzyme or immuno-
histochemical staining, and for electron microscopy.
6. Enzymes require specific pH conditions in order to maintain
activity, and EDTA solutions can be adjusted to a specific pH for
enzyme staining.
Disadvantages:
1. It is very slow, and is therefore not recommended for urgent and
routine purposes.
2. It causes slight tissue hardening.
3. EDTA inactivates alkaline phosphatase activity, which can be
restored by addition of magnesium chloride.
Other techniques for increasing the efficiency of decalcification
Sonication with EDTA has been successfully used to accelerate
decalcification of trephine specimens for subsequent molecular analysis. During
the process, the temperature must be carefully controlled.
Microwave treatment has been used with hydrochloric acid decalcifiers but
the raised temperature may damage morphology and cause staining artefacts.
Ion-exchange resins have been incorporated into some decalcification protocols.
They are added to the container holding the decalcifier and take up the ionized
calcium, thereby maintaining the effectiveness of the acid. If acid decalcifiers are
used in adequate volumes and replaced regularly, the use of such resins is
probably unnecessary.
Electrolytic decalcification in which the bone is placed in acid decalcifier
and attached to an electrode through which current is applied is a technique that
has not found wide acceptance because of the potential to cause heat damage to
the specimen.
ION EXCHANGE RESIN
Ion exchange resin (ammonium form of polystrene resin) hastens
decalcification by removing calcium ions from formic acid-containing
decalcifying solutions, thereby increasing solubility from the tissue. It is not
recommended for fluids containing mineral acids such as nitric acid or
hydrochloric acid.
A layer of the ion exchange resin, about 1/2 inch thick is spread over the
bottom of the container to be used and the specimen is placed on top of it. The
decalcifying agent is then added, usually 20-30 times the volume of the tissue.
The tissue may be allowed to stay in solution for 1-14 days. The degree of
decalcification may then be measured by physical or X-ray method. The resin
that has been previously used may later be reactivated by immersing it in N/10
HCl twice and washing it with distilled water three times.
Advantages:
1. Cellular detail is well-preserved.
2. Daily washing of solutions is eliminated.
3. It permits excellent staining results.
4. Decalcification is hastened.
5. It produces minimal cell and tissue distortion.
6. It forms minimal histological artifacts, usually caused by
production of CO2 bubbles.
7. Extent of decalcification can be measured by routine chemical test.
Disadvantages:
1. The degree of decalcification cannot be measured by chemical means.
2. It is very slow, and is therefore not recommended for urgent and
routine purposes.
3. It causes slight tissue hardening.
ELECTROPHORESIS (ELECTRICAL IONIZATION)
Electrophoresis is a process whereby positively charged calcium ions are
attracted to a negative electrode and subsequently removed from the
decalcifying solution . The time required for decalcification is thereby
shortened due to the heat and electrolytic reaction produced in the process. The
principle is similar to that of chelating agents, with the main difference that this
process utilizes electricity and is dependent upon a supply of direct current to
remove the calcium deposits.
Solution Used for Electrolytic Decalcification Formic acid 88% 100 ml.
Concentrated hydrochloric acid 80 ml.
Distilled water 1000 ml.
This method is satisfactory for small bone fragments, processing only a
limited number of specimens at a time. Good cytologic and histologic details
are, however, not always preserved in tissues that have been electrically
decalcified.
MICROWAVE OVEN DECALCIFICATION
The microwave oven has been used quite often for tissue processing, but
there are very few studies describing its use in decalcification of bone or teeth.
Microwave oven decalcification is faster than routine decalcification irrespective
of the decalcifying agents used. The tissue preservation and staining efficacy is
good in microwave nitric acid decalcification compared to routine nitric acid
decalcification. Both formic acid and EDTA show good tissue preservation and
staining efficacy irrespective of the method used (manual vs microwave).
Microwave decalcification is a novel technique compared to the manual method.
In this method, hard tissues are placed in the decalcifying agent in a microwave
oven for intermittent periods with regular changes of the solution till the end
point is reached. Microwave irradiation has been shown to speed up the process
of decalcification significantly–from days to hours.
The use of a Microwave Histoprocessor does not adversely affect cell
morphology. The quality of microwave-fixed tissues, at the respective optimal
time points, is comparable with routinely fixed tissues. With the ability to have
entirely fixed tissues 3 hours after autopsy, tissues can be harvested in the
morning, placed on the processor in the afternoon, and embedded the following
morning.
The uniformity of the section’s thickness is always desirable, but it becomes
a serious requirement with implementation of microwave- assisted processing. It
is unreasonable to make a section too thin (less than 3 mm). Uniform 3-5 mm
sections are optimal for decalcification with or without microwave- accelerated
processing. There are many technical details pertaining to how to get a uniform
representative bone section.
Factors influencing the rate of decalcification
The rate of decalcification may be influenced by several factors, and ways may
be devised to speed up or slow down this process. The concentration and volume
of decalcifying agent and temperature at which the reaction takes place are
important considerations.
Concentration.
The concentration of active agent will affect the rate at which calcium is
removed. In general, more concentrated acid solutions decalcify bone more
rapidly, but are more harmful to the tissue. This is especially true of aqueous
acid solutions, as various additives such as alcohol or buffers that protect the
tissues may slow down the decalcification process. High concentrations and
greater amount of fluid will increase the speed of the process. Rapid
depletion of an acid or chelator by their reaction with calcium can be avoided
by using large volumes of fluid compared with the volume of tissue, and by
changing the solution several times during the decalcification process. The
recommended ratio of fluid to tissue volume for decalcification is 20 to 1.
Fluid access
As with fixation, a fresh decalcifier should have ready access to all surfaces
of the specimen. This will enhance diffusion and penetration into the
specimen and will facilitate solution, ionization and removal of calcium.
Decalcification may be hastened by suspending the tissue in decalcifying
solution for greater fluid access. As soon as fixation is complete, the selected
pieces of tissues are usually placed in a gauze bag and suspended in liberal
amount of decalcifying solution by means of a thread to ensure complete
decalcification and protect the tissue from any precipitate that may be settled
at the bottom of the container. Due to the corrosive action of the acid, it is
recommended that the thread be dipped in melted paraffin wax and that use
of metal cap containers be avoided.
Size and consistency
Increase in size and consistency of tissues will require longer periods for
complete decalcification. Dense bone tissues usually require up to 14 days or
longer in order to complete the process. In such cases, the solution should be
changed daily to ensure better penetration and to test for the degree of
decalcification.
Agitation.
Gentle agitation may increase the rate of decalcification. Mechanical
agitation and moving of the tissue in solution usually influences fluid
exchange, accelerates the rate of diffusion and speeds up the decalcification
process. Gentle fluid agitation is achieved by low-speed rotation, rocking,
stirring or bubbling air into the solution. Sonication vigorously agitates both
specimen and fluid, and may cause disruption of tissue, with formation of
cellular debris on the floor of container.
Temperature.
Increased temperature will hasten decalcification, but it will also increase the
damaging effects of acids on tissue. At 37°C, there will be impaired nuclear
staining of Van Gieson's stain for collagen fibers. At 55°C, the tissue will
undergo complete digestion within 24-48 hours. Microwave, sonication and
electrolytic methods produce heat, and must be carefully monitored to
prevent excessive temperatures that damage tissue. Conversely, lower
temperature decreases reaction rates. The optimum temperature so far
recommended is the room temperature range of 18°C -30°C.
Determining the end-point of decalcification
Prolonged decalcification of tissue is liable to prevent hydrolysis and lead to
maceration and destruction of tissue components which are poorly stained. Over-
decalcification, particularly with the strong acid decalcifiers, spoils the staining
of basophilic elements such as cell nuclei and in certain circumstances can cause
maceration of the softer tissue elements. On the other hand, when the tissue is
allowed to stay in the decalcifying agent for a very short period of time,
decalcification may be incomplete thereby interfering with the normal cutting of
sections and staining of specimens. If high-quality results are to be obtained from
decalcified tissue, it is important to determine the point at which all the calcium
has been removed because, from this point on, tissue damage seems to occur at
an increasing rate. There are several methods to check if the end point of
decalcification has been reached:
Physical tests require manipulation, bending, probing or trimming of the
specimen to “feel” for remaining calcified areas. While this method may be
successful in experienced hands it is generally considered to be unreliable.
Mechanical damage can occur during bending or probing and small deposits
of calcium can easily be missed. A method of determining the endpoint by
carefully weighing the specimen after rinsing and blotting has also been
described, and may be an effective method for large specimens. An alternate
method of evaluating tissues mechanically is by pricking the tissue with a
fine needle or a probe. This method is apt to produce needle tract artifacts
and destroy important cellular details. Pricking, slicing, bending or squeezing
tissue can disrupt soft tumor from the bone or cause false positive
microfractures of fine trabeculae, leading to a potential misdiagnosis. Aside
from this disadvantage, small calcified foci may not even be detected.
A simple chemical test can be applied when some acid decalcifiers are used
(particularly formic acid). The decalcifying fluid is usually changed every
24 -48 hours and the chemical test is performed on the discarded fluid. A
piece of blue litmus paper is added to a test tube containing 5 ml. of the
discarded decalcifying agent (the litmus paper will turn red due to the
acidity of the fluid). Strong ammonia is then added drop by drop until the
fluid is neutralized (this can be detected by the change in color of the litmus
paper from red to blue, indicating alkalinity). The presence of cloudiness
indicates that there is still calcium found in the solution. The tissue is then
immersed in a new solution of decalcifying agent. If the solution remains
clear after neutralization with concentrated ammonia, 0.5 ml. of saturated
aqueous solution of ammonium oxalate is added and the solution is allowed
to stand for 30 minutes. Cloudiness will signify incomplete calcium
removal; hence, the need for further decalcification. If the solution remains
clear after 30 minutes, decalcification is considered to be complete.
This test is cumbersome and useless in the every- day practice of
surgical pathology when many samples are placed in the decalcification
solution simultaneously. It is definitely more objective than the bubble
method which includes the observation of carbon- dioxide bubbles at the
surface of the bone during acid decalcification.
If chemical method of determination is to be done, the decalcifying agent
should be prepared with distilled water, since false positive readings may
be produced by the calcium ions present in tap water. It is unsuitable for
solutions containing over 10% acid, although these could be diluted and
result in a less sensitive test.
The best method, particularly with large specimens such as femoral heads, is
to X-ray the specimen. This is a very expensive although the most ideal, most
sensitive and most reliable method of determining extent of decalcification
due to its ability to detect even the smallest focus of calcium which appears
opaque in an X-ray plate. A good-quality X-ray will clearly reveal tiny
residual calcium deposits and allow further treatment if required. It is an
excellent method for following the process of decalcification of large
specimens such as femoral heads. It is, however, not recommended for
mercuric chloride-fixed tissues due to the latter's characteristic radio-opacity
which will interfere with the correct interpretation of the plate.
Treatment following decalcification and prior to processing
Various methods for neutralizing residual acid decalcifier before processing
have been published, including extensive washing in tap water or the application
of alkaline solutions. After decalcification is complete, the acid can be removed
from tissues or neutralized chemically by immersing the decalcified bone in
either saturated lithium carbonate solution or 5-10% aqueous sodium
bicarbonate solution for several hours.
Generally a short, effective wash in tap water should be sufficient as any
remaining acid will be removed during processing. Adequate water rinsing can
usually be accomplished in 30 minutes for small samples and 1-4 hours for
larger specimens. Samples that need to be immediately processed, such as small
needle biopsies, can be blotted or quickly rinsed with water to remove acid from
the surface, before transferring the specimen to a dehydrating fluid. It is
important to remove the bulk of the decalcifier to avoid contaminating the
processing reagents and the processor with acid. Application of vacuum during
wax infiltration should improve the quality of the finished blocks.
Acid decalcified tissues for frozen sections must be thoroughly washed in water
or stored in formol-saline containing 15% sucrose or phosphate-buffered saline
(PBS) with 15-20% sucrose at 4°C before freezing.
Tissues decalcified in EDTA solutions should not be placed directly into
70% alcohol, because this will cause residual EDTA to precipitate in the alcohol
and within the tissue. Rinsing the decalcified tissue with water or storing
overnight in formol-saline or phosphate buffered saline (PBS) will prevent the
formation of crystalline precipitate.
Surface decalcification
This is a method of dealing with small unexpected deposits of calcium that may
be encountered in paraffin blocks. When the paraffin-embedded block has been
trimmed, the tissue surface may reveal small foci of calcification and may cause
resistance or a "grating" sensation when sectioned with a microtome knife. If this
is encountered, the block can be removed from the chuck and placed face down
on a pad of cotton or gauze saturated with 10% hydrochloric acid for
approximately one hour. This surface treatment will allow the decalcifier to
penetrate a small distance into the block and dissolve the calcium. The block can
then be thoroughly rinsed in water to remove residual acid, chilled and
sectioned. Careful realignment of the block will be required because the
decalcifier will penetrate a very small distance into the block allowing only a
couple of sections to be taken. The staining properties of the tissue will be
affected after this procedure, so that allowances in staining need to be made to
achieve optimum results.
TISSUE SOFTENERS
Unduly hard tissues which are liable to damage the microtome knives may
require tissue softeners, aside from decalcification. Perenyi's fluid may act both
as a decalcifying agent and tissue softener. To soften unduly hard tissues,
selected portions are left in the fluid for 12-24 hours and dehydrated in the usual
manner; or the cut surface of the block may be submerged in the fluid for 1-2
hours before sectioning, to facilitate easier cutting of tissues.
Washing out and immersion of fixed tissues in 4% aqueous phenol solution
for 1-3 days may also cause considerable tissue softening and easier sectioning
of blocks without producing marked deleterious effects and tissue distortion.
Other substances which may be used as tissue softeners are Molliflex, 2%
hydrochloric acid, or 1% hydrochloric acid in 70% alcohol. Tissues immersed in
Molliflex may appear swollen and soapy. This does not, however, affect the
normalizing and subsequent staining of tissue sections.
REFERENCES
Brain, E.B. (1966) The Preparation of Decalcified Sections. Springfield, IL: C.C. Thomas, 86.
Callis G, Sterchi D. (1998) Decalcification of Bone: Literature Review and Practical Study of Various
Decalcifying Agents, Methods, and Their Effects on Bone Histology. The Journal of Histotechnology
21:49-58.
Callis, GM. (2002) Bone. In: Bancroft, J.D., Gamble, M. Theory and Practice of Histological
Techniques. 5th Ed., Churchill Livingstone, London, 269.
Carson FL. (2007) Histotechnology. 2nd ed. Chicago: ASCP Press.
Clayden EC. (1971) Practical section cutting and staining. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Culling CF. (1974) Handbook of Histopathological and Histochemical Techniques. 3rd ed.
Butterworth, London, 65.
Dotti LB, Paparo GB, Clarke BE. (1951) The use of ion exchange resin in decalcification of bone.
American Journal of Clinical Pathology, 21: 475.
Karpagaselvi S, Jayalakshmi K, Archana P, Lokesh P, Srinivas J, Lakshmi K. (2012) Evaluation and
comparison of decalcification agents on the human teeth. J Oral Maxillofac Pathol. 16(2): 222–227.
Mawhinney, W.H., Richardson, E., Malcolm, A.J. (1984) Control of rapid nitric acid decalcification.
Journal of Clinical Pathology, 37: 1409.
Moore RJ. (1994) Bone. In Woods AE and Ellis RC eds. Laboratory histopathology. New York:
Churchill Livingstone, 7.2-10.
Page KM. (1996) Bone: In Bancroft JD and Stevens A, eds. Theory and Practice of Histological
Techniques. New York: Churchill Livingstone.
Prasad P, Donoghue M. (2013) A comparative study of various decalcification techniques. Indian J Dent
Res 24:302-8
Reineke T, Jenni B, Abdou MT et al. (2006) Ultrasonic Decalcification Offers New Perspectives for
Rapid FISH, DNA, and RT_PCR Analysis in Bone Marrow Trephines Am J Surgical Pathology 30.
Rolls GO. (2011) Difficult Blocks and Reprocessing. Leica Microsystems.
Sanderson, C, Radley K, Mayton L. (1995) Ethylenediamine tetracetic acid in ammonium hydroxide
for reducing decalcification time. Biotechnics and Histochemistry, 70: 18.
Sanderson C. (1997) Entering the realm of mineralized bone processing: A review of the literature
and techniques. Journal of Histotechnology, 20(3): 259.
Sangeetha R, Uma K, Chandavarkar V. (2013) Comparison of routine decalcification methods with
microwave decalcification of bone and teeth. Oral Maxillofac Pathol. 17(3): 386–391.
Schenk RK, Olah AJ, Herrmann W. (1984) Preparation of calcified tissues for light microscopy. In:
Dickson, G. (ed.) Methods of Calcified Tissue Preparation. Elsevier, Amsterdam, 1.
Skinner RA, Hickmon SG, Lumpkin CK, Aronson J, Nicholas RW. (1997) Decalcified Bone: Twenty
Years of Successful Specimen Management. The Journal of Histotechnology 20: 267-277.
Sobel AE, Hanok A. (1951) Rapid method for determining ultramicro quantities of calcium and
magnesium. Archives of Pathology, 44: 92.
Stevenson A., Lowe J, Bancroft JD. (1996) Bone. In: Bancroft, J.D. Stevens, A. (eds.) Theory and
Practice of Histological Techniques. 2nd Ed. Churchill Livingstone, London, 320.
Vardaxis NJ. (1997) Pathology for the health sciences. Melbourne: Macmillan Australia Pty Ltd.
Wallington EA. (1972) Histological Methods for Bone. London: Butterworths.
Young B, Heath JW. (2000) Wheater's Functional Histology. 4th ed. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
CHAPTER 9
DEHYDRATION
As soon as the tissue has been fixed, and the bones and teeth have been
decalcified, it is necessary to remove the fixative and water from the specimen
and replace them with dehydrating fluid in preparation for impregnation. This
process of removing intercellular and extracellular water from the tissue
following fixation and prior to wax impregnation is known as "dehydration”, and
the solutions utilized to make this possible are called "Dehydrating Agents".
Many of these dehydrating agents are alcohols of various types that are generally
used in increasing strengths to remove aqueous tissue fluids with little disruption
to the tissue caused by diffusion currents.
It is important to distinguish between drying and dehydration. Drying is the
removal of water by evaporation from a solid, semi-solid or liquid. Solid tissues
should NEVER be allowed to air dry. Dehydration involves slow substitution of
the water in the tissue with an organic solvent. Most dehydrating agents are
strong organic solvents that bring about some shrinkage and extraction of cell
components. To minimize these effects, dehydrating agents are used in a graded
series for short periods of time, and water is gradually replaced so that violent
osmotic changes do not produce distortions.
Characteristics of an Ideal Dehydrating Solution:
1. It should dehydrate rapidly without producing considerable shrinkage
or distortion of tissues.
2. It should not evaporate very fast.
3. It should be able to dehydrate even fatty tissues.
4 It should not harden tissues excessively.
5. It should not remove stains.
6. It should not be toxic to the body.
7. It should not be a fire hazard.
As a general rule, whatever dehydrating agent is used, the amount in each
step should not be less than 10 times the volume of the tissue in order to ensure
complete penetration of the tissue by the dehydrating solution. It is also
important to keep the dehydration times as brief as possible to minimize the risk
of extracting cellular constituents. Almost any water miscible, anhydrous fluid
can be used as a dehydrating agent providing that it does not damage the tissue
proteins and is also miscible with the fluids to be used subsequently. Cost may
also be a factor.
Commonly Used Dehydrating Agents Are:
1. Alcohol (most common)
2. Acetone
3. Dioxane
4. Cellosolve
5. Triethyl phosphate
6. Tetrahydrofuran
ALCOHOL
Ethyl alcohol (ethanol) is the alcohol recommended for routine dehydration
of tissues. It is a clear, colorless, flammable fluid. It is considered to be the best
dehydrating agent because it is fast-acting, it mixes with water and many organic
solvents, and it penetrates tissues easily. It is not poisonous and not very
expensive.
Methyl alcohol is a toxic dehydrating agent, primarily employed for blood
and tissue films and for smear preparations. Butyl alcohol, which is utilized in
plant and animal micro-techniques, is a slow dehydrating agent, producing less
shrinkage and hardening than ethyl alcohol and is recommended for tissues
which do not require rapid processing.
It is not advisable to transfer fixed tissues directly from water or aqueous
fixative directly into absolute ethanol. Doing so causes a rapid removal of water
which can distort the appearance of more delicate cells and structures. It is
advisable to remove water gently and allow the tissue to slowly adjust to its
removal. The more delicate the tissue, the more gently this should be done, but
there is no hard and fast rule.
In most instances, dehydration starts by placing the fixed specimen in 70%
ethyl alcohol in water, progressing through 95% ethyl alcohol to 100% ethyl
alcohol. For delicate tissues, particularly embryonic tissues, dehydration starting
with 30% ethanol is recommended. Under no circumstances should a formalin-
fixed tissue be transferred directly to higher grades of alcohol, e.g. 85-95%
alcohol, because this is liable to produce considerable shrinkage and hardening
of tissues leading to distortion. Concentrated alcohols (95% or absolute) tend to
harden only the surface of the tissue while the deeper parts are not completely
penetrated. This will result in a relatively unequal impregnation of tissue with
consequently poor cutting of sections. To avoid this, 70% or lower
concentrations of alcohol, gradually increased to 95%, are used.
The strength of initial alcohol required in each concentration will depend
upon the size, and nature of each tissue and fixative used. Generally, smaller and
more delicate tissues require lower concentrations and shorter intervals bet ween
changes of succeeding ascending grades of alcohol. A very concentrated solution
(above 80%) makes tissues hard, brittle and difficult to cut. Prolonged storage in
lower concentrations of alcohol (below 70%) tends to macerate the tissue. The
tissue may be stored in 70-80% alcohol, although not for very long periods of
time, since this may later interfere with the staining properties of the specimen.
Although the tissue reaches the final stage of dehydration in 100% ethanol,
it’s not possible to proceed straight to wax embedding-- ethanol and wax don’t
mix! This is where ‘clearing’ comes in. The term ‘clearing’ refers to the property
of the solvents used- -when they have a relatively high refractive index and
when tissue is immersed in them, the tissue becomes transparent and clear.
For tissue preparation, one to two hours in each solution should be adequate.
Tissues with a high water content such as embryo tissue would require a much
shorter time. To ensure complete removal of water during dehydration, use at
least two changes of 100% ethanol of at least one half hour each. Never leave
tissues in 95 or 100% ethanol more than a total of 2 hours or the tissues will
harden. Tissues can be stored in 70% ethanol at any time during an interruption
in the routine.
The following is a general schedule (time in hours) for alcohol dehydration
of big tissues according to the type of fixative used:
Susa,
10% Zenker
Bouin's Carnoy or Flemming's
Formol- or
Fluid Formol Fluid
Saline Helly's
Sublimate
Running
Water 1-12 1-12
Alcohol
30% 1-6 1/2-3
Alcohol
50% 1-6 1/2-3
Alcohol
70%
3-12 1-6 3-12 1/2-3
Alcohol
3-12 1-6 3-12 1-6 1-3
90%
Absolute
Alcohol 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2
(1)
Absolute 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2
Alcohol
(2)
Absolute
Alcohol 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2
(3)
At this point all but a tiny residue of tightly bound (molecular) water should
have been removed from the specimen. A typical dehydration sequence for
specimens not more than 4mm thick would be:
70% ethanol 15 min
90% ethanol 15 min
100% ethanol 15 min
100% ethanol 15 min
100% ethanol 30 min
100% ethanol 45 min
A temperature of 37°C will hasten dehydration time and is especially used
for tissue sections that require urgent examinations such as fragmentary
biopsies. To insure complete dehydration, a layer of anhydrous copper sulfate,
about 1/4 inch deep is placed in the bottom of the container and covered with
filter paper. This will accelerate dehydration by removing water from the
dehydrating fluid. A blue discoloration of copper sulfate crystals will indicate
full saturation of dehydrating fluids with water. Alcohol is then discarded and
changed with a fresh solution.
Ethanol (ethyl alcohol) Boiling point 78.3° C
Advantages:
Nontoxic
Miscible in all proportions with water
Little shrinkage if graded alcohols are used
Can be used on eyes and embryos, if graded alcohols are used
Fast acting
Still considered best dehydrating solution
Reliable
Appears to cause less extraction of cellular components in general than
other agents
Inexpensive and easily obtained
Disadvantages:
Expensive
Long periods i n absolute ethanol will cause excessive shrinkage and
hardening
May be difficult to obtain
May have prohibitive taxes that necessitate troublesome book-keeping
Extracts methylene blue and other thiazine dyes from sections
Extracts more lipids than acetone
May cause more shrinkage of specimen
May react with an unreduced 0s04 remaining in specimen
Only slightly miscible with most resins
Butanol (butyl alcohol) Boiling point 117.7° C
Advantages:
Less shrinkage and hardening than with ethyl
Excellent for slow processing
Miscible with paraffin
Disadvantages:
Odorous
Slow-acting
Long periods of infiltration necessary
Dehydrating power low
Tertiary butanol (butyl alcohol) Boiling point 82.8° C
Advantages:
Universal solvent—acts as dehydrating and clearing agent
May be used in staining series as a dehydrating agent
Mixes with water, ethanol, xylene, and paraffin in all
Disadvantages:
Odorous
More expensive than butanol
Primary infiltration must be done in half tertiary butanol and half
paraffin, prior to paraffin impregnation
Reagent tends to solidify at room temperature or below 25° C
Isopropanol (isopropyl alcohol) Boiling point 82.3° C
Advantages:
Excellent substitute for ethanol
Less shrinkage and hardening than ethanol
No government restrictions on its use
Sufficiently water-free to use in place of absolute ethanol
Lillie considers it “the best all- around substitute for ethyl alcohol”
Less expensive than tax-free alcohol
Disadvantages:
• Cannot be used in the celloidin technic since nitrocellulose is
insoluble in it • Cannot be used for preparing staining solutions, since
dyes are not soluble in it
Pentanol (amyl alcohol) Boiling point 128° C
Advantages:
Miscible with 90% alcohol, toluene and xylene
Dissolves paraffin wax
Disadvantages:
Toxic
Cannot be used in poorly ventilated rooms
Not miscible with water
ACETONE (Boiling point 56° C)
Acetone is a cheap, rapid-acting dehydrating agent utilized for most urgent
biopsies which it dehydrates in 1/2 to 2 hours. Acetone is a clear, colorless fluid
that mixes with water, ethanol and most organic solvents. Acetone is more
miscible with epoxy resins than alcohol, but is highly flammable and requires
considerable care in handling. It is rapid in action but penetrates tissues poorly
and causes brittleness in tissues that are placed in acetone for prolonged period
of time. Most lipids are removed from tissues with this dehydrating agent. Its use
has been limited only to small pieces of tissues due to its extreme volatility and
inflammability. Because of considerable tissue shrinkage produced, acetone is
not recommended for routine dehydration purposes.
Advantages:
Rapid dehydrating agent
Less expensive than ethanol
Does not extract methylene blue and other dyes from stained sections
May cause less shrinkage of specimen than ethanol
Not reactive with 0s04 remaining in specimen.
Miscible with most embedding resins.
Disadvantages:
Requires a clearing agent
Volume must be 20 times that of the tissue
Best processing requires a graded series of a mixture of acetone and
xylene before one can go into paraffin
Needs good ventilation
Evaporates rapidly
Flammable
Absolute acetone is easily contaminated with water, resulting in complete
dehydration.
Uranyl acetate and phosphotungstic acid are only soluble in dilute
solutions of acetone.
DIOXANE (Diethylene Dioxide) Refractive index 1.42; Boiling point 101.5°
C
Dioxane is an excellent dehydrating and clearing agent readily miscible in
water, melted paraffin, alcohol and xylol. It produces less tissue shrinkage as
compared to alcohol dehydration. Tissues can be left in this reagent for long
periods of time without affecting the consistency or staining properties of the
specimen. Because dioxane is miscible with both water and paraffin, tissues may
be placed directly into the solution after washing out. However, tissue sections
dehydrated with dioxane tend to ribbon poorly.
Aside from being expensive, dioxane is also extremely dangerous, and this
is its main disadvantage. Its vapor produces a cumulative and highly toxic action
in man; hence, it should not be used routinely. The laboratory room should be
properly ventilated, and all residues should be washed down in the sink. It
should not be recycled as the risk of creating explosive peroxides increases
greatly.
The following is an example of a time schedule for dehydration with
dioxane Graupner's Method):
(1st) pure dioxane solution 1 hour
(2nd) pure dioxane solution 1 hour
(3rd) pure dioxane solution 2 hours
(1st) Paraffin wax 15 minutes
(2nd) Paraffin wax 45 minutes
(3rd) Paraffin wax 2 hours
Embed in mold and cool in water.
In another method (Weiseberger's method), the tissue is wrapped in a gauze
bag and suspended in a bottle containing dioxane and a little anhydrous calcium
oxide. Water is displaced from the tissue by dioxane and in turn absorbed by
calcium oxide or quicklime. Dehydration period ranges from 3-24 hours.
Tissues which have been treated with a chromate fixative, e.g. Regaud's or
Moller's fluid, should be thoroughly washed in running tap water prior to
treatment with dioxane in order to remove the chromate.
Advantages:
Universal solvent—it dehydrates and clears
Miscible with water, alcohol, xylene, and paraffin
Does not harm tissue over long time periods
Faster dehydrant than ethanol
Disadvantages:
Needs large volume for dehydration
Costs about for times more than does absolute alcohol
Must be used in well-ventilated rooms
Cumulatively toxic
Odorous
Distorts tissue-containing cavities
CELLOSOLVE (Ethylene glycol monoethyl ether) Boiling point
156.4° C
Cellosolve dehydrates rapidly. The tissue may be transferred from water or
normal saline directly to cellosolve and stored in it for months without producing
hardening or distortion.
CAUTION: Ethylene glycol ethers are combustible at 110-120°F and are
toxic by inhalation, skin contact and ingestion. Following exposure, the
reproductive, fetal, urinary and blood systems are particularly vulnerable to their
toxic side effects. If it cannot be avoided, propylene-based glycol ethers should
be used instead of ethylene-based glycol ethers.
Advantages:
Rapid dehydrating agent
Tissue may remain in it for months without injury
Avoids distortion and does not require graded dilutions
Disadvantages:
Expensive
Rapidly absorbs water from the air
Requires clearing agent
TRIETHYLPHOSPHATE- Boiling point 215° C
When tissues are fixed, washed and transferred directly into triethyl
phosphate solution for dehydration, it removes water very readily and produces
very little distortion and hardening of tissue. It is soluble in alcohol, water, ether,
benzene, chloroform, acetone and xylene. It is used to dehydrate sections and
smears following certain stains and produces minimum shrinkage.
Advantages:
May be used in routine paraffin technic
Displaces water readily with slight distortion
Does not harden tissue excessively
May be used as a dehydrating solution in the staining sequence
Soluble in alcohols, benzene, toluene, xylene, ether, chloroform
Disadvantages:
None
TETRAHYDOFURAN (THF)
Tetrahydrofuran (THF) is a reagent that both dehydrates and clears tissues
since it is miscible in both water and paraffin. It can dissolve many substances
including fats and is in itself miscible with lower alcohols, ether, chloroform,
acetone, benzene and xylene. It may be used for demixing, clearing and
dehydrating paraffin sections before and after staining. It causes less shrinkage
and easier cutting of sections with fewer artifacts. It does not dissolve out aniline
dyes. In fact, most staining procedures give improved results with
tetrahydrofuran. THF is toxic if ingested or inhaled. Vapors cause nausea,
dizziness, headache and anesthesia. It is an eye and skin irritant, and prolonged
exposure (up to 6 months) may cause conjunctival irritation. Because of this and
its rather offensive odor, processing with THF should be done in a well-
ventilated room.
Although Teflon gloves may be suitable, the use of THF should be avoided
if possible, as there is no practical way to absolutely protect skin against contact.
Advantages:
Miscible in all proportions with water, ether, chloroform, acetone, and
the hydrocarbons xylene, toluene, and benzene
Rapid without excessive shrinkage and hardening
Low toxicity; low fire and explosion hazard
Not toxic
Better results than most universal solvents
Solvents of mounting media
Disadvantages:
Odorous- should be used in well-ventilated room
• Evaporates rapidly
Dyes are not soluble in tetrahydrofuran
DEHYDRATING AGENTS FOR ELECTRON MICROSCOPY
Tissue processing for transmission electron microscopy (TEM) is commonly
accomplished using ethanol as a dehydrating solvent and propylene oxide as a
transition fluid. Both solvents have some undesirable properties: ethanol
solubilizes lipids; propylene oxide is completely miscible with embedding resins
and, because of its low viscosity, it can infiltrate tissues readily and reduce the
viscosity of embedding resin mixtures. However, it is highly flammable, volatile,
toxic, and potentially carcinogenic. It is very reactive even at low temperatures,
may combine with reactive groups in cells, and may cause certain cytochemical
and staining reactions. Traces may be retained in polymerized resin. It may react
with epoxy groups and partially inhibit polymerization which adversely affects
hardness and cutting properties of blocks.
Acetonitrile is a good substitute for propylene oxide. It is reported to be
non-carcinogenic, less toxic and not as flammable as propylene oxide. It is freely
miscible with water, alcohols, acetone, and epoxy resins. It does not interfere
with epoxy polymerization; and the resulting cured resins have excellent cutting
quality and beam stability. Acetonitrile is also an excellent dehydrating agent
whose use does not necessitate modification of current techniques. Most
importantly, the low solubility of phospholipids in acetonitrile limits the loss of
membrane lipids and, hence, leads to a better preservation of tissue features. It is
also used as a dehydrating agent for cells prepared for Scanning Electron
Microscopy (SEM).
REFERENCES
Anderson G, Bancroft J. (2002) Tissue processing and microtomy. In: Bancroft, J.D., Gamble, M.
Theory and Practice of Histological Techniques. 5th Ed., Churchill Livingstone, London, 100.
Baker FJ. (1962) Progress in Medical Laboratory Technology, Vol. 1, Butterworths and Company,
London.
Baker FJ. (1962) Progress in Medical Laboratory Technology, Vol. 2, Butterworths, London.
Baker FJ, Silverton RE, Luckcock ED. (1966) Introduction to Medical Laboratory Technology,
Butterworths, London.
Baker RD. (1967) Postmortem Examination, Specific Methods and Procedures. W.B. Saunders,
London and Philadelphia.
Bancroft JD, Cook HC. (1994) Manual of Histological Techniques and the ir Diagnostic
Application, Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.
Brown CC. (1969) Primer of Histopathologic Technique. Appleton-Century-Crafts, New York.
Drury RAB, Wallington EA. (1980) Carlton’s Histological Technique. 5t11 ed. Oxford University
Press, London.
Baker JR. (1958) Principles of Microbiological Microtechnique. Mehuen & Co., Ltd., London.
Clark G. ed. (1960) Staining Procedures Used by the Biological Stain Commission, 3rd ed. William
& Wilkins, Baltimore.
Culling CFA. (1974) Handbook of Histopathological and Histochemical Techniques, 3rd ed.
Butterworth, Massachusetts.
Drury RAB, Wallington EA. (1967) Carleton s Histological Technique, 4th ed. University Press,
Oxford.
Edwards HH, Yeh YY, Tarnowski BI, Schonbaum GR. (1992) Acetonitrile as a substitute for
ethanol/propylene oxide in tissue processing for transmission electron microscopy: comparison of fine
structure and lipid solubility in mouse liver, kidney, and intestine. Microsc Res Tech 21(1):39-50.
Holshek JG, Akins RE. (1994): Acetonitrile is better than ethanol as a dehydrating agent for cells
prepared for SEM. Proc Mic Soc of Amer, 52nd Annual Mtg, San Francisco Press, ed GW Bailey and
AJ Garrett-Reed, pp 324-325.
Lillie RD, Fullmer HM. (1976) Histopathologic Technic and Practical Histochemistry, 4th ed.
McGraw-Hill Book Co., New York.
Mollenhauer HH. (1993) Artifacts caused by dehydration and epoxy embedding in transmission
electron microscopy. Microsc Res Tech. 26(6):496-512.
Raphael SS. (1983) Processing tissues for histotechnology. In: Raphael SS et al, eds. Lynch s
Medical Laboratory Technology, 4th ed. W.B. Saunders Co., Philadelphia, Chapt 32,759.
Sheehan DC, Hrapchak BB, Eds. (1980) Theory and Practice of Histotechnology, 2nd ed. CV Mosby
Co., St. Louis.
Stratton CJ, Erickson TB, Wetzstein HY. (1982) The lipid solubility of fixative, staining and embedding
media, and the introduction of LX-112 and poly/bed-812 as dehydrants for epoxy resin embedment.
Tissue Cell. 14(1):13-24.
Tarnowski BI, Schonbaum GR. (1984) Acetonitrile: substitute for propylene oxide in tissue processing
for transmission electron microscopy. Proc 42nd Ann Meeting Elec Mic Society of America, p 38
CHAPTER 10
CLEARING
Although the dehydrated tissue is now essentially water-free, it still cannot be
infiltrated with wax because wax and ethanol are largely immiscible. An
intermediate solvent that is fully miscible with both ethanol and paraffin wax is
needed to remove alcohol and other dehydrating solutions from tissues prior to
embedding (usually in paraffin wax), and from finished slides prior to mounting.
They are also used after sectioning to remove paraffin wax after cutting on the
microtome. Clearing (de-alcoholization) is the process whereby alcohol or a
dehydrating agent is removed from the tissue and replaced with a substance that
will dissolve the wax with which the tissue is to be impregnated (e.g. paraffin) or
used as the medium on which the tissue is to be mounted (e.g. Canada balsam).
Aside from removing alcohol, a clearing agent must also be miscible with
Canada balsam and other resins that are used for mounting sections. This stage
in the process is called “clearing” because many (but not all) clearing agents
impart an optical clarity or transparency to the tissue due to their relatively high
refractive index. This change in appearance is often used as an indication of the
effectiveness or completeness of the clearing process. Because of the high
refractive indices of most reagents used for de-alcoholization, tissues,
particularly embryos and parasites, become transparent so that the internal
structures become visible to the naked eye. Another important role of the
clearing agent is to remove a substantial amount of fat from the tissue which
otherwise presents a barrier to wax infiltration.
The most commonly used clearing agent for this purpose is xylene. Glycerin
and gum syrup are used when the tissue is to be cleared directly from water, as in
a frozen section. No de-alcoholization is involved in this process.
Characteristics of a Good Clearing Agent:
It should be miscible with alcohol to promote rapid removal of the
dehydrating agent from the tissue.
It should be miscible with, and easily removed by melted paraffin wax
and/or by mounting medium to facilitate impregnation and mounting of
sections.
It should not produce excessive shrinkage, hardening or damage of
tissue.
It should not dissolve out aniline dyes.
It should not evaporate quickly in a water bath.
It make tissues transparent.
The choice of a clearing agent depends upon the following:
The type of tissues to be processed, and the type of processing to be
undertaken
The processor system to be used
Intended processing conditions such as temperature, vacuum and
pressure
Safety factors
Cost and convenience
Speedy removal of dehydrating agent
Ease of removal by molten paraffin wax
Minimal tissue damage
Clearing fluids with a low boiling point are generally more readily replaced
by melted paraffin, although chloroform which has a lower boiling point than
xylene in fact takes longer than the latter to clear. Viscosity also affects the speed
of penetration of the clearing agent. Prolonged exposure to most clearing agents
causes the tissue to become brittle and therefore more difficult to cut.
A. Xylene (Xylol)
Xylene is a colorless clearing agent that is most commonly used in histology
laboratories. Clearing time is usually 1/2 to 1 hour. It is used for clearing, both
for embedding and mounting procedures. It is generally suitable for most routine
histologic processing schedules of less than 24 hours, and when the tissue block
size is less than 5 mm. in thickness. Xylene is reasonably cost effective and
works well for short-term clearing of small tissue blocks.
Xylene is one of the routinely used chemical in histology and pathology
laboratories because of its vital role in the paraffin wax tissue processing
method. It is mostly used as a clearing agent during tissue processing and as a
dewaxing agent during staining. It is also used in cover slipping, in cleaning
tissue processors, as solvent to remove synthetic immersion oil from the
microscope objective and in recycling of used slides. However, several toxicities
believed to be caused by intermediate products of xylene metabolism such as
methyl benzaldehyde have been reported. These include central nervous system
disorders, respiratory depression, abdominal pain, dryness and redness of skin,
dermatitis, liver diseases, nephrotoxicity, conjunctivitis, and teratogenic and
fetotoxic effects.
Advantages:
It is the most rapid clearing agent, suitable for urgent biopsies which it
clears within 15-30 minutes.
It makes tissues transparent.
It is miscible with absolute alcohol and paraffin.
It does not extract out aniline dyes.
For mounting procedures, it does not dissolve celloidin and can,
therefore, be used for celloidin sections.
It evaporates quickly in paraffin oven and can, therefore, be readily
replaced by wax during impregnation and embedding.
It is cheap.
Disadvantages:
It is highly inflammable and should be appropriately stored.
If used longer than 3 hours, it makes tissues excessively hard and brittle.
It causes considerable hardening and shrinkage of tissues; hence, is not
suitable for nervous tissues and lymph nodes.
Xylene becomes milky when an incompletely dehydrated tissue is
immersed in it.
Xylene may irritate eyes, nose and respiratory tract. It can be absorbed
through the skin and cause dermatitis. At high concentrations, it is toxic
and narcotic.
Special Handling Procedures and Storage Requirements:
• Keep container tightly closed to prevent xylene from subliming and
entering the atmosphere.
• Only non-sparking tools may be used to handle xylene.
• Store in a cool and dry area away from incompatible substances (i.e.
oxidizing agents, strong acids).
• Store xylene in a flammable liquid storage cabinet.
• Wash hands thoroughly after handling xylene (even if gloves were
used).
• Remove contaminated clothing and wash before reuse.
• Keep away from heat, sparks, flames, sources of ignition (including
empty containers that will retain product residue).
• Transport chemicals in closed containers, in the smallest amounts
possible, and use aids such as carts, chemical transport carriers, etc.
• It is highly recommended that all chemicals be stored below eye level so
cracking or leaking containers are immediately visible and there is less
potential for chemicals falling onto lab workers when pulling from
shelves.
B. Toluene
Toluene is better at preserving tissue structure and is more tolerant of small
amounts of water left behind in the tissues than xylene. However, toluene is
more expensive than xylene and more toxic, so toluene is less commonly used.
Toluene may be used as a substitute for xylene or benzene for clearing both
during embedding and mounting processes. Time recommended for clearing is 1
-2 hours.
Advantages:
It is miscible with both absolute alcohol and paraffin.
It acts fairly rapidly and is recommended for routine purposes.
Tissues do not become excessively hard and brittle even if left in toluene
for 24 hours.
Clears overnight.
It is not carcinogenic.
Disadvantages:
It is slower than xylene and benzene.
It tends to acidify in a partially filled vessel.
Highly concentrated solutions will emit fumes that are toxic upon
prolonged exposure.
It is more expensive.
C. Benzene
Benzene is preferred by some as clearing agent in the embedding process of
tissues because it penetrates and clears tissues rapidly. It used to be a popular
routine clearing agent until recently when its highly carcinogenic properties were
recognized. Its use for clearing purposes is therefore strongly discouraged.
Advantages:
It is rapid acting, hence is recommended for urgent biopsies (15-60
minutes) and routine purposes.
It volatilizes rapidly in paraffin oven and is therefore easily eliminated
from the tissue.
It is miscible with absolute alcohol.
It does not make tissues hard and brittle.
It causes minimum shrinkage.
It makes tissues transparent.
It clears overnight.
Disadvantages:
It is highly flammable.
If a section is left in benzene for a long time, considerable tissue
shrinkage may be observed. Hence, tissues should be transferred to
paraffin wax as soon as possible.
Excessive exposure to benzene may be extremely toxic to man and may
become carcinogenic or it may damage the bone marrow resulting in
aplastic anemia. If ever benzene is to be used for clearing, the laboratory
should be well-ventilated.
D. Chloroform
Chloroform, when used for clearing of tissues during the embedding
process, is slower in action than xylene, but causes less brittleness. Thicker
tissue blocks, even those up to I cm. in thickness, can be processed. However,
tissues placed in chloroform do not become translucent.
Advantages:
It is recommended for routine work (6-24 hours).
It is miscible with absolute alcohol.
It is recommended for tough tissues (e.g. skin, fibroid and decalcified
tissues) for nervous tissues, lymph nodes and embryos because it causes
minimum shrinkage and hardening of tissues.
It is suitable for large tissue specimens.
It is not inflammable.
Disadvantages:
It is relatively toxic to the liver after prolonged inhalation; this may be
prevented by adequate room ventilation.
Wax impregnation after chloroform clearing is relatively slow.
It does not make tissues transparent.
It is not very volatile in paraffin oven; hence, it is difficult to remove
from paraffin sections. It may even produce considerable deterioration of
the wax.
Its vapor may attack the rubber seal used in vacuum impregnating bath.
Complete clearing is difficult to evaluate.
Tissues tend to float in chloroform; this may be avoided by wrapping the
tissues with absorbent cotton gauze to facilitate sinking of the section in
solution.
It evaporates quickly from a water bath.
E. Cedarwood Oil
Cedarwood oil is used to clear both paraffin and celloidin sections during
the embedding process. It is especially recommended for central nervous system
tissues and cytological studies, particularly of smooth muscles and skin. It
requires two changes in clearing solution. Clearing is usually complete in 2-3
days.
Advantages:
It is very penetrating.
It is miscible with 96% alcohol which it removes readily.
It clears celloidin in 5-6 days.
It causes minimal shrinkage of tissues.
Tissues may be left in oil indefinitely without considerable damage and
distortion.
It does not dissolve out aniline dyes.
It makes tissues transparent.
It does not harden tissues.
It does not interfere too seriously with paraffin penetration if it is not
completely removed.
Clearing with cedarwood oil often improves cutting of the sections.
Disadvantages:
It is an extremely slow clearing agent, hence, it is not recommended for
routine purposes.
It is slightly slower in penetrating than benzene.
It is hard to eliminate from the tissues in paraffin bath, making the wax
impregnation process very slow. This may be improved or hastened by
transferring the specimen from oil to benzene for 1/2 hour before finally
placing the tissue in wax.
Quality is not always uniform and good. Tissues cleared in cedarwood oil
initially float before gradually staying to the bottom as clearing proceeds.
Hence, the tissue may dry out before it is completely cleared. This can be
prevented by superimposing absolute alcohol on the surface of the
clearing agent. Once saturated, the specimen should then be transferred
to a fresh solution of cedarwood oil.
Cedarwood oil becomes milky upon prolonged storage and should be
filtered before use.
Cedarwood oil that has been previously used to clear acetic-alcohol fixed
tissues may produce crystals with a melting point of approximately 35°C
and therefore interfere with adequate clearing of tissue. The solution
must be heated to 200°C in order to dissolve the crystals and restore the
solution to its normal state.
It is very expensive.
F. Aniline oil
This is not normally utilized as a routine clearing agent but it is
recommended for clearing embryos, insects and very delicate specimens, due to
its ability to clear 70% alcohol without excessive tissue shrinkage and hardening.
G. Clove oil
This reagent causes minimum shrinkage of tissues. However, its quality is
not guaranteed due to its tendency to become adulterated. Wax impregnation
after clearing with clove oil is slow and difficult. Tissues become brittle, aniline
dyes are removed, and celloidin is dissolved. All of these, in addition to the
expensiveness of the solution, make it unsuitable for routine clearing purposes.
H. Carbon tetrachloride
Carbon Tetrachloride may be used in clearing tissues for embedding. Its
properties are very similar to that of chloroform although it is relatively cheaper.
Its disadvantage is the same as that of chloroform. It produces considerable
tissue hardening, and is dangerous to inhale on prolonged exposure due to its
highly toxic effects.
I. Tetrahydrofuran
Tetrahydrofuran is superior to ordinary dehydrating and clearing agents due
to its ability to perform two processes at the same time, thereby shortening the
total processing time and allowing more time for fixation. It is non-toxic but has
offensive odor and should be used in a well-ventilated room.
J. Dioxane
Dioxane is miscible both with water and paraffin. It is used primarily when
time is important because the tissues may be embedded with paraffin within 4
hours after fixation. The tissues are transferred to dioxane straight from Bouin's
fluid or a formalin fixative. The dioxane is changed 3 times within 4 hours and
the tissues are transferred directly to paraffin (3 changes are made in a total of 90
minutes). Dioxane causes greater shrinkage than xylene does. In addition, it is
dangerous. Fumes of dioxane are toxic to human especially to the liver.
Other Xylene Substitutes
The reported toxicity and environmental pollution from unsafe disposal of
xylene led to its substitution with other less-toxic substitutes such as limonene
reagents, mineral oil mixtures, 1.7% dish washing solution, vegetable oils and
coconut oil. Though these substitutes exist, their availability in commercial
quantities in developing countries has hampered their use. All the xylene-
substitutes have to be analyzed thoroughly, before concluding which alternative
is better.
Terpenes are isoprene polymers found in essential oils originally derived
from plants, though some are now synthesized. They are the earliest transition
solvents to be used in histology and include turpentine and oils of bergamot,
cedarwood, clove, lemon, oreganum and sandalwood. In general the natural oils
are not highly pure compounds but contain several substances.
Many terpenes clear tissues and celloidin sections from 80%-95% alcohol,
render tissues transparent and have a slow gentle non-hardening action. Most are
generally regarded as safe though some have particularly strong odors which can
be overpowering, requiring good laboratory ventilation. Terpenes are moderately
effective solvents, but they too are considered toxic. Solvents in this class also
dry slowly, leave an oily residue on slides and are relatively expensive.
One of the recommended xylene substitutes from the terpene family is
Limonene, a volatile oil found in citrus peels which goes by several trade
names. It is a natural oil found in the skins of citrus fruits, such as lemons or
oranges, and in cooking is usually referred to as lemon or orange zest. Limonene
is obtained industrially by the steam distillation of orange peel which is a
byproduct of the orange juice industry. It is a clear, colorless fluid with a
distinctly citrus aroma, not unpleasant to most people, although some do not like
it.
Limonene is often sold as a xylene replacement and some technologists
substitute it for xylene in other uses, but this is not universally successful. When
used as the clearant immediately prior to cover slipping, there are some reports
that the mounting medium, usually dissolved in either toluene or xylene, does
not mix well with the limonene. In such cases, replacing the limonene with
xylene or toluene, or quickly dipping the section in either one just prior to cover
slipping should be effective. This does, of course, defeat the purpose of the
replacement to a certain degree.
Orange oil based clearing agents offer the clearing action with the lowest
hazard rating of all xylene alternatives. It is excellent for preserving fine tissue
structure, and can often be used in place of xylene with no alteration of protocol.
In using a product containing orange oils, it is important to use a product which
has been rigorously purified then stabilized. Orange oils that are neither pure nor
stable can break down to produce compounds which will interfere with staining
procedures.
Chlorinated hydrocarbons can be effective solvents, but they are
considered toxic chemicals, posing serious health risks. Government regulations
have restricted most of the effective solvents in this class.
Coconut oil is an efficient substitute for xylene, as it is non-hazardous, less
expensive and causes less shrinkage of the tissue. It can be used as a de-
alcoholization agent in the histopathological laboratory, without losing the
quality of the histological details. The only drawback associated with coconut
oil, is its tendency to get solidified at a lower temperature. However, this can be
overcome by performing the clearing procedure in an incubator, maintaining the
required temperature.
Substitution of the conventional xylene with bleached palm oil as a
clearing agent during tissue processing and as a dewaxing agent during staining
gives good tissues, sections and histological slides. In addition, bleached palm
oil is nontoxic, nonhazardous, nonflammable, bio-degradable, economic, easy to
handle, and readily available.
REFERENCES
Anderson K, Fuxe K, Nilsen OG. (1981) Production of discrete changes in dopamine and noradrenaline
levels and turnover in various parts of the rat brain following exposure to xylene. Toxicol Appl
Pharmacol. 60:535–48.
Anderson G, Bancroft J. (2002) Tissue processing and microtomy. In: Bancroft, J.D., Gamble, M.
Theory and Practice of Histological Techniques. 5th Ed., Churchill Livingstone, London, 100.
Andre GG, Wenger JB, Rebolloso D, Arrington JB, Mehm WJ. (1994) Evaluation of clearing and
infiltration mixtures (CIMs) as xylene substitutes for tissue processing. J Histotechnol. 17:137–42.
Ankle MR, Joshi PS. (2011) A study to evaluate the efficacy of xylene-free hematoxylin and eosin
staining procedure as compared to the conventional hematoxylin and eosin staining: An experimental
study. J Oral Max Pathol. 15:161–7.
Atlanta: Georgia. (1993) Toxicological profile for xylene, U.S Department of Health and Human
Services, public health service, Agency for toxic substance and disease registry.
Baker FJ. (1962) Progress in Medical Laboratory Technology, Vol. 1, Butterworths and Company,
London.
Baker FJ. (1962) Progress in Medical Laboratory Technology, Vol. 2, Butterworths, London.
Baker FJ, Silverton RE, Luckcock ED. (1966) Introduction to Medical Laboratory Technology,
Butterworths, London.
Baker RD. (1967) Postmortem Examination, Specific Methods and Procedures. W.B. Saunders,
London and Philadelphia.
Bancroft JD, Cook HC. (1994) Manual of Histological Techniques and their Diagnostic Application.
Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.
Brown CC. (1969) Primer of Histopathologic Technique. Appleton-Century-Crafts, New York.
Buesa RJ. (2000) Mineral oil: The best xylene substitute for tissue processing yet. J Histotechnol.
23:143–9.
Buesa RJ, Maxim VP. (2009) Histology without xylene. Ann Diagn Pathol.13:246–56.
Culling, C.F.A. (1974) Handbook of Histopathological and Histochemical Techniques, 3rd ed.,
Butterworths, Massachusetts.
Drury RAB, Wallington EA. (1967) Carleton’s Histological Technique, 4th ed. University Press,
Oxford.
Drury RAB., Wallington EA. (1980) Carlton s Histological Technique. 5th ed. Oxford University
Press, London.
Erickson T, Amed V, Leibach SJ, Bushnik P, Saxon A, Hryhorczuk DO, et al. (1994) Acute bone
marrow toxicity and pancytopenia following exposure to lead chromate, xylene, and significant changes
in the amounts of neurotransmitter and related substances in rat brain induced by subacute exposure to
low levels of toluene and xylene. Ind Health. 21:143–51
Kandyala R, Raghavendra SP, Rajasekharan ST. (2010) Xylene: ethylbenzene in a degloving injury. Am
J Hematol. 47:257–61.
Falkeholm L, Grant CA, Magnusson A, Möller E. (2001) Xylene-free method for histological
preparation: A multicentre evaluation. Lab Invest. 81:1213–21.
Hipolito RN. (1980) Xylene poisoning in laboratory workers: Vase reports and discussion. Lab Med.
11:593–5.
Honma T, Sudo A, Miyagawa M, Sato M, Hasegawa H. (1983An overview of its health hazards and
preventive measures. J Oral Max Pathol. 14:1–5
Lab-Tek Products, Division of Miles Laboratories Inc., Naperville, Ill. 60540. Raphael, S.S. (1983)
Processing tissues for histotechnology. In: Raphael SS et al, eds. Lynch s Medical Laboratory
Technology, 4t11 ed. Chapt 32, W.B. Saunders Co., P hiladelphia, 759.
Lillie RD, Fullmer HM. (1976) Histopathologic Technic and Practical Histochemistry, 4t11 ed.
McGraw-Hill Book Co., New York.
Lyon H, Holm I, Prento P, Balslev E. (1995) Non-hazardous organic solvents in the paraffin embedding
technique: A rational approach. Histochem Cell Biol.103:263–9.
Rasmussen B, Hjort K, Mellerup I, Sether G, Christensen N. (1992) Vegetable oils instead of xylene in
tissue processing. Acta Pathol Microbio Immunol Scandinavica. 100:827–31.
Reinherdt PA, Leonard KL, Ashbrook PC. (1996) Pollution prevention and waste minimization in
laboratories. Vol. 3. Florida: CRC press, Lewis Publishers; Xylene substitutes; p. 346.
Revilla AS, Pestana CR, Pardo-Andreu GL, Santos AC, Uyemura SA, Gonzales ME, et al. (2007)
Potential toxicity of toluene and xylene evoked by mitochondrial uncoupling. Toxicol in vitro. 21:782–
8.
Savoleinen H, Pfaffli P. (1980) Dose dependent neurochemical changes during short term inhalation
exposure to xylene. Arch Toxicol. 1980; 45:117–22
Sheehan DC, Hrapchak BB, Eds. (1980) Theory and Practice of Histotechnology, 2nd ed. CV Mosby
Co., St. Louis.
Smith J. (2007) Freeman Hospital, Osteo-articular Histology Laboratory, Newcastle upon Tyne, UK,
2Royal Victoria Infirmary, Biopsy Laboratory, Histopathology Department, Newcastle upon Tyne, UK.
Uchida Y, Nakatsuka H, Ukai H, Watanabe T, Liu YT, Huang MY. (1993) Symptoms and signs in
workers exposed predominantly to xylene. Int Arch Occup Environ Health. 64:597–605.
CHAPTER 11
IMPREGNATION AND EMBEDDING
Impregnation (Infiltration) is the process whereby the clearing agent is
completely removed from the tissue and replaced by a medium that will
completely fill all the tissue cavities and give a firm consistency to the specimen.
This allows easier handling and cutting of suitably thin sections without any
damage or distortion to the tissue and its cellular components.
Embedding (Casting or Blocking) is the process by which the impregnated
tissue is placed into a precisely arranged position in a mold containing a
medium which is then allowed to solidify. Ideally, an infiltrating and
embedding medium should be:
soluble in processing fluids
suitable for sectioning and ribboning
molten between 30°C and 60°C
translucent or transparent; colorless
stable
homogeneous
capable of flattening after ribboning
non-toxic
odorless
easy to handle
inexpensive
The medium used to infiltrate the tissue is usually the same medium utilized for
impregnation, and for general purposes is known as an Embedding Medium.
There are generally four types of impregnation and embedding medium,
namely: 1. Paraffin wax
2. Celloidin (collodion)
3. Gelatin
4. Plastic
PARAFFIN WAX IMPREGNATION
Paraffin is the simplest, most common and best embedding medium used
for routine tissue processing. Paraffin wax is a polycrystalline mixture of solid
hydrocarbons produced during the refining of coal and mineral oils. It is solid
at room temperature but melts at temperatures up to about 65°C or 70°C.
Paraffin wax can be purchased with melting points at different temperatures,
the most common for histological use being about 56°C to 58°C. At its melting
point, it tends to be slightly viscous, but this decreases as the temperature is
increased. The traditional advice with paraffin wax is to use this about 2°C
above its melting point. Wax hardness (viscosity) depends upon the molecular
weight of the components and the ambient temperature. To decrease viscosity
and improve infiltration of the tissue, technologists often increase the
temperature to above 60°C or 65°C.
High molecular weight mixtures melt at higher temperatures than waxes
comprised of lower molecular weight fractions. Paraffin wax is traditionally
marketed by its melting points which range from 39°C to 68°C.
Tissue-wax adhesion depends upon the crystal morphology of the
embedding medium. Small, uniform sized crystals provide better physical
support for specimens through close packing. Crystalline morphology of
paraffin wax can be altered by incorporating additives which result in a less
brittle, more homogeneous wax with good cutting characteristics. There is
consequently less deformation during thin sectioning. Setting temperature does
not appreciably affect crystal size.
Advantages:
1. Thin individual serial sections may be cut with ease from the
majority of tissues without distortion.
2. The process is very rapid, allowing sections to be prepared within
24 hours.
3. Tissue blocks and unstained mounted sections may be stored in
paraffin for an indefinite period of time after impregnation without
considerable tissue destruction.
4. Because formalin-fixed, paraffin-embedded tissues may be stored
indefinitely at room temperature, and nucleic acids (both DNA and
RNA) may be recovered from them decades after fixation, they are an
important resource for historical studies in medicine.
5. Many staining procedures are permitted with good results.
Disadvantages:
1. Overheated paraffin makes the specimen brittle.
2. Prolonged impregnation will cause excessive tissue shrinkage and
hardening, making the cutting of sections difficult.
3. Inadequate impregnation will promote retention of the clearing
agent. Tissues become soft and shrunken, and tissue blocks crumble
when sectioned and break up when floated out in a water bath.
4. Tissues that are difficult to infiltrate, e.g. bones, teeth, brains and
eyes, need long immersion for proper support; otherwise, they will
crumble on sectioning. Prolonged immersion in paraffin, on the other
hand, is not advisable.
5. Paraffin processing is not recommended for fatty tissues. The
dehydrating and clearing agents used in the process dissolve and remove
fat from the tissues.
After being completely cleared, the tissue is submerged in two or more
changes of melted paraffin wax, either in a paraffin oven or in an incubator
which has been regulated at 55-60°C. The duration and number of changes
required for thorough impregnation of tissue depends on: –
Size and type of tissues: Longer time is required for thicker
tissues.
Use of vacuum imbedding: Vacuum reduces the time required
for complete impregnation.
Clearing agent employed
Common waxes have melting points of 45°C, 52°C, 56°C and 58°C. The
56°C wax is normally used for routine work. In a laboratory with temperature
ranging from 20-24°C, paraffin wax with a melting point of 54-58°C is
indicated. If the laboratory temperature is between 15-18°C, the melting point
of wax to be used should be between 50 and 54°C. Hard tissues require wax
with a higher melting point than soft tissues.
There are three ways by which paraffin wax impregnation and embedding
of tissues may be performed:
1. By manual processing
2. By automatic processing
3. By vacuum embedding
1. Manual Processing
At least four changes of wax are required at 15 minutes intervals in order
to insure complete removal of the clearing agent from the tissue. The specimen
is then immersed in another fresh solution of melted paraffin for approximately
3 hours to insure complete embedding or casting of tissue. The following is an
example of a time schedule for manual processing of tissues about 3 mm. thick:
Fixation:
10% Buffered Formalin 24 hours
Dehydration:
70% Alcohol 6 hours
95% Alcohol 12 hours
100%Alcohol 2 hours
100% Alcohol 1 hour
100%Alcohol 1 hour
Clearing:
Xylene or Toluene 1 hour Xylene or Toluene 1 hour
Impregnation:
Paraffin wax 15 minutes
Paraffin wax 15 minutes
Paraffin wax 15 minutes
Paraffin wax 15 minutes
Embedding:
Paraffin wax 3 hours
2. Automatic Processing
This method makes use of an automatic tissue processing machine (i.e.,
Autotechnicon) which fixes, dehydrates, clears and infiltrates tissues, thereby
decreasing the time and labor needed during the processing of tissues. This
results in a more rapid diagnosis with less technicality. Usually, only 2- 3
changes of wax are required to remove the clearing agent and properly
impregnate the specimen. This is made possible due to constant tissue agitation
which accelerates and improves tissue penetration giving rise to more
consistent results. One example of an automatic tissue processing machine is
the Elliott Bench-Type Processor. The machine is mounted on rollers to permit
the turning of platforms and easy access to beakers and wax baths. It makes use
of 12 individual processing steps, with ten 1-liter capacity glass beakers and
two thermostatically controlled wax baths with a safety device cut-out switch to
protect the wax against over-heating. A transfer arm controlled by electrical
current moves the tissues from one processing reagent to another (by clock
schedules). It can be removed by raising a spring-loaded plunger in the center
of the cover plate, thereby allowing the tissue to be arranged manually anytime
during the processing. Agitation of fluid is accompanied by a continuous
vertical movement or rotation of the specimen carrier by a mechanism
connected to the transfer arm. An electrical clock connected to a metal disc
notched in positions of 15 minutes or more, serves to control the time needed
for each processing step. The clock rotates and sets the transfer arm and
mechanism into motion, moving the tissue to the next position. A delay
mechanism is provided in instances where processing time may exceed 24
hours.
REAGENT PROCESSING TIME
The process by which processed tissue, most commonly a paraffin
embedded tissue, is trimmed and cut into uniformly thin slices or "sections" to
facilitate studies under the microscope is known as Microtomy. The basic
instrument used is a microtome that is capable of cutting a section at a
predetermined thickness by sliding the block into a cutting tool, usually a steel
knife, glass or diamond blade, which is fixed and attached to the machine. The
microtome consists of three essential parts, namely: 1. Block Holder - where the
tissue is held in position.
2. Knife Carrier and Knife - for actual cutting of tissue sections.
3. Pawl, Ratchet Feed Wheel and Adjustment Screws - to line up the
tissue block in proper position with the knife, adjusting the proper
thickness of the tissue for successive sections.
Whatever the type of microtome is used, the principle remains essentially
the same, that is, a spring-balanced teeth or pawl is brought into contact with,
and turns a ratchet feed wheel connected to a micrometer screw, which is in turn
rotated, moving the tissue block at a predetermined distance towards the knife
for cutting sections at uniform thickness.
There are five (5) kinds of microtomes:
1. Rocking microtome – for cutting serial sections of large blocks of
paraffin embedded tissues.
2. Rotary microtome - for cutting paraffin embedded sections.
3. Sliding microtome - for cutting celloidin embedded sections.
4. Freezing microtome -for cutting unembedded frozen sections.
5. Cryostat or cold microtome – for cutting frozen sections
6. Ultrathin microtome - for cutting sections for Electron Microscopy.
1. Rocking (Cambridge) Microtome
This was invented by Paldwell Trefall in 1881, the simplest among the
different types of microtomes. This consists of a heavy base and two arms the
lower arm resting on pivots and a supporting column, and attached to the
micrometer screw, at the base of which is found the ratchet wheel with feed
mechanism. The upper arm, carrying the block holder on one end by means of a
screw, is connected to a lever by a piece of nylon thread.
Sectioning is a process whereby tissues are cut into uniformly thin slices or
"sections" with the aid of a microtome, to facilitate the studies under the
microscope. Three general types of tissue sections may be made: 1. PARAFFIN
SECTIONS - for paraffin embedded tissue blocks which may be cut by rocking
and rotary microtome.
2. CELLOIDIN SECTIONS - for celloidin embedded tissues which
are usually cut by means of the sliding microtome.
3. FROZEN SECTIONS - which may be cut from tissues that have
been fixed and frozen with CO2 or for fresh or fixed tissues frozen
with the cryostat.
PARAFFIN SECTIONS
Once the tissues have been embedded and the wax has solidified, the
wax block is removed from the mold, the identification number is noted and
the excess wax is cut off from the block to expose the tissue surface in
preparation for actual cutting. This procedure is known as TRIMMING. Only
thin slices are taken out at a time to prevent the block from cracking.
The sides, top and bottom of the tissue block are trimmed until perfectly
level and all sides are parallel, almost to the edge of the tissue. An old knife or
blade may be used for this procedure, but it must still be relatively sharp to avoid
damage to the tissue. When using the coarse feed, avoid cutting unintentional
thick sections as this will damage the knife and possibly the block face.
Depending upon the size and orientation of the tissue sample, shave
conservatively into the block surface taking appropriate cuts that may measure
between 4-60 micrometers. Samples of small biopsy tissue may be trimmed only
to the depth of the first representation of several levels that will be collected.
Since tissue is completely surrounded by paraffin, it is useful to uncover the
surface of the block to reveal the tissue. Coarse facing is done on the microtome
at approximately 30 microns at a time until the entire tissue surface is exposed.
Care should be taken to avoid removing too much tissue in this step. Tissue that
was embedded improperly may not reveal the entire tissue surface and will have
to be re-embedded. Since tissue is completely surrounded by paraffin, it is useful
to uncover the surface of the block to reveal the tissue. Coarse facing is done on
the microtome at approximately 30 microns at a time until the entire tissue
surface is exposed. Care should be taken to avoid removing too much tissue in
this step. Tissue that was embedded improperly may not reveal the entire tissue
surface and will have to be re-embedded.
After coarse trimming, a heated spatula is held between the tissue block
and the block holder until the wax begins to melt. The spatula is then withdrawn
and the block is gently pressed into position. The block is allowed to harden for
cutting proper by facing them down in ice cold water or refrigerator for 5-10
minutes. Placing blocks in a freezer can cause surface cracking, where the friable
tissue separates from the surrounding wax cohesive sections become difficult to
obtain. Cooling both the tissue and the wax will give them a similar consistency,
and make sectioning easier. Re-chilling of the block may be required if the block
face becomes warm or if deeper levels are required. The block is then placed in
the microtome for fine trimming and cutting.
Fine trimming may be done by either setting the thickness adjuster at 15
mm or by advancing the block using the coarse feed mechanism. The knife is
usually tilted at 0-1 5° angulation on a microtome to allow a clearance angle
between the cutting facet and the tissue block. Biconcave knives require smaller
clearance angles than wedge-shaped knives.
Fig. 13-4. Section detached from the slide due to faulty processing
PROBLEM REASON REMEDY
Surfaces and edges
of the block are not Re-trim the block
parallel
Horizontal surface
Re-adjust and re-
of the block is not
orient the block
parallel to the knife
Coat horizontal
Sections fail to form Paraffin wax is too edges of the block
ribbons hard with wax of lower
melting point
Knife is tilted too
Reduce the tilt
much
Readjust the
Sections are too
thickness of the
thick
sections
Knife is dull Hone and strop
Sections roll up on Knife is blunt Sharpen the knife
cutting so that they Tilt of knife is too
Reduce the tilt
adhere and get broken great
against the knife edge Knife edge is dirty Clean the knife edge
Adjust the knife so
Blunt or dull spot
that knife edge will
on the knife,
present a uniformly
producing an
sharp edge to the
irregular knife edge
Ribbon is curved, block, or sharpen
crooked or uneven Edges of the block
instead of straight are not parallel but
Re-trim the block
round or wedge
shaped
Knife is not parallel Readjust the knife
to the block and block
Knife is blunt or
Re-sharpen the knife
dull
Paraffin block is Cool the block on
warm and soft ice water until firm
Knife edge is coated
Sections are Clean the knife edge
with paraffin
compressed, wrinkled
or jammed Readjust thickness
Sections are too thin
of the section
Microtome set
Tighten the screw
screw is loose
Tilt of knife is too
Reduce the tilt
vertical
Sections are squashed Re-sharpen, using a
Bevel of knife is
(width of each section knife back or
lost due to incorrect
is less than that of the automatic knife
sharpening
block) sharpener
Bubble or dirt Re-embed in freshly
formed in the filtered wax if
embedding medium necessary
Tissue is not
processed properly
and will not form a Re-process tissue
section (especially if
center is raw)
A hole is formed in Under-processed
the section portion of tissue
Re-process tissue
bursts on contact
with warm water
Once embedded in
paraffin wax,
decalcification is
Hard spot in tissue
impractical; use a
due to calcium
base-sledge
microtome with a
wedge knife
Tilt of knife is too
great or bevel is not
cleared, hence
Reduce the tilt
object is
compressed against
Sections of unequal the knife edge
thickness are Clamp set screw on
produced knife or block Tighten the screw
holder is loose
Cut blocks into
Blocks are too large
smaller fragments
Soften the blocks in
Blocks are too hard
detergent or phenol
Breathe out or blow
gently on the bock
Static electricity due and knife to break up
to low atmospheric static electricity, or
Sections adhere to the humidity boil water in the
knife or other parts of room to increase
the microtome humidity
Knife edge is dirty Clean the knife edge
Knife edge is dull Sharpen the knife
Knife tilt is too
Reduce the tilt
great
Nicks or damage on
Sharpen the knife
the knife edge
Ribbon is split or Re-embed in freshly
Dirty embedding
lengthwise vertical filtered wax
scratches are seen on Clean knife edge
sections Knife edge is dirty
with xylene
Tilt of knife is too
Reduce the tilt
great
Knife tilt is too
Reduce the tilt
great
Sections are lifted
Knife is dull Sharpen the knife
from the knife on
upstrokes Paraffin is too soft
Cool paraffin wax in
or room temperature
ice water
is warm
Tilt of knife is too
small, paraffin
Resistance is felt on block is therefore
the lower part of the compressed against Increase the tilt
section during cutting the base of the knife
towards the end of
stroke
Knife edge vibrates Treat with phenol
Horizontal or parallel due to hardness of during processing or
lines or furrows across tissue collodionize
the section
("chatters") are seen Tilt of knife is too
Reduce the tilt
great
Knife is blunt Sharpen the knife
Adjust the knife so
that knife edge will
Knife is not
present a uniformly
clamped properly
sharp edge to the
Section cut is block, or sharpen
sometimes thin, Knife or block Tighten adjusting
sometimes thick holder is loose and locking screws
Knife tilt is too
small that block is
compressed by Increase the tilt
bevel and section is
not cut
Tilt of knife is too
Readjust the tilt
Knife makes a hard slanted or too big
metallic scraping or Take fresh block
ringing sound on Tissue is too hard treated with phenol
backstroke, when during processing
section is cut Knife blade is too
Change the knife
thin
Frozen tissue
crumbles and comes Freezing is not Refreeze the tissue
off the block holder adequate block
when cut
Frozen tissue chips
Tissue is frozen too Warm the tissue with
into fragments when
much the fingers
cut
Top and bottom
edges of block are
Adjust the block
not parallel to edge
holder to make the
Ribbons are crooked of blade/sides of
block edges parallel
block are not
to the knife
perpendicular to the
blade
Wrong micrometer Microtome needs
Sections are too thick
setting recalibration
Block is trimmed
down nearest to the
tissue. Remaining
wax is melted on
Clearing agent not
On trimming, tissue embedding oven and
completely removed
smells of clearing paraffin
due to insufficient
agent impregnation is
impregnation
repeated, changing
the paraffin at least
once before
embedding
Repeat clearing; if
Tissue is opaque, object has already
section cutting is been embedded,
Insufficient clearing
difficult due to prolong clearing up
presence of alcohol to 12 hours, then re-
embed
Insufficient
Tissue shrinks away dehydration,
Repeat the whole
from wax when therefore
procedure
trimmed incomplete clearing
and impregnation
On trimming, wax Contaminated wax Re-embed in freshly
appears crystalline filtered wax
Block not cooled Re-embed in freshly
rapidly enough filtered wax
Paraffin block, after Repeat paraffin
cooling, is moist and Insufficient paraffin impregnation, then
crumbles re-embed
CELLOIDIN EMBEDDING
Celloidin embedding is a slow process, usually taking weeks, and does not
produce sections as thin as those produced by paraffin embedding. The
advantage of celloidin embedding is that it completely avoids the use of heat at
any stage. As a consequence, heat produced artifacts are avoided. In particular,
shrinkage is absolutely minimal, if there is any, and structural relationships of
the various types of tissue components can be seen clearly.
The disadvantages are the longer time to cut, the thickness of the sections,
the necessity for staining to be done on free floating section, the inconvenience
of having to store the blocks in sealed jars with tight lids to prevent complete
evaporation of 70% ethanol, the resulting restrictions on the type of staining
methods that may be used.
Celloidin may be purchased either as a solution or as a solid, damped with a
liquid (usually ethanol) to reduce flammability. The stock purchased as a
solution may be in an undesirable solvent and it is often the practice to evaporate
the solvent to obtain dry celloidin, which is then weighed and re-dissolved in the
appropriate solvent. Celloidin is used in form of solution, usually in a 1:1
mixture of ethanol-ether at concentrations of 2%, 4% and 8%. The fastest way to
dissolve celloidin is to soak it first in half the final volume of anhydrous ethanol
to soften it (50 mL for each 8 grams celloidin) with intermittent mixing in a
tightly stoppered container. The next day, an equal volume of diethyl ether is
added and intermittently mixed until an evenly consistent solution is obtained.
The 2% and 4% solutions may then be made by simple dilution of the 8%
solution with an equal parts mixture of ethanol and diethyl ether.
The evaporation to dryness is done slowly at room temperature, without
additional heat and in an explosion safe environment as a fire safety precaution.
The solution should be transparent, without undissolved material, and should be
stored in a completely closed container which is ether resistant. For delicate
tissues, gradual dehydration with several changes of alcohol is strongly
recommended to avoid distortion from removing the water too fast. No clearing
agent is used with celloidin and following dehydration with absolute ethanol, the
tissue may be placed in ethanol-ether. Ether is a lipid solvent and will remove
much of the fat from the tissue. Denser tissues take a longer to infiltrate it must
be left to infiltrate.
When infiltration is complete, the block has to be cast and hardened. Paper
boats have the advantage in that they may be cut off if the paper does not peel
away easily. Some thick celloidin is poured into the bottom of a boat, then the
tissue is oriented, and more celloidin poured in to cover the tissue. After filling
the boat with thick celloidin, it is placed under a bell jar with a base that ensures
air is excluded. Each day the top of the jar is lifted a little for a few minutes so
that evaporated ethanol-ether can escape. More solvent will evaporate from the
block each day, evaporating the solvent off slowly and ensuring that the celloidin
thickens and hardens evenly throughout the tissue. Evaporating it too fast will
result in the outside of the block becoming hard while the inside is still soft.
The slow method of hardening the block allows the increasing concentration
of celloidin to get into the block and give additional support to the tissue. The
embedding process takes time and is complete when the block is sufficiently
hard, often judged by pressing it with a finger nail without leaving an
impression. Hardening of the celloidin block may be hastened by placing a small
open container of chloroform under the bell jar. The chloroform will saturate the
atmosphere and harden the celloidin without further evaporation.
As the block hardens the celloidin will shrink. If at any time the celloidin
shrinks enough to expose the tissue, more celloidin should be poured in to cover
it. At the end of the hardening process there should be sufficient celloidin to
allow for trimming the back of the block flat so that it may act as a base for
glueing the block to a wooden holder for sectioning. Once hardened, the block is
removed from the paper boat, preferably by peeling, but it can be cut away with
a sharp blade if necessary.
The block is then trimmed, leaving about 3 -5 mm of celloidin all around the
tissue, then a distinctive cut is made on one corner for orientation. The back is
trimmed flat and the block is placed into 70% ethanol until ready to be
sectioned. The blocks are trimmed in the same manner as in paraffin blocks, but
they do not require hardening by chilling before cutting.
Tissues embedded in celloidin are usually sectioned with a sliding
microtome, where the block is mounted to a holding platform facing upwards
and some thick celloidin is placed onto the holder, positioning the block so that it
will meet the knife as wanted, and the assembly is left until the attachment is
firm. The knife is held at a significant slant so that most of the blade edge is used
during the cutting stroke, and is quite long, often in excess of 25 cm. The face of
the block is lubricated with 70% ethanol and the knife drawn across the top of
the block at a strong slant, shaving off a section, which is immediately removed
and placed in 70% ethanol. The surface of the block is then re-lubricated for the
next cutting stroke.
To avoid dehydration and shrinkage, section cutting is usually done wet,
which means that the block is lubricated with a fluid, usually 60-70% ethanol,
and is not allowed to dry out. This makes section cutting somewhat messy and
quite a bit slower than the dry sectioning used with paraffin. Celloidin sections
do not come off in ribbons and tend to roll up during cutting, and moistening
the block and section with alcohol by means of a camel hair brush will serve to
flatten the sections on the knife.
After cutting the sections, they are immediately collected into 70% alcohol
instead of being mounted on to glass slides. They are then stored in the same
solution in jars with tightly fitting lids, and finally mounted on to slides after
they have been stained. They are usually stained free floating and put on slides
at the same time as the coverslip is applied. This makes it difficult to prepare
serial sections as each section must be stored in individual, appropriately
numbered containers. Small batches of 5 or more sections may be prepared,
stored in the same alcohol that was used for lubrication, and never be allowed
to become dry.
REFERENCES
Baker FJ. (1962) Progress in Medical Laboratory Technology, Vol. 1, Butterworths, London.
Bancroft JD. (1975) Histochemical Technique. 2nd Ed. Butterworths, London.
Bancroft JD, Cook HC. (1994) Manual of Histological Techniques and their Diagnostic Application.
Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.
Brown RW. (2009) Histologic Preparations: Common Problems and their Solutions. Northfield, IL:
College of American Pathologists.
Carson FL, Hladik C. (2009) Histotechnology: a self-instructional text. 3rd edition. Chicago: ASCP
press.
Culling CFA, Allison RT, Barr WT. (1985) Cellular Pathology Technique. 4th ed. London:
Butterworths.
Drury RAB, Wallington EA. (1967) Carleton's Histological Technique, 4th ed. Oxford University
Press., New York.
Fischer AH, Jacobson KA, Rose J, Zeller R. (2008) Cutting sections of paraffin-embedded tissues. Cold
Spring Harbor Protocol.
John DB, Anderson G. (2002) Theory and Practice of Histological Techniques.5th ed. Chapt 6. Tissue
Processing and Microtomy including Frozen: Elsevier Churchill Livingstone, Edinburg; p. 85-108.
Leica Microsystems. (2008) Instruction Manual Leica RM2235 V1.3 Nussloch: Leica Microsystems.
Levinson SA, Macfate RP. (1969) Clinical Laboratory Diagnosis, 7th Ed., Lea and Febiger,
Philadelphia.
Lillie RD. (1965) Histopathologic Technique and Practical Histochemistry, 3rd Ed., Blakiston Division,
McGraw-Hill, New York, Toronto, Sydney, London.
Lillie RD, Fullmer HM. (1976) Histopathologic Technic and Practical Histochemistry. 4th ed. New
York: McGraw hill.
Lynch MJ, Raphael SS, Mellor LD, Spare PO, Inwood MJ. (1969) Medical Laboratory Technology and
Clinical Pathology, 2nd Ed., W.B. Saunders Company, Philadelphia, London, Toronto.
Mailhiot MA. (2005) Microtomy, It’s All About Technique! National Society of Histotechnology.
Rolls G. (2008) 101 Steps to Better Histology. Melbourne: Leica Microsystems.
Sheehan DC, Hrapchak BB. (1980) Theory and Practice of Histotechnology. 2nd ed. St Louis, MO:
Mosby.
Suvarna SK, Layton C, Bancroft JD. (2012) Bancroft’s Theory and Practice of Histological Techniques.
7th ed. Churchill Livingston, Elsevier.
CHAPTER 14
ELECTRON MICROSCOPY
The electron microscope is a type of microscope that uses a beam of
electrons to create an image of the specimen. It is capable of much higher
magnifications and has a greater resolving power than a light microscope,
allowing it to see much smaller objects in finer detail. All electron microscopes
use electromagnetic and/or electrostatic lenses to control the path of electrons.
Glass lenses, used in light microscopes, have no effect on the electron beam.
Principle of Electron Microscopy
The basic design of an electromagnetic lens is a solenoid (a coil of wire around
the outside of a tube) through which one can pass a current, thereby inducing an
electromagnetic field. The electron beam passes through the center of such
solenoids on its way down the column of the electron microscope towards the
sample. Electron beams are used in electron microscope to illuminate the
specimen and thus create an image. Since the wavelength of electrons are
100,000 times shorter than visible light the electron microscopes have much
greater resolving power. Light microscopes show limited resolution compared to
electron microscopes. Light microscopes have a resolution of 200nm and can
magnify up to 2,000 x. Electron microscopes can achieve a resolution of 0.2nm
and magnifications up to 2,000,000 x. Electron microscopes use a beam of
electrons to illuminate the specimen instead of light as in light microscopy. The
electron microscopes are of the following types: • Transmission electron
microscope
• Scanning electron microscope
• Scanning tunneling electron microscope
TRANSMISSION ELECTRON MICROSCOPE
In transmission electron microscope (TEM), the source of illumination is a
high voltage beam of electrons of very short wavelength, emitted from a
tungsten filament at the top of a cylindrical column. The electron beam that has
been partially transmitted through the very thin (and so semitransparent for
electrons) specimen carries information about the structure of the specimen. The
spatial variation in this information (the "image") is then magnified by a series of
magnetic lenses until it is recorded by hitting a fluorescent screen, photographic
plate, or light sensitive sensor such as a CCD (charge-coupled device) camera.
The whole optical system of the microscope is enclosed in vacuum. Air
must be evacuated from the column to create a vacuum so that the collision of
electrons with air molecules and hence the scattering of electrons are avoided.
Along the column, at specific intervals magnetic coils are placed. Just as the
light is focused by the glass lenses in a light microscope, these magnetic coils in
the electron microscope focus the electron beam. The magnetic coils placed at
specific intervals in the column acts as an electromagnetic condenser lens
system. The specimen is stained with an electron dense material and is placed in
the vacuum.
In transmission electron microscopy (TEM), electrons are transmitted
through a plastic-embedded specimen, and an image is formed. TEM enables the
resolution and visualization of detail not apparent via light microscopy, even
when combined with immunohistochemical analysis. TEM is used to study the
morphology of cells and their organelles, and in the identification and
characterization of viruses, bacteria, protozoa and fungi.
There are a number of drawbacks to the TEM technique. Many materials
require extensive sample preparation to produce a sample thin enough to be
electron transparent, which makes TEM analysis a relatively time consuming
process with a low throughput of samples. The structure of the sample may also
be changed during the preparation process. The field of view is relatively small,
raising the possibility that the region analyzed may not represent the whole
sample. There is potential that the sample may be damaged by the electron
beam, particularly in the case of biological materials. For all practical purposes,
living tissues or cells cannot be viewed under the TEM since the specimens are
subjected to such high vacuum, heat and intense radiation from the electron
beam. This would suffice to kill the cells either by volatilization of water (and
other low melting point substances), denaturation from heat, or by ionizing
radiation.
There are four parts for a transmission electron microscope:
• Electron source
• Electromagnetic lens system
• Sample holder
• Imaging system
The electron source is an electron gun which consists of a tungsten filament.
This filament emits electrons when it is heated. The beam of electrons are then
focused on the specimen by the condenser which consists of electromagnets
called magnetic lenses. The sample holder consists of a mechanical arm which
holds the specimen. The imaging system also consists of electromagnetic lens
system and a screen which has a phosphorescent plate. The plate glows when hit
by the electrons after passing through the specimen.
PROCESSING OF TISSUE FOR ELECTRON MICROSCOPY
FIXATION - This is done to preserve the sample and to prevent further
deterioration so that it appears as close as possible to the living state, although it
is dead now. It stabilizes the cell structure. There is minimum alteration to cell
morphology and volume. Glutaraldehyde is often used as the fixative in TEM.
Fixation is the first and most important step in any EM study, since mistakes
made at this point render the whole project useless.
The main purpose of fixation is to cross-link cellular structures into a matrix in
order to preserve the structure of the cells with no changes in morphology,
volume, or spatial relationships, and with minimum loss of cellular constituents.
It also serves to protect and stabilize cellular structures from changes during
subsequent treatments and from irradiation by the electron beam.
Primary fixation
• Fix specimen with 2.5% glutaraldehyde in 100 mM phosphate buffer at
pH 7.0 2-24 hours (2-3 preferred) is usually started at room (or
physiological) temperature and after 15-30 min then continued at 4°C.
(Fixation at 4°C slows down autolytic processes and reduces tissue
shrinkage). The time of fixation is dependent upon the dimensions of the
sample to be fixed. The largest recommended size is 1 mm3, when there
is optimal penetration.
• Wash in 200 mM phosphate buffer that has been adjusted to the
osmolarity of the sample to prevent tissue damage
Glutaraldehyde, a di-aldehyde, preserves the tissue’s ultrastructure well but
penetrates slower than the monoaldehyde, paraformaldehyde. Glutaraldehyde is
used alone for small pieces of material, but a mixture of the two aldehydes may
be used to fix larger tissues. Glutaraldehyde is fairly stable in concentrated form
and at cold temperatures (-20°C). At room temperature and especially when
diluted to working strength (1-3%), it is unstable and impurities and polymers
accumulate.
Paraformaldehyde is a monoaldehyde and penetrates faster than
glutaraldehyde, but results in poorer ultrastructure. A solution is to use a mixture
of both aldehydes as in perfusion fixation.
RINSING - It is necessary to wash or rinse the specimen following primary
aldehyde fixation and before post-fixation with osmium tetroxide. This step
removes traces of aldehyde that would contaminate the tissue, forming a
precipitate between the aldehyde and osmium during the secondary fixation step.
The samples should be washed with a buffer to maintain the pH after fixation.
For this purpose, sodium cacodylate buffer is often used which has an effective
buffering range of 5.1-7.4. The sodium cacodylate buffer thus prevents excess
acidity which may result from tissue fixation during microscopy. The type of
buffer in which the fixatives are made up can affect the appearance of the
specimen.
Veronal buffers (containing barbitals) should not be used with aldehyde
fixatives, and phosphate buffering may form a precipitate in the presence of
calcium and uranyl ions. If the specimen is known to contain these ions, use a
different buffer (e.g., Tris, HEPES, cacodylate). One advantage of cacodylate
and HEPES buffer is that CaCl2 and/or MgCl2 can be added to the primary
fixative. Calcium (and Mg) ions reduce the extraction of cellular components
and enhance the retention of phospholipids. Also, the use of phosphate buffers
with the glutaraldehyde fixative occasionally causes a precipitin to form during
the second fixation step with osmium tetroxide. To prevent this, wash the
specimen with saline or water after the first fixation so as to remove all traces of
the phosphate. This problem rarely arises however and its cause is not
understood.
POST-FIXATION (SECONDARY FIXATION) with osmium tetroxide
(OsO4) increases the stability and contrast of fine structure. OsO4 helps in the
stabilization of many proteins by transforming them into gels without destroying
the structural features. Tissue proteins stabilized by OsO4 are not coagulated by
alcohols during dehydration. Osmium tetroxide reacts with unsaturated lipids, is
electron-dense, and stains phospholipids of the cell membrane.
The tissue is post-fixed with 1% osmium tetroxide in 100 mM phosphate
buffer for 1-2 hours at 4°C, and then washed at least 5 times in distilled water to
remove all excess phosphate ions and prevent uranyl acetate from being
precipitated. This step is followed by dehydration through an ascending
concentration series of solvent before embedding in resin
DEHYDRATION - The water content in the tissue sample should be replaced
with an organic solvent since the epoxy resin used in infiltration and embedding
step are not miscible with water The tissue is dehydrated through a series of
ethanols or acetones and propylene oxide. Acetone is preferred as there is less
lipid loss than with ethanol dehydration. Maximum dehydration times are given
below.
• 30% Acetone or Ethanol 10 min.
• 50% Acetone or Ethanol 20 min.
• 70% Acetone or Ethanol 20 min.
• 90% Acetone or Ethanol 20 min.
• 100% Acetone, 3 × 20 min.
• 100% Acetone 20 min.
Propylene oxide is commonly used in the preparation of biological samples
for electron microscopy, to remove residual ethanol previously used for
dehydration. In a typical procedure, the sample is first immersed in a mixture of
equal volumes of ethanol and propylene oxide for 5 minutes, and then four times
in pure oxide, 10 minutes each. Since propylene oxide is much more volatile
than ethanol or acetone, be careful not to allow the sample to be exposed to the
air as damage will occur due to the rapid evaporation of the solvent. The samples
can be fixed and dehydrated using ethanol as described above. However, after
fully dehydrating the samples, the cells can be released from the plastic using
propylene oxide. By gently pipetting propylene oxide over the cells, they will
detach from the plastic either as individual cells or in ribbons. The detached cells
should be pelleted and washed several times with propylene oxide to remove and
solubilize the plastic before embedding.
INFILTRATION - Epoxy resin is used to infiltrate the cells. It penetrates the
cells and fills the space to give hard plastic material which will tolerate the
pressure of cutting. The epoxy resin used for the 50:50 mixture can be from the
frozen resin stock. There are several epoxy resins to choose from that have
different viscosities. The less viscous epoxy resins (e.g., Spurr resin) have a
carcinogenic component and are useful for hard material like bone but should be
used and disposed of with care. Since most plastics dissolve in acetone and
propylene oxide, the samples must be dehydrated using ethanol and a series of
resin-ethanol mixes used during the infiltration process (instead of the more
usual resin-propylene oxide mixes). Embedding is done using flat molds.
EMBEDDING - The purpose of the embedding medium is to provide a stable,
hard matrix throughout a tissue or cell in order that very thin sections may be
cut. Paraffin wax is not firm enough for ultrathin sections and it will melt under
the electron beam. There are many types of plastic resins available for
embedding tissue. The three principal types of resins used for embedding
ultrathin sections are the epoxy resins, polyester resins and methacrylate resins.
The most commonly used resins are the epoxides, Epon and Araldite. They have
adequate viscosity and are fairly stable under the intense electron beam. The two
key advantages of acrylic or methacrylate-based resins over epoxy-based resins
are that they are more hydrophilic and in some cases, can be polymerized at low
temperatures.
POLYMERIZATION – In this step, tissues embedded in the resin (wrapped in
aluminum foil) are allowed to set overnight at room temperature and then placed
in an oven at 60°C for 2-3 days. Specimens are placed in appropriate molds,
such as Beem capsules. Blocks may be sectioned the following morning and
polymerized further if necessary. A good test for correct polymerization is to try
and dent one of the side ridges of the tip of the capsule with a fingernail (after
removing the capsule from the mold). If there is an indentation from the
fingernail the polymerization at 60°C should continue until the capsule is hard
enough to show no indentations. To remove the capsule from the mold, carefully
cut the mold lengthwise with a razor blade and peel the cut edges from the top
(not the tip) of the capsule. The capsule can then be easily removed. If the side
facets near the tip show cracks and/or bulging, it usually indicates too rapid
polymerization.
Processing tissue for electron microscopy
• Fix tissues in a mixture of 2.5% glutaraldehyde, 2% (para)
formaldehyde in 100 mM cacodylate buffer (pH 7.0) with 2 mM
CaCl2 and 0.2% picric acid.
• After an initial 30 min fixation, cut the specimens into small (1
mm3) pieces and continue fixation in fresh fixative for 16-24 h at 4°C.
• Wash briefly with 200 mM cacodylate buffer (pH 7.0).
• Post-fix with 1% osmium tetroxide in 100 mM cacodylate buffer
(pH 7.0); 2 h at 4°C.
• Wash with excess distilled water [to remove any free cacodylate
and/or phosphate ions].
• En bloc stain with 2.0% aqueous uranyl acetate for 2 h at 4°C (in
dark).
• Dehydrate with acetone (or ethanol), propylene oxide and embed in
resin.
TRIMMING - Excess plastic surrounding the tissue must be trimmed away in a
fashion that will yield a square or rectangular sections. Trim the capsule while
viewing under the dissecting microscope using old glass knives or knives not
suitable for sectioning. The capsule mold must be trimmed to a pyramid where
the pyramid tip and sides are exposed tissue. The angle of the pyramid sides
(called facets) should be about 45°. Too steep of an angle will not allow enough
lateral support when sectioning while too flat (or low) of an angle will cause the
"face" being sectioned to enlarge too quickly during sectioning. Use smooth
slicing (not chiseling) strokes that cut through the plastic in one stroke. Take
very thin slices so as to leave a smooth side surface (important for good
sectioning).
Staining is the process whereby tissue components are made visible in
microscopic sections by direct interaction with a dye or staining solution. A colored
compound is used to produce a contrast between different tissues and cellular
components based on their varying affinities for most dyes and stains, so
morphologic changes are more easily identified, physical characteristics and
structural relationships of tissues and their cells can be evaluated, and the presence
or absence of disease can be established.
Most cells are colorless and transparent, and therefore histological sections
have to be stained in some way to make the cells visible. The same is true of
components of the extracellular matrix. Because different parts of the cell are
biochemically different, they take up specific stains to varying degrees. The
main reason why cells are stained is to enhance contrast and visualization of the
cell or certain cellular components under a microscope. Cells may be stained to
highlight metabolic processes, to differentiate between live and dead cells in a
specimen, to demonstrate the relationship between internal and external
structures of the cells, and to identify different types of cells.
A histologic stain is the purified form of a coloring agent or crude dye that is
generally applied in an aqueous solution. The actual staining process may
involve immersing the sample (before or after fixation and mounting) in dye
solution. Certain parts of cells and tissues that are acidic in character (e.g.
nucleus) have greater affinity for basic dyes, while basic constituents (e.g.
cytoplasm) take more of the acid stains. Individual variation of the tissue
constituents regarding these properties will consequently produce variation in
colors under the microscope. Many dyes, however, require the use of a mordant -
a chemical compound that reacts with the stain to form an insoluble, colored
precipitate on the tissue and make the staining reaction possible. When excess
dye solution is washed away, the mordanted stain remains.
It is important to remember that the colors of stains are not the real color of
a particular tissue, and that a structure that appears as one color using one stain,
may be a quite different color using another stain. The great majority of routine
histology is done with hematoxylin and eosin (H&E) staining, because it is
quick, cheap and informative. It involves the use of two contrasting stains, e.g.,
hematoxylin which stains the nuclear detail, and eosin which brings out the
cytoplasmic detail of the cell and the tissue's architecture.
STAINING OF PARAFFIN SECTIONS
Paraffin wax is poorly permeable to most staining solutions and should therefore
be removed from the section prior to staining. This is usually done by immersing
the paraffin section in a solvent (e.g. xylene) two times, at 1-2 minutes duration
each, for sections up to 10 micron thick. Xylene is not miscible with aqueous
solutions and low graded alcohol, and should therefore be subsequently removed
with absolute alcohol, followed by descending grades of alcohol to prevent
damage and detachment of sections. The alcohol is then finally replaced with
water before actual staining of section is performed. Such procedure is the exact
reverse of impregnation and may be summed up by the phrase "Sections to
Water".
After the section is cut and mounted on the slide, it is drained and dried
thoroughly to ensure that all moisture between the section and slide has
evaporated, and that the section is firmly attached to the slide. If drying is not
complete, the section (or part of it), especially from bone and nervous tissue,
may become detached from the slide during the process of staining, usually after
adding the acid differentiator.
If an alcoholic stain is to be used, there is no more need to replace the alcohol
with water. After deparaffinization with xylene, the section is transferred to
decreasing grades of alcohol, and in such instances, the term "Sections to
Alcohol" is used, and the staining procedure is subsequently done unless the
tissue has been fixed in mercuric chloride solution, in which case, the section is
taken “to water”.
After staining, the section is again dehydrated with increasing grades of alcohol
and cleared with two changes of xylene to prepare the section for mounting,
since most mountants are miscible in xylene. The second change of xylene will
also raise the refractive index of the glass slide, thereby reducing light refraction
during microscopic examination. The stained section may be left in xylene for an
indefinite period of time until it is finally mounted on the slide. The section
should not be allowed to stay in alcohol for a Jong time because many stains are
usually removed by prolonged immersion in alcohol.
Sections may float off the slide during staining if the slides are dirty or greasy, or
if the sections have not been left in the paraffin oven long enough to dry and be
fixed in the slide. Sections must be left in the oven for a minimum of 30 minutes
before they are finally stained to avoid such problems.
HISTOLOGICAL STAINING
Histological staining is the process whereby the tissue constituents and
general relationship between cell and tissue are demonstrated in sections by
direct interaction with a dye or staining solution, producing coloration of the
active tissue component. Micro-anatomic stains, bacterial stains and specific
tissue stains (e.g. muscles, connective tissue and neurologic stains) fall into this
category. Histologists have developed many stains which are suited to particular
purposes, allowing cell structures to be differentiated. It is important to
remember that the colors of stains are not the real color of a particular tissue, and
that a structure that appears as one color using one stain, may be a quite different
color using another stain.
METHODS OF STAINING
Direct Staining:
Direct staining is the process of giving color to the sections by using
aqueous or alcoholic dye solutions. In simple (or direct) staining only one dye is
used, which is washed away after 30–60 seconds, prior to drying and
examination. The molecules that make up basic dyes have a positive charge.
This is important because the cell wall and cytoplasm of bacterial cells have a
negative charge. The positively charged dye is attracted to the negatively
charged cells, enhancing the ability of the stain to stick to and color the cells.
Methylene blue is a classic example of a simple stain. This blue stain will color
all cells blue, making them stand out against the bright background of the light
microscope.
Indirect Staining:
Indirect staining is the process whereby the action of the dye is intensified
by adding another agent or a MORDANT which serves as a link or bridge
between the tissue and the dye, to make the staining reaction possible. By itself,
the dye may stain only weakly, if at all. The mordant combines with a dye to
form a colored "lake", which in turn combines with the tissue to form a "tissue-
mordant-dye-complex" that is rendered insoluble in ordinary aqueous and
alcoholic solvents. This allows subsequent counterstaining and dehydration to be
carried out easily. It is an integral part of the staining reaction itself, without
which no staining could possibly occur. A mordant may be applied to the tissue
before the stain, or it may be included as part of the staining technique, or it may
be added to the dye solution itself. Examples of mordants are potassium alum
with hematoxylin in Ehrlich's hematoxylin, and iron in Weigert's hematoxylin.
Fig. 16-1. Mordant and Accentuator
An ACCENTUATOR, on the other hand, is not essential to the chemical
union of the tissue and the dye. It does not participate in the staining reaction,
but merely accelerates the reaction. Examples are potassium hydroxide in
Loeffler's methylene blue and phenol in carbol thionine and carbol fuchsin.
PROGRESSIVE STAINING
Progressive staining is the process whereby tissue elements are stained in a
definite sequence, and the staining solution is applied for specific periods of time
or until the desired intensity of coloring of the different tissue elements is
attained. Once the dye is taken up by the tissue, it is not washed or decolorized.
The differentiation or distinction of tissue detail relies solely on the selective
affinity of the dye for different cellular elements.
REGRESSIVE STAINING
With this technique, the tissue is first overstained to obliterate the cellular
details, and the excess stain is removed or decolorized from unwanted parts of
the tissue, until the desired intensity of color is obtained. Routine Hematoxylin
and Eosin (H&E) staining is the most common method utilized for
microanatomical studies of tissues, using the regressive staining which consists
of overstaining the nuclei, followed by removal of superfluous and excessive
color of the tissue constituent by acid differentiation.
DIFFERENTIATION (DECOLORIZATION) is the selective removal of
excess stain from the tissue during regressive staining in order that a specific
substance may be stained distinctly from the surrounding tissues.
A staining procedure that differentiates or distinguishes between types of
bacteria is termed as a differential staining technique. Methods for simple
staining impart same color to all bacteria and other biological material, may
cause slight variation in shade. On the other hand, differential staining methods
impart a distinctive color only to certain types of bacteria. In some techniques,
the stains are applied separately, while in other they are applied as a combined
stain.
Differential Staining uses more than one chemical stain to better
differentiate between various microorganisms or structures/cellular components
of a single organism. This is usually done by washing the section in simple
solution (e.g. water or alcohol), or by the use of acids and oxidizing agents. In
general, if the primary stain used is a basic dye, the differentiation is carried out
by an acid solution, while alkaline medium is used for differentiation after
applying an acidic dye. Alcohol acts as a differentiator for both basic and acidic
dyes, probably by simply dissolving out the excess dye. Differential staining is
also used to detect abnormalities in the proportion of different white blood cells
in the blood. The process or results are called a WBC differential. This test is
useful because many diseases alter the proportion of certain white blood cells.
A mordant can act as a differentiating agent. Mordants such as iron alum can
also oxidize hematoxylin to a soluble, colorless compound, so that the tissue
component becomes decolorized. On the other hand, if a section that has been
stained by a mordant dye is allowed to remain in a differentiating agent such as 1
to 2% alcohol, all the dye will be removed. This is actually done as a preliminary
step in re-staining a faded slide. Differentiation is usually controlled by
following exact times specified for staining, or by examination under the
microscope.
One commonly recognizable use of differential staining is the Gram stain.
Gram staining uses two dyes: Crystal violet and Fuchsin or Safranin (the
counterstain) to differentiate between Gram-positive bacteria (large
Peptidoglycan layer on outer surface of cell) and Gram-negative bacteria.
METACHROMATIC STAINING
Most dyes stain tissues orthochromatically, i.e., in color shades that are
similar to the color of the dye itself. Metachromatic staining technique entails
the use of specific dyes which differentiate particular substances by staining
them with a color that is different from that of the stain itself (metachromasia).
Tissue components combine with these dyes to form a different color from the
surrounding tissue. This is particularly employed for staining cartilage,
connective tissues, epithelial mucins, mast cell granules, and amyloid.
At its simplest, the actual staining process may involve immersing the
sample (before or after fixation and mounting) in dye solution, followed by
rinsing and observation. Many dyes, however, require the use of a mordant: a
chemical compound that reacts with the stain to form an insoluble, colored
precipitate. When excess dye solution is washed away, the mordanted stain
remains. Although methyl violets, of which crystal violet is one, do give
metachromatic staining, they are not considered to be the most effective for the
purpose. The azures or toluidine blue are more effective usually. The exception
is for amyloid, when significant metachromasia is given by amyloid deposits
using crystal or methyl violets.
METALLIC IMPREGNATION
Metallic Impregnation is a process where specific tissue elements are
demonstrated, not by stains, but by colorless solutions of metallic salts which are
thereby reduced by the tissue, producing an opaque, usually black deposit on the
surface of the tissue or bacteria. Specific tissue elements are demonstrated, not
by stains, but by colorless solutions of metallic salts which are thereby reduced
by the tissue, producing an opaque, usually black deposit on the surface of the
tissue or bacteria. Ammoniacal silver, for example, is reduced by argentaffin
cells (e.g. in melanin and intestinal glands), forming black deposits seen under
the microscope.
A metallic impregnating agent is different from a stain in that it is not
absorbed by the tissue, but is held physically on the surface as a precipitate or as
a reduction product in certain tissue components. The most valuable metals for
this purpose are gold (gold chloride) and silver (silver nitrate).
Metallic silver deposits are sometimes adventitiously formed in sections;
hence, all reagents to be used should be chemically pure, glassware should be
clean and a formalin-laden atmosphere which is apt to precipitate such pigment
disposition should be avoided. Also, since ammoniacal silver solutions are
potentially explosive, care should be taken to prepare all solutions in clean
containers just before use, and silvered glassware should be avoided. Flexible
plastic containers may be used instead. Solutions should never be exposed to
sunlight if explosion is to be avoided, and all unused reagents should be
immediately inactivated by sodium chloride or dilute hydrochloric acid solution
and discarded. The use of metallic instruments should be avoided when handling
sections for metallic impregnation.
VITAL STAINING
Vital staining is the selective staining of living cell constituents,
demonstrating cytoplasmic structures by phagocytosis of the dye particle
(cytoplasmic phagocytosis), or by staining of pre-existing cellular components
(true vital staining), as in the staining of mitochondria by Janus green. Vital
stains are excluded by the living cells but taken up by the already dead cells as in
the vital staining of reticulo-endothelial system with trypan blue, or propidium
iodide for eukaryotic cells. The usual purpose is to reveal cytological details that
might otherwise not be apparent; however, staining can also reveal where certain
chemicals or specific chemical reactions are taking place within cells or tissues.
The nucleus of a living cell is resistant to vital stains, and therefore is not
demonstrated. In fact, demonstration of nuclear structures during vital staining
suggests permeability of the membrane of the dye, signifying the death of the
cell.
INTRAVITAL STAINING
Intravital staining of living cells is done by injecting the dye into any part of
the animal body (either intravenous, intraperitoneal or subcutaneous), producing
specific coloration of certain cells, particularly those of the reticulo-endothelial
system. Common dyes used are lithium, carmine and India ink.
SUPRAVITAL STAINING
Supravital staining is a method of staining used in microscopy to examine
living cells that have been removed from an organism. It differs from intravital
staining, which is done by injecting or otherwise introducing the stain into the
body. Those that enter and stain living cells are called supravital stains (e.g. New
Methylene Blue and Brilliant Cresyl Blue for reticulocyte staining). However,
these stains are eventually toxic to the organism, some more so than others.
Partly due to their toxic interaction inside a living cell, when supravital stains
enter a living cell, they might produce a characteristic pattern of staining
different from the staining of an already fixed cell (e.g. "reticulocyte" look
versus diffuse "polychromasia"). To achieve desired effects, the stains are used
in very dilute solutions ranging from 1:5,000 to 1:50,000. Note that many stains
may be used in both living and fixed cells. Thin slices of tissues are placed in
small staining dishes and enough staining solution is added to cover the tissue.
Common dyes used are:
1 Neutral red -probably the best vital dye.
2. Janus green-especially recommended for mitochondria.
3. Trypan blue -one gram of dye is dissolved in 100 ml. of sterile distilled
water to be used immediately; it is dangerous to allow the suspension to
stand for more than one hour, because it is likely to become toxic to the
cell.
4. Nile blue
5. Thionine
6. Toluidine blue
HEMATOXYLIN AND EOSIN (H & E) Staining
Hematoxylin and Eosin (H&E) staining is the corner stone of tissue-based
diagnosis. The process stains thin tissue sections so that pathologists can
visualize tissue morphology. The process uses a hematoxylin dye to stain cell
nuclei (and other parts) blue and an eosin dye to stain other structures pink or
red. Hematoxylin binds strongly to acids and consequently binds to nuclear DNA
and stains nuclei blue. Properly applied, this technique provides exceptional
detail of tissue structure and the makeup of the cells. This detail is required for
tissue-based diagnosis, particularly in the detection and classification of
infection, cancer or metabolic disease.
Routine H&E staining plays a significant role in tissue-based diagnosis by
coloring otherwise transparent tissue sections, and allowing cell structures
including the cytoplasm, nucleus, and organelles and extra-cellular components
to be clearly visible under the microscope. In a histology laboratory, all
specimens are initially stained with H&E and additional stains are only ordered
if additional information is needed to provide a more detailed analysis.
Staining with H&E is very reliable although it does show some variation
depending on the exact formulation of the stain, and the stain density is
considerably affected by the thickness of the sections – thicker sections take up
more stain. It is also generally done before any additional staining techniques,
because histology with H&E can confirm the basic tissue type and help to
localize the lesion. (The term lesion is used by pathologists to indicate any area
of damage, infection, inflammation, tumor, necrosis or otherwise abnormal
tissue.). Since most cell structures are transparent, very little detail of the
structure can be seen, unless the cells are stained. The same is true of
components of the extracellular matrix. Because different parts of the cell are
biochemically different, they take up specific stains to varying degrees.
ROUTINE H&E STAINING in Paraffin Embedded Section (Regressive
Staining)
Fixation: Most fixatives can be used except osmic acid solutions which inhibit
hematoxylin.
Procedure:
1. Clear paraffin embedded sections in first xylene bath for 3 minutes.
2. Transfer to second xylene bath for 2 to 3 minutes.
3. Immerse in first bath of absolute ethyl alcohol for 2 minutes.
4. Transfer to a bath of 95% ethyl alcohol for 1 or 2 minutes.
5. Rinse in running water for 1 minute.
6. Stain with Harris alum hematoxylin for 5 minutes (Ehrlich's
hematoxylin requires 15-30 minutes).
7. Wash in running tap water to remove excess stain.
8. Differentiate in 1% acid-alcohol (1 ml concentrated HCl to 99 ml. of
80% ethyl alcohol) for 10-30 sec. monitoring the changes in color
microscopically until only the nuclei are stained.
9. Rinse in tap water.
10. Blue in ammonia water (average of 5 minutes) or 1% aqueous
lithium carbonate until the sections appear blue (about 30 seconds).
11. Wash in running water for 5 minutes.
12. Counterstain with 5% aqueous eosin for 5 minutes. If alcoholic
eosin is used, the time can be reduced to 30 seconds or 1 minute.
13. If aqueous eosin is used, wash and differentiate in tap water under
microscope control until the nuclei appear sharp blue to blue black and
the rest of the tissue appear in shades of pink. If alcoholic solution is
used, differentiate with 70% alcohol.
14. Dehydrate, clear and mount.
NOTE:
For tissues fixed with mercuric chloride, the staining time in hematoxylin
should be increased slightly while duration of eosin staining should be reduced.
The mercury should be removed using a 0.5% solution of iodine in 80 to 95%
alcohol and rinsed in water. The iodine is then removed by placing the slide in
3% sodium thiosulfate solution for 1 to 5 minutes and washing it well in running
water for 3 to 5 minutes. Alternatively, mercury deposits may be removed after
sections are hydrated, by immersing the sections in Gram's or Lugol's iodine for
5 minutes, followed by sodium thiosulfate and subsequently washing the section
in water prior to staining.
Staining may be prolonged for chromium and osmium fixed tissues (e.g.
Flemming's fluid), for tissues subjected to long acid decalcification, and after
prolonged storage in acid formalin or 70% alcohol.
FROZEN SECTION STAINING
Frozen sections mounted on the slides may be stained as in paraffin sections
although the duration of staining is usually shorter. Sections may be mounted in
an aqueous medium directly from water if necessary. Frozen sections may be
stained by picking up sections on albuminized slides and drying them quickly or
by simple direct staining on a wet slide with an eye dropper. The following
staining methods are commonly employed for frozen sections, the choice
depending upon the personal preference of the pathologist and the type of tissue
section to be stained.
1. Hematoxylin-Eosin method
2. Thionine method
3. Polychrome Methylene Blue method
4. Alcoholic Pinacyanol method (used also for supravital staining of
mitochondria and primarily for color sensitization in photography)
H & E staining of Frozen Sections for Rapid Diagnosis (Progressive Staining)
1. Orient section in the block and freeze with liquid nitrogen.
2. Cut cryostat sections at 5-10 micron.
3. Mount sections on to albuminized slides and dip in 10% formalin to
fix.
4. Rinse rapidly in water.
5. Stain with Harris hematoxylin for 30-45 seconds.
6. Rinse in tap water.
7. Blue in ammonia water for 5 seconds.
8. Rinse in tap water.
9. Counterstain with 5% aqueous eosin or 1% alcohol eosin for one
minute.
10. Rinse in tap water.
11. Dehydrate in increasing concentrations of alcohol.
12. Clear with xylene.
13. Mount with cover slide.
It is somewhat less favored than regressive staining due to the difficulty of
producing sufficiently intense progressive staining of cell structures without
staining other parts, thereby resulting in diffused color and obscured details. For
convenience, reagents for this rapid H&E stain are generally arranged in
sequence using a series of Coplin jars. This method takes only 5-10 minutes and
produces well-differentiated sections that are semi-permanent and can be stored.
The remaining portion of tissue must be kept for routine processing and are
made for comparison with frozen sections.
Fig. 16-2. Passing slides through a series of solutions
Precautions in Staining
Stains on the skin should be avoided not only because they are signs of poor
technique but because stains are health hazards per se, being slowly absorbed by
the skin and eventually producing side effects. Stains may be effectively
removed from the skin by prompt topical application of 0.5% acid alcohol,
followed by rinsing with tap water.
Failure of staining may be due to paraffin, fixative, or decalcifying solution
that has not been thoroughly washed out and removed. Early fixation in alcohol
before paraffin embedding may have been incorrect, for which no remedy can be
made. Alternatively, the staining solution may be faulty. Hematoxylin solutions
may not have been properly and sufficiently ripened. Hematoxylin must not be
used too soon after preparation to ensure complete ripening. Impurities found in
the dye or in the water solvent will affect not only the solubility of the dye but
even the intensity of the staining reaction, necessitating purification and filtering
of the dye. Stains that have already been deteriorated should be replaced.
If, after staining, sections are fuzzy and do not appear clear under the
microscope, xylol should be replenished. There may be water in the absolute
alcohol, moisture in the coverslip, or too much egg albumin on the slide, thereby
obliterating the image of the stained tissue. And often, acid-alcohol decolorizer
may not have been completely removed, or a film from alkaline alcohol may
have been carried along. To remedy the condition, the section is placed in a
Coplin jar containing xylol to dissolve the adhesive. The slide is run back thru
the various processes up to the point where the fault was; a fresh solution is
used, and the tissue is re-stained.
Stains may be saved and used again for as long as they have not lost their
staining properties. Sections are usually rinsed with distilled water before
placing them in used stains. Formation of precipitate in staining solution and
poor staining results signify loss of staining property and hence, the stain should
be discarded and replaced with a fresh solution.
Failure of sections to remain on the slide during staining could have been
due to a dirty or oily slide. Slides may have been carried thru the first alcohol
baths too fast, resulting in a rapid but incomplete dehydration; or paraffin
sections may not have been thoroughly spread on the slide when mounted.
Albumin fixative may be too old, as suggested by the loss of its clear color, or by
emission of an odor. To avoid this, adhesives should be prepared in small
amounts (around 1 ounce) which may last for 2-3 months.
COLLODIONIZATION OF SECTIONS
Paraffin ribbons containing air bubbles, torn or inadequately infiltrated
sections are likely to float from the slide when deparaffinized and stained. They
are more firmly attached by coating the slide with dilute (thin) celloidin
solutions, a process known as collodionization, which is also recommended for
sections that will be subjected to strong alkaline or acid solutions and for tissues
that contain glycogen for demonstration.
Procedure:
1. Deparaffinize in xylene.
2. Dehydrate thru absolute alcohol.
3. Dip individual slides in Coplin jar containing dilute ether alcohol
solution.
4. Dip in dilute ether solution of celloidin (thin celloidin).
5. Hold slide on one end for 1/2 to 1 minute to drain or until the section
begins to whiten around the edges.
6. Wipe off the back of the slide and place in 80% alcohol for 3-5 minutes
to harden the celloidin.
7. Stain as desired.
Sections may be transferred from one solution to another with a bent glass
rod (as in frozen sections), but because they are thicker, they may be handled by
means of forceps instead.
Cellulose nitrate (celloidin) is soluble in absolute alcohol, and will be
removed if absolute alcohol is used in the final dehydration prior to clearing of
stained sections. Instead, sections treated with 95% alcohol may be transferred to
a mixture of equal parts of chloroform, absolute alcohol and xylene (C.A.X,)
then treated with xylene and mounted in Xam.
RE-STAINING OF OLD SECTIONS
Old, bleached or faded sections may be re-stained: the slide is usually
immersed in xylene for 24 hours, or gently heated until the mounting medium
begins to bubble. The coverslip may then be removed by lifting it with a
dissecting needle. The section is placed in xylene for up to 24 hours to remove
the remaining balsam and then brought down to water. It is placed in a 0.5
potassium permanganate solution for 5-10 minutes, rinsed in tap water and
subsequently immersed in 5% oxalic acid for 5 minutes or until the section is
decolorized. After washing it again in running tap water for another 5 minutes,
the section may then be re-stained with the appropriate staining technique.
HISTOCHEMICAL STAINING (HISTOCHEMISTRY)
Histochemical staining is the process whereby various constituents of
tissues are studied thru chemical reactions that will permit microscopic
localization of a specific tissue substance. Chemical ions such as calcium,
molecules such as bile pigments, and biopolymers such as cellulose, DNA and
specific enzymes are among the tissue components that can be identified using
histochemical staining techniques. In enzyme histochemistry, the active staining
reagent serves as a substrate upon which the enzymes act, and the final
coloration produced is from the substrate rather than the tissue. In many
instances, histochemical methods used to stain several chemical constituents will
also ultimately stain the tissue itself, thereby producing an overlapping of
techniques. The staining techniques employed for histochemistry are also usually
applied for staining of histologic structures. Examples of such type of stains are
Perl's Prussian blue reaction for hemoglobin, and Periodic Acid Schiff staining
for carbohydrates.
IMMUNOHISTOCHEMICAL (IHC) STAINING is a combination of
immunologic and histochemical techniques using a wide range of polyclonal or
monoclonal, fluorescent labeled or enzyme-labeled antibodies to detect and
demonstrate tissue antigens (e.g., proteins) and phenotypic markers under the
microscope. Immunohistochemical staining is widely used in the diagnosis of
abnormal cells such as those found in cancerous tumors, in the localization of
biomarkers and differentially expressed proteins in different parts of a biological
tissue, and in the detection of specific molecular markers that are characteristic
of particular cellular events such as proliferation or cell death (apoptosis).
Visualizing an antibody-antigen interaction can be accomplished in a
number of ways. In most cases, an antibody is conjugated to an enzyme, such as
peroxidase, that can catalyze a color-producing reaction. Alternatively, the
antibody can also be tagged with a fluorophore, such as fluorescein or
rhodamine. Immunohistochemical staining techniques are used to label defined
antigens with monoclonal and polyclonal antibodies. Commercially produced
antibodies most frequently originate from mice, and less frequently from rabbits.
The degree of autolysis or putrefaction, the selection of fixation medium,
fixation duration, incubation period, and concentration of the selected antibodies
can be crucial factors that can affect the results of immunohistochemical staining
protocols. Unlike conventional histological staining methods,
immunohistochemical techniques are based on antigen–antibody bindings, which
can be affected by inappropriate fixative selection and duration. The current
recommendation for immunohistochemical techniques is a maximum of 4%
neutral buffered formaldehyde solution and, for some antibodies, fixation time
can be up to a maximum of 48 h. Microwave-based fixation of tissue in
formaldehyde may have an adverse effect on immunohistochemical staining.
REFERENCES
Baker JR. (1958) Principles of Biological Microtechnique. London: Methuen, 89: 238.
Bancroft JD, Stevens A, editors. (1996) Theory and practice of histological techniques. 4th ed., New
York: Churchill Livingstone.
Bancroft JD, Gamble M, eds (2002) Theory and Practice of Histological Techniques. 5th ed. London:
Churchill-Livingstone.
Bettinger CH, Zimmermann HW. (1991) New investigations on hematoxylin, hematein, & hematein-
aluminium complexes. 1. Hematin-aluminium complexes and hemalum staining. Histochemistry, 96:
215.
Beveridge TJ. (2001) "Use of the Gram stain in microbiology". Biotech Histochem 76 (3): 111–8.
Black J. (2012) Microbiology: Principles and exploration. 8th ed. John Wiley & Sons. p. 68.
Carson FL. (1996) Histotechnology: a self-instructional text. 2nd ed. Chicago: American Society of
Clinical Pathologists Press.
Carson FL, Hladik C. (2009). Histotechnology: A Self-Instructional Text. 3rd ed. American Society of
Clinical Pathologists Press.
Clark G. (1981) Staining Procedures, 4th ed., Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins, p. 412.
Culling CF. (1974) Handbook of Histopathological and Histochemical Techniques. 3rd ed.,
Butterworth, London, 65.
Horobin RW. (2002) Theory of Staining and its Practical Implications. Chapt 7, In: Theory and Practice
of Histological Techniques, 2nd ed. Churchill Livingstone, London, 109.
Horobin RW, Kiernan JA. (2002) Conn's Biological Stains. A Handbook of Dyes Stains and
Fluorochromes for Use in Biology and Medicine. 10th ed. Oxford.
Junquera LC, Carneiro J. (1980) Basic histology. 3rd ed. Los Altos, CA: Lange Medical Publications.
Kiernan JA. (2008) Histological and Histochemical Methods. Theory and Practice. Bloxham, UK:
Scion.
Lee GL. (1992) Histopathologic methods and color atlas of special stains and tissue artifacts.
Gaithersburg, MD: American Histolabs Inc., Publications Division.
Lillie RD. (1965) Histopathologic Technic and Practical Histochemistry, 3rd edition, McGraw-Hill
Book Co., New York.
Lillie RD. (1969) H.J Conn's Biological Stains, 8th ed., Williams and Wilkins Co., Baltimore.
Lillie RD, Fullmer HM. (1976) Histopathologic Technic and Practical Histochemistry, 4th ed.,
McGraw-Hill Book Co., New York.
Luna LG. Manual of Histologic Staining Methods of the Armed Forces Institute of Pathology, third
edition, McGraw Hill
Lynch MJ, Raphael SS, Mellor LD, Spare PD and Inwood MJ. (1969) Medical Laboratory Technology
and Clinical Pathology, 2nd edition, WB Saunders Co., Philadelphia London Toronto
Marshall PN, Horobin RW. (1973) The mechanism of action of 'mordant' dyes - a study using
preformed metal complexes. Histochemie, 35: 361.
McManus JFA, Mowry RW. (1964) Staining Methods. Histologic and Histochemical. Harper & Row,
London.
Pearse AGE. (1980) Histochemistry, Theoretical and Applied, Vol. 2, 4th ed., Churchill Livingstone,
Edinburgh.
Pearse AGE. (1985) Histochemistry, Theoretical and Applied, Vol. 3, 4t11 ed., Churchill Livingstone,
Edinburgh.
Penney DP, Powers JM, Frank M, Churukian C. (2002) Biotech Histochem 77 (5–6): 237–275.
Reynolds JI, Moyes RB, Breakwell DP. (2009) "Differential staining of bacteria: acid fast stain".
Current Protocols in Microbiology. Appendix 3: Appendix 3H.
Ryan KJ, Ray CG. eds. (2004) Sherris Medical Microbiology (4th ed.) McGraw Hill. pp. 232–3.
Sheehan DC, Hrapchak BB. (1980) Theory and practice of histotechnology. 2nd ed. St. Louis, MO: The
C.V. Mosby Company.
Suvarna SK, Layton C, Bancroft JD. (2013) Bancroft’s Theory and Practice of Histological Techniques.
7th ed. Churchill Livingstone, Elsevier.
Wells J. (1988) A Technique for Staining the Superficial Cells of Plucked Hair Follicles and Other Solid
Tissues, Stain Technology, Vol 63, No3.
CHAPTER 17
STAINS AND STAINING SOLUTIONS
Biological stains or coloring substances are prepared from dyes which may
generally be divided into two categories:
1. Natural dyes - e.g., cochineal dyes, logwood dyes, and vegetable
extracts
2. Synthetic (artificial) dyes - e.g., aniline or coal tar dyes
NATURAL DYES
Natural dyes are those obtained from plants and animals, previously utilized
for dyeing of wool and cotton. Among the most common natural dyes available
are: 1. Hematoxylin
2. Cochineal dyes and its derivatives
3. Orcein
4. Saffron
1. HEMATOXYLIN
Hematoxylin is a natural dye derived by extraction from the core or the
heartwood of a Mexican tree known as "Hematoxylin Campechianum”. It is by
far the most valuable staining reagent used by the cytologist due to its powerful
nuclear and chromatin staining capacity, and its striking polychrome properties
which may be produced with proper differentiation. It may be used after almost
any fixative and is a permanent stain.
Hematoxylin itself is not a true basic dye. The active coloring agent is
hematin, which is formed by the oxidation of hematoxylin, a process known as
"ripening." This is usually accomplished by exposing the substance to air and
sunlight, thereby oxidizing hematoxylin (natural ripening). Such a process is
slow and takes as long as 3-4 months, but it can be accelerated by adding strong
oxidizing agents such as hydrogen peroxide, mercuric oxide, potassium
permanganate, sodium perborate or sodium iodate which converts hematoxylin
to hematin almost instantaneously by chemical oxidation (artificial ripening),
so that the staining solution is ready for use immediately after preparation. It is
essential that the oxidant be used in correct amount, since excessive oxidation
(over-ripening) leads to production of other useless compounds. Using the least
amount of oxidant will result in satisfactory staining and longer life of the stain.
Ripened hematoxylin is seldom used alone due to its inherent low affinity
for the tissue itself. It is most frequently used in combination with alum, iron,
chromium and copper salts, which act as mordants catalyzing or forming links
between the hematin stain and the tissue.
Mordants are substances that combine with the tissue and the staining
solution, forming a "bridge" that allows staining reaction to take place.
Alum hematoxylin stains are recommended for progressive staining of
tissues, and are usually counterstained with Eosin, Congo Red and Safranin.
Both the Ehrlich’s solution and the Harris’ solution contain Alum Hematoxylin.
Rapid ripening of Ehrlich’s reagent, however, is brought about by the addition
of Sodium Iodate; while Harris solution is ripened with Mercuric Chloride.
Iron hematoxylin compounds are used only for differential or regressive
staining, using Acid-Alcohol as a differentiating agent. An example of an Iron
Hematoxylin compound is Weigert’s Stain using Iron (Ferric) Chloride.
Copper hematoxylin solutions are utilized for the study of
spermatogenesis.
Hematoxylin and eosin (H&E) staining protocol is used frequently in
histology to examine thin sections of tissue. Hematoxylin stains cell nuclei
blue, while eosin stains cytoplasm, connective tissue and other extracellular
substances pink or red. Eosin is strongly absorbed by red blood cells, coloring
them bright red.
In a skillfully made H & E preparation the red blood cells are almost
orange, and collagen and cytoplasm (especially muscle) acquire different
shades of pink. When the staining is done by a machine, the subtle differences
in eosinophilia are often lost. Hematoxylin stains the cell nucleus and other
acidic structures (such as RNA-rich portions of the cytoplasm and the matrix of
hyaline cartilage) blue. In contrast, eosin stains the cytoplasm and collagen
pink.
2. COCHINEAL DYES
Cochineal dye is an old histologic dye extracted from the female cochineal
bug (Coccus Cacti), which is treated with alum to produce the dye, carmine. It
is widely used as a powerful chromatin and nuclear stain for fresh material and
smear preparations. When combined with picric acid (picrocarmine), it is
extensively used in neuropathological studies; and when combined with
aluminum chloride (Best's carmine stain), it is used for the demonstration of
glycogen.
3. ORCEIN
Orcein is a vegetable dye extracted from certain lichens which are
normally colorless, but which, when treated with ammonia and exposed to air,
produce blue or violet colors. It is a weak acid, is soluble in alkali, and is
mainly used for staining elastic fibers.
Litmus is also obtained from lichens, treated with lime and soda, and
exposed to ammonia and air. It is, however, not used as a cytological stain
because of its poor staining property. It is instead, used mainly as an indicator.
SYNTHETIC DYES
Synthetic dyes are sometimes known as "Coal Tar Dyes" since they were
originally manufactured from substances that have been taken from coal tar.
They are derived from the hydro-carbon benzene (C6H6), and are collectively
known as Aniline Dyes.
Chromophores are substances with definite atomic groupings and are
capable of producing visible colors. Simple benzene compounds which contain
such substances are known as chromogens. These are different from the dyes in
that any color that they impart to the tissue is not permanent and can, therefore,
be easily removed. Before a chromogen can properly be called a dye, it must
have the property of retaining its color in the tissue. This property is acquired
by the addition of an auxochrome, an auxiliary radical or substance which
imparts to the compound the property of electrolytic dissociation, thereby
altering the shade of the dye, enabling it to form salts with another compound,
and ultimately retaining its color.
A dye, therefore, should consist of a chromophore and an auxochrome
group attached to a hydrocarbon benzene ring. The coloring property is
attributed to the chromophore, and the dyeing property to the salt-forming
auxochrome.
Depending on where the coloring substance (chromophore) is found, dyes
may be classified into three groups:
1. Acid Dyes - where the active coloring substance is found in the acid
component, and the inactive base, e.g. acid fuchsin, is usually the sodium salt
of a sulfonate of rosaniline. One example of such a dye is picric acid, which has
the ability to form salt with an alkali.
Picric acid is outstanding in the sense that it is the only substance so far
that can fix, differentiate and stain tissue all by itself. It may be employed as a
counterstain to basic cytoplasmic stains, to acid fuchsin in Van Gieson's
connective tissue staining, or to crystal violet for the microscopic study of
fungi. It may also be used as a fixative, as a decalcifying agent, or as a tissue
softener.
Trichloracetic acid, picric acid and chromium-fixed tissues usually take in
acidic dyes more readily. Basic cell structures (collagen, eosinophilic granules
of leukocytes, etc.) have an affinity for the acid dye ions and are regarded as
acidophilic.
2. Basic Dyes - where the active coloring substance is found in a basic
component that combines with the acid radical (usually taken from sulfuric,
acetic or hydrochloric acid).
An example of a basic nuclear stain is methylene blue, which may be used
both as an indicator and as a dye. It is very widely used in microbiology for
bacterial staining.
Tissues fixed with mercuric chloride and formaldehyde usually favor
staining with basic dyes. Acidic cell structures (chromatin, mucus, cartilage
matrix etc.) have an affinity for basic dye ions and are therefore regarded as
basophilic.
3. Neutral Dyes - are formed by combining aqueous solutions of acid and
basic dyes, capable of staining cytoplasm and nucleus simultaneously and
differentially. Because they are made up of large molecular complexes, neutral
dyes are insoluble or barely soluble in water, but they are usually soluble in
alcohol. Ethyl alcohol or acetic acid-fixed tissues, on the other hand, readily
take in both basic and acidic dyes.
Examples of neutral dyes are Romanowsky dyes used in hematology,
Giemsa's stain, and Irishman's stain for leukocyte differentiation.
COMMON STAINING SOLUTIONS
HEMATOXYLIN
Hematoxylin is the staining solution most commonly used for routine
histologic studies. The mordants used to demonstrate nuclear end cytoplasmic
structures are alum and iron, forming lakes or colored complexes (dye-
mordant-tissue complexes), the color of which will depend on the salt used.
Aluminum salt lakes are usually colored blue while ferric salt lakes are colored
blue-black.
The most commonly used staining system is called H&E (Hematoxylin
and Eosin). H&E contains the two dyes hematoxylin and eosin.
Hematoxylin can be considered as a basic dye (general formula for basic
dyes is: Cl- dye). Hematoxylin is actually a dye called hematin (obtained from
the log-wood tree) used in combination with aluminum ions (Al3+). It is used
to stain acidic (or basophilic) structures a purplish blue. (Hematoxylin is not
strictly a basic dye, but it is used with a 'mordant' that makes this stain act as a
basic dye. The mordant (aluminum salts) binds to the tissue, and then
hematoxylin binds to the mordant, forming a tissue-mordant-hematoxylin
linkage).
Eosin is an acidic dye: it is negatively charged (general formula for acidic
dyes is: Na+ dye-). It stains basic (or acidophilic) structures red or pink. This is
also sometimes termed 'eosinophilic'. Thus the cytoplasm is stained pink, by
H&E staining.
Thus the nucleus is stained purple by H&E staining. This means that the
nucleus, and parts of the cytoplasm that contain RNA stain up in one color
(purple), and the rest of the cytoplasm stains up a different color (pink).
Aluminum Hematoxylin Solutions
Aluminum (alum) hematoxylin stains are recommended for progressive
staining of tissues, (i.e. staining for a predetermined time to adequately stain
the nuclei but leave the background tissue relatively unstained, to be later
counterstained with eosin, Congo red or safranin). The alum hematoxylins can
also be used for regressive staining, meaning that the section is overstained,
and then di fferentiated in acid alcohol followed by "blueing".
Aluminum salts give a blue lake, and increase the selectivity for nuclei,
especially if acid is added or is used as a differentiating agent. The two main
alum hematoxylin solutions employed are Ehrlich's hematoxylin and Harris
hematoxylin solutions. Rapid ripening of Ehrlich's reagent is brought about by
the addition of sodium iodate; while Harris solution is ripened with mercuric
chloride.
Alum or potassium aluminum sulfate, when used as the mordant, usually
dissociates in an alkaline solution, combining with -OH of water to form
insoluble aluminum hydroxide. In the presence of excess acid, aluminum
hydroxide cannot be formed, with ultimate failure of aluminum hematoxylin
dye-lake to form, due to lack of -OH ions. Hence, acid solutions of alum
hematoxylin become red. During staining, alum hematoxylin stained sections
are usually passed on to an alkaline solution (e.g. 1% hydroxide) in order to
neutralize the acid and free the OH group, to form an insoluble blue aluminum
hematin-tissue-lake. Such procedure is known as blueing.
For blueing of alum-hematoxylin -stained sections, warm (40° to 50°C) tap
water is commonly used, since it is generally sufficiently alkaline. When tap
water is not sufficiently alkali ne, or is even acid, and is unsatisfactory for
blueing hematoxylin, lithium carbonate (1% w/v in water), bicarbonate (0.2 to
0.5% w/v in tap water), and potassium or sodium acetate may be used.
Alternatively, Scott's Tap Water Substitute (T.W.S.) consisting of 33.5 gm.
NaHC04 and 20 grams MgS04, in 1000 cc of water, with thymol (to inhibit the
formation of molds), is used to accelerate blueing of thin paraffin sections.
Blueing with ammonia, lithium carbonate or Scott's Tap Water Substitute
has more rapid action (about 15, 30 and 60 seconds respectively), compared to
the 5 to 15 minutes required for warm tap water to "blue" hematoxylin.
Ammonia water, used to blue stains, may be prepared by mixing 2 cc. of strong
ammonium hydroxide with 98 cc of tap water. Ammonia (0.5 to 1% in 80%
alcohol) may be "hard" on delicate tissues and may loosen and cause sections
to fall off the slides during staining. Lithium carbonate has a tendency to form
crystalline deposits unless the slides are agitated in it and washed well
afterwards.
The use of very cold water slows down the process while warming
accelerates it. In fact, the use of very cold water (below 10°C) for blueing
sections may even produce pink artifact discolorations on the tissue.
Ehrlich's Hematoxylin
FORMULA:
Hematoxylin 2 gm
Absolute ethyl alcohol 100 ml
Aluminum potassium Sulfate 15 gm approximately
Glycerin 100 ml
Distilled water 100 ml
Glacial acetic acid 10 ml
Dissolve hematoxylin in absolute ethyl alcohol with gentle heat. Dissolve
the potassium alum in distilled water and glycerin with gentle heating and
shake (glycerin is added to slow the oxidation process and prolong the shelf life
of hematoxylin). Mix the two solutions and add glacial acetic acid. Expose to
air and sunlight for several weeks or months in a flask lightly plugged with
cotton, shaking daily. Transfer in a well-stoppered bottle and store in a warm
place.
This naturally ripening alum hematoxylin takes about 2 months to ripen,
but its staining property will last for months or years. Hematoxylin may be
partially oxidized iodate to hasten ripening by addition of 0.3 gm Sodium, but
this will also inevitably shorten the shelf life of the stain. As hematoxylin
solution becomes oxidized, the color of the solution will change from purplish
to deep red, while the pungent odor of acetic acid will be replaced by a pleasant
aroma. Glycerin acts as a stabilizer, retards evaporation of the solution, and
appears to slow down ripening, so that it may be added 4-6 weeks after the
initial preparation. Ehrlich's hematoxylin is generally used for regressive
staining, and differentiated with I % hydrochloric acid in 70% alcohol (acid-
alcohol) until the nucleus is selectively stained. Mucopolysaccharide substances
such as cartilage and cement lines of bones are also stained intensely blue. It is
suitable for tissues that have been subjected to acid decalcification, and is
especially useful for tissues that have been become acidic during prolonged
storage in formalin.
Ehrlich's hematoxylin is not an ideal stain for frozen sections. Staining
time is usually 15-40 minutes.
Harris Hematoxylin
FORMULA:
Hematoxylin 1 gm
Absolute ethyl alcohol 10 ml
Ammonium/Potassium alum 20 gm
Distilled water 190 ml
Mercuric oxide (red) 0.5 gm
Glacial acetic acid 10 ml
Dissolve hematoxylin in absolute ethyl alcohol with gentle heating.
Dissolve ammonium or potassium alum in distilled water on a large (500 ml.
capacity) boiling flask or beaker. Add hematoxylin solution and boil. Add
mercuric oxide and plunge immediately into cold water for rapid cooling. A
large beaker should be used, because the violent liberation of oxygen will cause
the solution to explode from a narrow-mouthed flask.
The solution should assume a dark purple color when ripened by mercuric
oxide. The addition of 4% glacial acetic acid will give a more precise nuclear
staining. The solution is then filtered and transferred into a well-stoppered
bottle.
Harris hematoxylin is a good regressive stain that may either be used
immediately or stored for future use, since it remains stable for a long time
(about 6 months). Since most of the alcohol is evaporated in the process of
boiling, 10 ml. of ethyl alcohol may be added to the final solution, to help
prevent the growth of molds. The precipitate that forms on prolonged storage
should be filtered off before use.
Harris hematoxylin is widely used for routine nuclear staining, in
exfoliative cytology, and for staining of sex chromosomes. The usual staining
time is 5-20 minutes, depending on the batch and age of stain, the nature of
tissue, and the degree of staining required. Best results are obtained when the
solution is made every 2 or 3 months. The formation of precipitate in the stored
staining solution indicates deterioration in nuclear staining property. The stain
should be filtered before use, and staining time may need to be increased at this
stage.
Cole's Hematoxylin
Cole's hematoxylin is another alum hematoxylin solution recommended for
routine purposes, especially used in sequence with Celestine blue. This alum
hematoxylin is artificially ripened with an alcoholic iodine solution. It is ready
for immediate use, but may need filtering after storage, as with Harris
hematoxylin.
FORMULA:
Hematoxylin 1.5 gm
1% Iodine in 95% Alcohol 50 ml Sat. Aq. Ammonium Alum 700 ml
Distilled Water 250 ml
Dissolve hematoxylin in warm distilled water and mix with iodine. Add
alum solution and boil. Cool and filter before use. Staining time is 10 minutes.
Mayer's Hematoxylin
This is an alum hematoxylin that is chemically ripened with sodium iodate.
Like any alum hematoxylin, it can be used as a regressive stain, but it is also
useful as a progressive stain. It is used as a n uclear counterstain to demonstrate
the presence of cytoplasmic glycogen by special stain. It is also used in
instances when acid-alcohol differentiation might destroy or decolorize the
stained cytoplasmic components like mucopolysaccharides. It is used in
Celestine Blue hemalum method of nuclear staining.
FORMULA:
Hematoxylin 1 gm
Sodium iodate 0.2 gm
Potassium alum 50 gm
Citric acid 1 gm
Chloral hydrate 50 gm
Distilled water 1000 ml
Allow hematoxylin, alum and sodium iodate to dissolve in water
overnight. Add chloral hydrate and citric acid. Boil for 5 minutes and cool. The
addition of sodium iodate immediately ripens the hematoxylin. Citric acid is
usually added after potassium alum has been dissolved (by shaking the
solution); however, the addition of 20 ml. glacial acetic acid seems to give
better nuclear staining and a more stable solution. Chloral hydrate is added to
the final solution as a preservative. One disadvantage of Mayer's hematoxylin
is that it can be stored only for 3 to 6 months at the most.
Iron Hematoxylin Solutions
Iron hematoxylin compounds are used only for differential or regressive
staining, using acid-alcohol as a differentiating agent. Two main iron
hematoxylin solutions are employed for routine work in the laboratory:
Weigert's Solution, using ferric ammonium chloride, and Heidenhain's solution,
using ferric ammonium sulfate (iron alum) as mordants. The dye lake obtained
when ferric salts are used as mordants is an intense blue-black one.
They can be applied to tissues fixed in virtually all fixatives, producing
permanent stains, provided all iron mordants have been wiped out. Tissues that
have been stored in alcohol for years and which would ordinarily fail to stain,
will normally take iron hematoxylin. Tissue structures are stained blackish or
grayish, according to the extent of differentiation, producing minimal eyestrain;
hence, making it useful for photomicrography.
Solutions prepared with correct or optimal amounts of iron salts (0.5 g.
metallic iron for each 1 gram of hematoxylin) are used for dense, regressive
staining (e.g. myelin methods) . The stain becomes more selective for nuclei if
acid or an excess of ferric salt is added. Ferric salts ripen hematoxylin rapidly
and are active oxidizing agents; hence, they do not keep well as a prepared
mixture. In mixtures of hematoxylin and ferric salts, the insoluble lake
gradually precipitates out, so that premixed stains are not very stable.
Regaud's Hematoxylin for Mitochondria:
Among the many methods used to demonstrate mitochondria by light
microscopy, the most permanent and the simplest is Regaud's modification of
iron hematoxylin on sections of material fixed in potassium dichromate and
formalin and subsequently mordanted in dichromate. After staining, the slides
are differentiated to remove the hematoxylin from most cytoplasmic components
other than mitochondria. Unfortunately, the results are not uniform: some cells
will be over-stained and some under-stained. Therefore a number of microscopic
fields should be examined.
Weigert's Hematoxylin Solution
FORMULA:
SOLUTION A:
Hematoxylin 1 gm
Absolute ethyl alcohol ml
SOLUTION B:
30% anhydrous ferric chloride 4 ml
Concentrated hydrochloric acid 1 ml
Distilled water 100 ml
Hematoxylin is dissolved in alcohol with gentle heating, while ferric
chloride, hydrochloric acid and water are mixed in a different container. Both
solutions are stable and may be stored separately for 6 weeks before use. Ferric
chloride is usually added to the staining solution just before use, by mixing
equal parts of the two solutions to produce a deep black mixture. The working
solution will remain active for 1-2 days. It changes color from a deep blue-
black-violet, through violet, purple, brown and yellowish brown within 2 to 3
weeks, as it becomes less and less stable. A solution that has turned brown
should be discarded.
Weigert's solution is the standard iron hematoxylin stain used in the
laboratory, especially for demonstrating muscle fibers and connective tissues. It
is particularly recommended when the preceding stains contain acid (e.g. Van
Gieson stain containing picric acid) which decolorizes nuclei stained with alum
hematoxylin.
Heidenhain's Hematoxylin
It is a popular cytological stain, especially for the study of mitosis. It can
be used after almost any fixative. Chromatin material (nuclear network and
chromosomes) blue black.
FORMULA:
MORDANT DIFFERENTIATOR:
Ferric ammonium sulfate 2.5 gm
Distilled water 100 ml
HEMATOXYLIN STAIN:
Hematoxylin 1.5 gm
95% ethyl alcohol 10 ml
Distilled water 90 ml
Hematoxylin is dissolved in ethyl alcohol and added with water, allowed to
ripen for 4-5 weeks, and stored in tightly stoppered bottles. This iron
hematoxylin uses ferric ammonium sulfate as oxidant/mordant, and the same
solution as the differentiating fluid. The mordant differentiator is used separately
during the process of staining, instead of being added to the solution.
Heidenhain's solution is a cytological stain recommended for regressive
staining of thin sections. After staining, all components are black or dark grey -
black. The hematoxylin staining is moved progressively from different tissue
structures at different rates using the iron alum solution. Differentiation can be
more easily controlled if the differentiating iron alum solution is diluted with an
equal volume of distilled water or an alcoholic picric acid solution. It is utilized
for the demonstration of both nuclear and cytoplasmic inclusions such as
chromatin, chromosomes, nucleoli, centrosomes, and mitochondria. Voluntary
muscle striations and myelin are also well stained.
Phosphotongstic Acid Hematoxylin (PTAH)
There are many variants of the original Mallory PTAH technique,
combining hematoxylin with 1% aqueous phosphotungstic acid, which acts as
a mordant. Natural ripening of the tungsten hematoxylin solution is achieved
with light and air, but will take some months to ripen.
FORMULA:
Hematoxylin 1 gm
Phosphotungstic acid 20 gm
Distilled Water 1000 ml
Dissolve the solids in separate portions of distilled water. Add together and
stand in the light to ripen for several weeks. Immediate ripening may be
obtained by adding 50 ml of 0.25% aqueous potassium permanganate after the
two solutions are mixed, so that stain can be used the next day, although peak
staining activity is not reached until after 7 days.
When hematin is used instead of hematoxylin to prepare a staining
solution, the oxidation process is not necessary and the staining solution can be
used immediately, but its staining activity is comparatively short-lived.
The color of the solution ranges from reddish-brown to purple, although
this is not a reliable guide for the study of stained tissues. Nuclei, fibrin,
muscle striations, and myofibrils are colored blue while collagen, bone and
cartilage take an orange-red or brownish red to deep brick-red stain.
Staining is usually progressive, hence, microscopic examination of the
materials every hour is recommended. Ninety-five percent alcohol usually
removes the red component of the stain, so that dehydration and rinsing of
sections should be brief.
Phosphotungstic acid hematoxylin stain usually demonstrates structures in
paraffin as well as celloidin and frozen sections. Staining time is usually 12-24
hours.
EOSIN
Eosin is one of the most valuable stains used for differentially staining
connective tissues and cytoplasm. It is a red general cytoplasmic stain that
combines with hemoglobin to give an orange color. It is an acid dye and the
terms acidophilic, oxyphilic and eosinophilic are often used interchangeably. It
may be used after any fixative and is routinely used in histopathology as a
counterstain to hematoxylin, imparting a pink or red color to cytoplasmic
material, cell membranes, and some extracellular structures. It is commonly
used as a background stain because it gives a pleasing and colorful contrast to
nuclear stains, particularly in chromate and picric acid fixed tissues, and in
acid decalcified materials which are strongly stained with eosin.
Yellowish (Eosin Y) -is the most commonly used. It is readily soluble in water,
less in alcohol, available in both aqueous and alcoholic solutions, showing a
green yellow fluorescence especially in alcoholic medium. The aqueous stain is
generally used as a I % solution for 15 seconds to 3 minutes, depending on the
tissue, type of fixative and intensity of color desired. Slightly longer staining
time is required after formalin than after Zenker’s solution.
The other eosin compound is Eosin B (eosin bluish or imperial red); it has a
very faint bluish cast. The two dyes are interchangeable, and the use of one or
the other is more a matter of preference and tradition. Eosin S and Eosin B are
now rarely used.
5% Aq ueous Eosin Y
FORMULA:
Eosin Y 5 gm
Distilled water 100 ml
Dissolve in water by gentle heating. Cool and filter. Thymol
crystals may be added to prevent formation of molds.
Eosin, Stock Alcoholic Solution
FORMULA:
Eosin Y 1 gm
Distilled water 20 ml
95% alcohol 80 ml
Dissolve Eosin Y in water by gentle heating. Cool and add alcohol.
For use, one part of the stock solution is usually diluted with three parts of
80% alcohol. Addition of 0.5 ml. glacial acetic acid for every 100 ml. of stain
will usually give a deeper red stain to the tissue. Differentiation of the eosin
stain ing occurs in the subsequent tap water wash, and a little further
differentiation occurs through the alcohols.
Combining eosin Y and phloxine B produces a cytoplasmic stain that
demonstrates various tissue components more dramatically.
Eosin-Phloxine B Solution
FORMULA:
1% phloxine 10 ml
1% eosin Y 100 ml
95% alcohol 780 ml
Glacial Acetic Acid 4 ml
Romanowsky Stains
The Romanowsky stains are all based on a combination of eosinate
(chemically reduced eosin) and methylene blue (sometimes with its oxidation
products azure A and azure B). Common variants include Wright's stain, Jenner's
stain, Leishman stain and Giemsa stain. All are used to examine blood or bone
marrow samples. They are preferred over H&E for inspection of blood cells
because different types of leukocytes (white blood cells) can be readily
distinguished. All are also suited to examination of blood to detect blood-borne
parasites like malaria.
OTHER STAINS
Acid Fuchsin-Picric Acid (Van Gieson’s Stain) is a mixture of picric acid and
acid fuchsin for demonstration of connective tissues.
FORMULA:
Picric acid, saturated aqueous solution 100 ml
Acid fuchsin (1 % aqueous solution) 5 ml The solution
weakens after long standing and may be strengthened by adding
a few drops of fresh acid fuchsin.
Acid Fuchsin (Masson Stain) may be used to stain collagen, smooth muscle, or
mitochondria. Acid fuchsine is used as the nuclear and cytoplasmic stain in
Mallory's trichrome method. Acid fuchsine stains cytoplasm in some variants of
Masson's trichrome. In Van Gieson's picro-fuchsin, acid fuchsin imparts its red
color to collagen fibers. Acid fuchsin is also a traditional stain for mitochondria.
FORMULA:
Acid fuchsin 1 gm
Glacial acetic acid 1 ml
Distilled water to make 100 ml
Picro-Fuchsin Solution
FORMULA:
1% Acid fuchsin 13 ml
Saturated aqueous picric acid 87 ml
ACRIDINE ORANGE is a basic acridine fluorochrome which permits
discrimination between dead and living cells, giving green fluorescence for
DNA and a red fluorescence for RNA. It is a nucleic acid selective fluorescent
cationic dye useful for cell cycle determination. When bound to DNA, it is very
similar spectrally to fluorescein. Like fluorescein, it is also useful as a non-
specific stain for backlighting conventionally stained cells on the surface of a
solid sample of tissue (fluorescence backlighted staining).
ACRIDINE RED 3B is used to demonstrate deposits of calcium salts and
possible sites of phosphatase activities.
ALCIAN BLUE - is a complex, water-soluble phthalocyanin dye, similar to
chlorophyll, which stains acid mucopolysaccharides by forming salt linkages
with them. It is an excellent stain because it is simple, it produces a striking
blue color, and it is resistant to various counterstaining procedures. It is more
specific for connective tissue and epithelial mucin due to its use as an acid
solution. Alcian blue is often combined with PAS, as it stains acidic mucins
blue, whereas PAS stains neutral mucins red, hence it can be used to distinguish
elements of the extracellular matrix.
FORMULA:
Alcian blue 1 gm
Glacial acetic acid 1 ml
Distilled water add up to 100 ml
ALIZARIN RED S forms an orange-red lake with calcium at a pH of 4.2. It
works best with small amounts of calcium (such as in Michaelis-Gutman
bodies). The alizarin method is also used on the Dupont ACA analyzer to
measure serum calcium photometrically.
ANILINE BLUE is a cytoplasmic stain used for counterstaining of epithelial
sections.
FORMULA:
Aniline blue 1 gm
Distilled water 97.5 ml
Glacial acetic acid 2.5 ml
AZOCARMINE: Nuclei are deep red; cytoplasm is a pale red.
BASIC FUCHSIN - is a plasma stain utilized also for deep staining of acid-
fast organisms, for mitochondria, for differentiation of smooth muscles with the
use of picric acid. It is a main constituent of Feulgen's and Schiff's reagent for
the detection of aldehydes, of Van Gieson's solution for connective tissues,
mucin, and for elastic tissue staining.
a. CARBOL-FUCHSIN
FORMULA:
Basic fuchsi n 1 gm Phenol crystals 5 gm
Absolute ethyl alcohol 10 ml
Distilled water 100 ml
Grind basic fuchsin and phenol together in a mortar. Add
alcohol and then water. Boil in a beaker and stand for 24 hours
to cool. Filter before use.
2. COLEMAN'S FEULGEN REAGENT
FORMULA:
Basic fuchsin 1 gm
Sodium metabisulphite 1 gm
1N hydrochloric acid 10 ml
Distilled water 200 ml
Boil water, remove from heat and add basic fuchsin. Cool and
add sodium metabisulphite and hydrochloric acid. Stand for 24
hours and filter through activated charcoal to get a colorless
filtrate. Store in a refrigerator.
c. SCHIFF'S REAGENT
FORMULA:
Basic fuchsin 1 gm
Sodium metabisulfite anhydrous 1 gm
Distilled water 200 ml
Normal hydrochloric acid 20 ml
Boil water. Add basic fuchsin and dissolve by stirring. Cool to
50°C, filter and add hydrochloric acid. Cool to 25°C and add
sodium metabisulphite. Let stand for 24 hours until the solution
becomes pale-straw in color. Filter through activated charcoal
to form a colorless filtrate. Store in a refrigerator.
d. MALLORY'S FUCHSIN STAIN
FORMULA:
Basic fuchsin 0.5 gm
95% ethyl alcohol 50 ml
Distilled water 50 ml
Dissolve fuchsin in alcohol by gentle heating. Add water, cool,
and filter.
e. ALDEHYDE FUCHSIN (GOMORl'S STAIN)
FORMULA:
Concentrated hydrochloric acid 1 ml
Paraldehyde 1 ml
0.5% basic fuchsin in 70% alcohol 100 ml
Stand at room temperature for 24 hours until the mixture
becomes deep purple in color. Store in refrigerator.
BENZIDINE is used for staining hemoglobin.
FORMULA:
Solution A
Benzidine 0.5 gm
Absolute alcohol 50 ml
Sodium nitroprusside 0.1 gm
Distilled water up to 100 ml
Dissolve benzidine in alcohol. Dissolve sodium nitroprusside in 10
ml. distilled water. Mix and make up to 100 ml. with the remaining
distilled water.
Solution B
Absolute alcohol 50 ml
Glacial acetic acid 2 ml
Hydrogen peroxide 30% 0.5 ml
Sodium nitroprusside 0. 1 gm
Distilled water up to 100 ml
Both solutions A and B should be freshly prepared.
BISMARCK BROWN - is used as a contrast stain for Gram's technique, in
acid fast and Papanicolau method, and for staining diphtheria organisms.
CARMINE - is used as a chromatin stain for fresh materials in smear
preparations. It is slightly soluble in water at a neutral reaction, and usually
kept in ammoniacal solution which changes its properties due to oxidation. The
most important component of carmine is carminic acid, which is also useful in
industry and analytical chemistry. It can be used for determining the presence
of certain metal ions, such as aluminum. A dry powder is often prepared in the
form of carmine aluminum calcium lake ("carmine alum lake"). It is usually
combined with aluminum chloride to stain glycogen (Best Carmine solution).
Best Carmine Stain (Stock Solution)
FORMULA:
Carmine 2 gm
Potassium carbonate 1 gm
Potassium chloride 5 gm
Distilled water 60 ml
Concentrated ammonia 20 ml
Grind carmine in a mortar and add potassium carbonate and potassium
chloride to water. Boil gently in a large flask (to avoid frothing) for 5
minutes. Cool and add ammonia. Store in a dark bottle inside the
refrigerator. Stain will keep well for about 3 months after preparation.
Best Carmine Working Solution
FORMULA:
Best carmine (stock solution) 2 parts
Ammonia concentrated 2 parts
Absolute methyl alcohol 3 parts
Best's Differentiator
FORMULA:
Absolute methyl alcohol 40 ml
Absolute ethyl alcohol 80 ml
Distilled water 100 ml
CARMALUM (MAYER'S) SOLUTION -is a mordanted dye acting as a
basic dye and staining acidic substances.
FORMULA:
Carminic acid 0.5 gm
Potassium alum 5 gm
Distilled water 100 ml
Salicylic acid 0.05 gm
Sodium salicylate 0.25 gm
Warm the solution to dissolve the constituents. Filter when cool,
then add salicylic acid and sodium salicylate.
CELESTINE BLUE - Celestine Blue is an oxazine dye used as an alternative
to iron hematoxylin nuclear stain, producing a strong and precise nuclear stain
that is resistant to decolorization by succeeding acid stains and solutions.
Celestine blue forms a strong staining lake with iron alum, acting as a mordant
to bind hematoxylin. It is resistant to strong acid dyes, and is recommended for
routine staining of fixed sections, giving a good nuclear definition when used
in conjunction with alum hematoxylin.
FORMULA:
Ferric ammonium sulfate 5 gm
Distilled water 100 ml
Celestine blue 0.5 gm
Glycerin 14 ml
Dissolve ferric ammonium sulfate in water overnight at room
temperature. Add Celestine blue; Boil for 3 minutes. Cool and filter,
then add glycerin.
CONGO RED - is best known as an indicator, but may be utilized as a stain for
axis cylinders in embryos. It is used as a 4% aqueous solution in staining elastic
tissues and myelin. Congo red is used to identify deposits of protein in tissue
called amyloid.
CRESYL VIOLET - is commonly used in histology to stain nervous tissues.
Cresyl violet stains the acidic components of the neuronal cytoplasm
(specifically Nissl bodies) a violet color.
CRYSTAL VIOLET - is a nuclear or chromatin stain used for staining
amyloid in frozen sections and platelets in blood. Gentian violet is the staining
solution formed by the mixture of crystal violet, methyl violet and dexterin.
ETHIDIUM BROMIDE intercalates and stains DNA, providing a fluorescent
red-orange stain. Although it will not stain healthy cells, it can be used to
identify cells that are in the final stages of apoptosis –such cells have much more
permeable membranes. Consequently, ethidium bromide is often used as a
marker for apoptosis in cells populations and to locate bands of DNA in gel
electrophoresis. The stain may also be used in conjunction with acridine orange
(AO) in viable cell counting. This EB/AO combined stain causes live cells to
fluoresce green whilst apoptotic cells retain the distinctive red-orange
fluorescence.
GIEMSA STAIN – consists of a mixture of methylene-blue and eosin, and it is
used for staining blood to differentiate leukocytes. It is mostly used on methanol-
fixed blood films, where it stains erythrocytes pink and the different types of
leukocyte, allowing their identification according to size and shape of their
nuclei. It also binds to some pathogens, including spirochetes (syphilis),
trypanosomes (sleeping sickness and Chagas disease) and plasmodium (malarial
parasites). In addition it can also be used to stain some bacteria in tissue sections
pink, and it is therefore particularly useful if infection is suspected.
FORMULA:
Giemsa stain 1 gm
Glycerin 66 ml
Absolute methyl alcohol 66 ml
Mix glycerin and Giemsa stain and place in oven at 60°C for 30
minutes to 2 hours then add methyl alcohol.
GOLD SUBLIMATE - is the stain used for metallic impregnation, made up of
gold chloride and mercuric chloride.
FORMULA:
Mercuric chloride 0.4 gm
Distilled water 60 ml
1% Gold chloride (brown) 10 ml
Dissolve mercuric chloride in water by gentle heating. Cool and add
gold chloride, store in a dark place, or mix immediately before use.
IODINE - is probably the oldest of all stains, originally used for microscopic
study of starch granules. It stains amyloid, cellulose, starch, carotenes and
glycogen. It is widely used for removal of mercuric fixative artefact pigments,
and as a reagent to alter crystal and methyl violet so that they may be retained
by certain bacteria and fungi. It may also be used in the form of aqueous or
alcoholic solutions.
Gram's Iodine - is used to identify and differentiate bacteria. For example,
staphylococci, streptococci and pneumococci are gram-positive and stain a deep
blue, whereas coliforms and Neisseria are gram-negative and stain pink.
FORMULA:
Iodine 1 gm.
Potassium iodide 2 gm.
Distilled water 300 ml.
Dissolve potassium iodide in a little water. Add iodine and dissolve
in the remaining water.
Gram's Iodine is used in Gram Weigert method of staining
microorganisms and fibrin in tissue sections.
Lugol's solution or Lugol's iodine
Lugol’s solution is a brown solution that turns black in the presence of starches
and can be used as a cell stain, making the cell nuclei more visible. Iodine is also
used as a mordant in Gram's staining, it enhances dye to enter through the pore
present in the cell wall/membrane.
FORMULA:
Iodine 1 gm
Potassium iodide 1 gm
Distilled water 100 ml
Lugol's Iodine is used as a test for glycogen, amyloid, and corpora
amylacea.
JANUS GREEN B - is used for demonstrating mitochondria during intravital
staining.
MALACHITE GREEN - has sometimes been used for staining erythrocytes is
a weakly basic dye used as a contrast stain for staining ascaris eggs and
erythrocytes, and as a bacterial spore stain; it is also used both as a decolorizer
and as a counterstain. By itself, this dye is not all that good for general
microscopy, being perhaps in the same category as tartrazine. Like tartrazine,
malachite green is primarily a counterstain; this means it gives general color to
areas that have either failed to take up some other, more specific stain or which
have been subjected to de-staining.
FORMULA:
2% aqueous malachite green 220 ml
Glacial acetic acid 30 ml
Glycerol, C.M.
Mix and store in a colored bottle.
MASSON’S TRICHROME is (as the name implies) a three-color staining
protocol. The recipe has evolved from Masson's original technique for different
specific applications, but all are well-suited to distinguish cells from
surrounding connective tissue. Most recipes produce red keratin and muscle
fibers, blue or green staining of collagen and bone, light red or pink staining of
cytoplasm, and black cell nuclei.
METHYL GREEN - stains chromatin green in the presence of an acid. It gives
false positive reactions with certain secretions such as mucin. Methyl green is
used commonly with bright-field microscopes to dye the chromatin of cells so
that they are more easily viewed.
METHYLENE BLUE - is a common basic nuclear stain employed with eosin
to provide marked differentiation of various structures in the tissue. It usually
contains some azures or methylene violet. Methylene blue stains acidic cell
parts (like the nucleus) blue and is a good counterstain with Eosin Y. It can be
substituted for Janus Green B stain or Carmine stain. This methylene blue stain
is a 1% aqueous solution.
"Polychroming" involves the oxidation of methylene blue, resulting in
loss of methyl groups and leaving lower homologues of the dye (azures) and
deaminized oxidation products (thiazoles). The resulting mixture of methylene
blue, azures and thiazoles is known as polychrome methylene blue. It stains
nuclei blue while cartilage matrix, mucin, mast cell granules and connective
tissues generally take a reddish-violet color.
It is a valuable stain for plasma cells and may also be employed in
cytological examinations of fresh sputum for malignant cells, as a bacterial
stain for evaluation and differentiation of bacterial organisms, for diagnosis of
diphtheria, and for vital staining of the nervous tissue.
FORMULA:
Methylene blue 1 gm
Potassium carbonate 1 gm
Distilled water 100 ml
Mix in a flask that has been lightly plugged with the cotton or
gauze and let stand at 37°C for weeks to oxidize. For use, dilute in
1:5 or 1:10 dilution with distilled water.
This solution is available commercially. For rapid diagnosis, frozen
sections are stained with polychrome methylene blue for I/2 to 1 minute, rinsed
and mounted in an aqueous mountant, blotted dry, or cleared in xylene and
mounted in Clarite, Permount or H.S.R.
Mallory's Phloxine Methylene Blue Stain - originally known as Eosin-
Methylene Blue (EMB) method, this technique produces a sharp nuclear stain
and reveals with marked differentiation the various structures in the tissues,
which should be fixed in Zenker's fluid.
METHYLENE VIOLET - is a metachromatic dye formed whenever
methylene blue is heated in fixed alkali or alkali carbonate, coloring nuclei of
leukocytes reddish-purple in the presence of methylene blue.
NILE RED (also known as Nile blue oxazone) is formed by boiling Nile blue
with sulfuric acid. This produces a mix of Nile red and Nile blue. Nile red is a
lipophilic stain; it will accumulate in lipid globules inside cells, staining them
red. Nile red can be used with living cells. It fluoresces strongly when
partitioned into lipids, but practically not at all in aqueous solution.
OIL RED O is a dye that is more soluble in fat than in water or alcohols, hence
it is used as a stain for neutral lipids. For example when myelin is broken down
in the CNS, in diseases such as multiple sclerosis, macrophages take up the
lipid-rich debris and stain strongly with this dye. The oil red O stain can
identify neutral lipids and fatty acids in smears and tissues. Fresh smears or
cryostat sections of tissue are necessary because fixatives containing alcohols,
or routine tissue processing with clearing, will remove lipids. The ORO is a
rapid and simple stain. It can be useful in identifying fat emboli in lung tissue
or clot sections of peripheral blood.
ORCEIN --is an excellent stain for elastic fibers, and is especially
recommended in dermatological studies due to its ability to demonstrate the
finest and most delicate fibers in the skin.
OSMIUM TETROXIDE
Osmic Acid or Osmium Tetroxide (OsO4) is a selective stain for
unsaturated lipids and for lipoproteins such as myelin, which it stains black.
Osmic acid, aside from being used as a fixative especially for electron
microscopy, may be used to stain fat, although other substances are also stained
simultaneously, thereby preventing specific staining of lipids to be done. Fat,
which reduces osmium tetroxide to osmium dioxide, is stained black, and may
be demonstrated from the tissue by using chrome-osmium solutions or by the
frozen section method.
PERIODIC ACID SCHIFF (PAS) is an all-around useful stain for many
things. It stains glycogen, mucin, mucoprotein, glycoprotein, basement
membranes, capsules, and blood vessels as well as fungi and intracellular
carbohydrates such as glycogen in hepatocytes. Cells that secrete mucus are
also strongly stained. A pre-digestion step with amylase will remove staining
for glycogen. This method depends on the selective oxidation by periodic acid
of free hydroxyl groups on two adjacent hydroxyl groups converting the
alcohols to aldehydes. The aldehydes are then detected by the Schiff reagent,
which stains them reddish purple. Other tissue components stain according to
the counterstain used. Lead-hematoxylin or another basic stain is often the
counterstain.
PHOSPHOTUNGSTIC ACID - is a common negative stain for viruses,
nerves, polysaccharides, and other biological tissue materials. This is an ideal
stain for the demonstration of striated muscle fibers and mitochondria, which
stain blue. A counterstain is often not used.
PICRIC ACID - is employed as a contrast stain to acid fuchsin, for the
demonstration of connective tissue (Van Gieson's stain), as a cytoplasmic stain
in contrast to basic dyes, as a counterstain to crystal violet, as a tissue fixative,
and as a decalcifying agent.
PRUSSIAN BLUE - is an insoluble colored salt of ferric ferrocyanide (an iron
cyanide compound) normally utilized for the manufacture of paints, but may be
used for microanatomical color contrast of specimens and for demonstration of
the blood and lymph vessels by injection (intravital staining).
RHODAMINE B - is used with osmic acid to fix and stain blood and
glandular tissues.
SAFRANIN (or Safranin O) - is a nuclear stain. It produces red nuclei, and is
used primarily as a counterstain. Safranin may also be used to give a yellow
color to collagen.
SILVER NITRATE - is used in 10% aqueous solution to prepare various
dilutions to be used in identification of spirochetes, reticulum and other fiber
stains.
TOLUIDINE BLUE - is a nuclear stain for fixed tissues, used as a substitute
for thionine in fresh frozen tissue sections. It is recommended for staining of
Nissl granules or chromophilic bodies. It is a particularly versatile dye that stains
nuclei blue, and can be used to differentiate different types of granules (e.g.
within mast cells). Because it can permeate the resins that are used to embed
sections for electron microscopy, it is often used as a preliminary stain, to
identify sections that will later be examined by electron microscopy.
VAN GIESON STAIN - binds to collagen in the extracellular matrix, staining it
pink. Often it is combined with a stain for elastic fibers (elastic van Gieson)
which stain black, allowing the two major elements of connective tissue to be
differentiated.
VICTORIA BLUE - is used for demonstration of neuroglia in frozen sections.
VON KOSSA STAIN - is a silver reduction method that demonstrates
phosphates and carbonates, but these are usually present along with calcium.
This stain is most useful when large amounts are present, as in bone.
WRIGHT STAIN - causes blood cells to exhibit four major staining properties
that allow the cell types to be distinguished. Basophilia (affinity for methylene
blue), azurophilia (affinity for the oxidation products of methylene blue called
azures, which are reddish purple), acidophilia (affinity for eosin), and
neutrophilia (affinity for a complex of dyes in the mixture, which are pale lilac).
In a stained blood smear, erythrocytes bind eosin and appear orange to pink,
nuclei purplish blue, basophilic granules very dark bluish purple, eosinophilic
granules red to red-orange, neutrophilic granules reddish-brown to lilac, platelets
violet to purple, and lymphocyte cytoplasm stains pale blue.
OIL SOLUBLE DYES (LYSOCHROMES)
Lysochromes (oil soluble dyes) are not real dyes in the usual sense of the
word because they do not have auxochrome groups. They give color to lipids
simply because they are more soluble in lipid medium of the tissues, than in
their medium of 70% alcohol. Oil soluble dyes are available in the form of
Sudan Black B. Sudan III and Sudan IV (Scharlach R), used for the
demonstration of intracellular fats which are colored black, orange, and red,
respectively.
In order to penetrate fats, the oil soluble dyes (Sudan dyes) must be
dissolved in organic sol vent, although the solvent vehicle (usually ethanol,
isopropanol or propylene glycol) should be sufficiently dilute (aqueous) to
avoid extracting the lipids themselves.
Sudan Black
Sudan Black is a stain that colors fat droplets black and is the most
sensitive of the oil soluble dyes. It possesses two secondary amino groups per
molecule, making it a slightly basic dye which may cause non-specific staining.
Because of this molecular structure, Sudan black has a much greater affinity for
phospholipids than other lysochromes -coloring neutral lipids (triglycerides) by
simple dissolution of the dye. It has the added advantage of being a more
sensitive coloring agent. The ability of fats to adsorb Sudan Black is related to
dye concentration, temperature and physical state of the fats. Maximal dye
uptake occurs when fat reaches its melting point, so that lipids that are liquid or
semi-liquid at staining temperature will be stained while those that are
crystalline or solid will not be affected by the dye. Sudan Black is prepared as a
0.5% solution boiled in 70% ethanol for 10 minutes under a reflux condenser,
and filtered before use. It is a very unstable solution and should be discarded if
the usual blue-black color turns brownish black. It usually imparts a black color
on intracellular lipids, and is recommended for paraffin sections especially for
tissues fixed in formol calcium with post chroming, demonstrating lipids that
are resistant to paraffin embedding.
Unlike the other Sudan dyes, Sudan Black B stains phospholipids as well
as neutral fats. Sudan black B does not stain crystalline cholesterol, and free
fatty acids tend to be soluble in the ethanolic dye bath.
Sudan IV
Sudan IV (Scharlach R) is different from Sudan Black because it has no
secondary amino group and it does not color phospholipids or the fine lipid
droplets. It is prepared by saturating the dye (Scharlach R) in one part of 2%
benzoic acid (in 70% alcohol), and one part of acetone, forming a very stable
solution which may be used repeatedly as long as it is filtered. Addition of
benzoic acid intensifies fat and prevents rapid deterioration of the solutions. It
is recommended for staining triglycerides (neutral lipids), giving them a deep
and intense red stain.
Sudan Ill
Sudan III was the first Sudan dye to be introduced into histochemistry. It is
also fat soluble, and is good as a fat stain for central nervous system tissues,
giving a less deep and lighter orange stain compared to the darker staining
Sudan IV.
CHIEF SOLVENTS USED FOR STAINS
1. WATER - should always be distilled unless otherwise stated.
2. ALCOHOL - Ethyl alcohol may be used in various concentrations.
Methyl alcohol, if to be used, is usually absolute, and is indicated
especially in the preparation of blood stains, for which reason, it should
be acetone free.
3. ANILINE WATER -Ten ml. of aniline is added to every 1/2 to 1 liter
of hot distilled water, shaken, cooled, and filtered.
4. PHENOL - is used in aqueous solution of 0.5 - 5%.
REFERENCES
Baker JR. (1962) Experiments on the action of mordants. 2. Aluminium haematein. Quart J Microsc
Sci; 103: 493-517.
Bancroft JD, Gamble M, eds. (2002) Theory and Practice of Histological Techniques. 5th ed. London:
Churchill-Livingstone.
Bergey, DH, Holt JG, Noel RK, Sneath PHA. (1994) Bergey's Manual of Determinative Bacteriology
(9th ed.) Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.
Beveridge TJ. (2001) "Use of the Gram stain in microbiology". Biotech Histochem 76 (3): 111–8.
Carson FL, Hladik C. (2009) Histotechnology: a Self-instructional Text. 3rd ed. Chicago, IL: ASCP
Press.
Clark G. (1981) Staining Procedures, 4th ed., Baltimore: Williams & Wilkins, p. 412.
Conn, JI. (1969) Biological Stains, 8th ed., Williams and Wilkins Co. Baltimore.
Davies JA, Anderson GK, Beveridge TJ, Clark HC. (1983) "Chemical mechanism of the Gram stain
and synthesis of a new electron-opaque marker for electron microscopy, which replaces the iodine
mordant of the stain". Journal of bacteriology 156 (2): 837–45.
Gill GW. (2010) Gill hematoxylins: first person account. Biotech Histochem 85(1):7-18.
Gill GW. (2010B) H&E staining: oversight and insights. DAKO Connection. 14:104-114.
Gilliland JW, Dean WW, Stastny M, Lubrano G. (1979) Stabilized Romanowsky blood stain. Stain
Technol 54:141–150.
Horobin RW, Murgatroyd LB. (1968) The composition and properties of Gallocyanin-chrome alum
stains. Histochem J 1:36–54.
Horobin RW, Walter K. (1987) Understanding Romanowsky staining. I: The Romanowsky-Giemsa
effect in blood smears. Histochemistry 86:331–336.
Horobin RW, Kiernan JA. (2002) Conn's Biological Stains. A Handbook of Dyes Stains and
Fluorochromes for Use in Biology and Medicine. 10th ed. Oxford: BIOS.
Kiernan JA. (2008) Histological and Histochemical Methods. Theory and Practice. Bloxham, UK:
Scion.
Lillie RD. (1977) Conn's biological stains, 9th ed. Williams & Wilkins, Baltimore.
Lillie RD, Pizzolato P, Donaldson PT. (1975) Hematoxylin substitutes: a survey of mordant dyes tested
and consideration of the relation of their structure to performance as nuclear stains. Stain Technol
51:25–41.
Llewellyn BD. (2009) Nuclear staining with alum hematoxylin. Biotechnic & Histochemistry.
84(4):159-177.
Luna LG. (ed.) (1969) Manual of Histologic Staining Methods of the Armed Forces Institute of
Pathology. The Blakiston Division, New York, 1969, 3rd ed.
Marshall PN. (1976) The composition of stains produced by the oxidation of methylene blue.
Histochem J 8:431–442.
Marshall PN. (1978) Romanowsky-type stains in haematology. Histochem J 10:1–29.
Marshall PN, Horobin RW. (1973) The mechanism of action of “mordant” dyes — a study using
preformed metal complexes. Histochemie 35:361–371.
Marshall PN, Horobin RW. (1973) Measurements of the affinities of basic and “mordant” dyes for
various tissue substrates. Histochemie 36:303–312.
Marshall PN, Horobin RW. (1974) A simple assay procedure for mixtures of hematoxylin and hematein.
Stain Technol 49:137–142.
Marshall PN, Lewis SM. (1975) A technique for distinguishing between Methylene Violet and
Methylene Violet Bernthsen. Stain Technol 50:51–53.
McManus JFA, Mowry RW. (1960) Staining Methods: Histologic and Histochemical. Paul B. Hoeber
Inc., New York.
Meloan SN, Puchtler H. (1974) Ion alizarin blue S stain for nuclei. Stain Technol 49:301–304.
Penney DP, Poers JM, Frank M, Churukian C. (2002) Biotech Histochem 77 (5–6): 237–275.
Pfuller U, Franz H, Preiss A. (1977) Sudan Black B: chemical structure and histochemistry of the main
blue components. Histochemistry 54:327–333.
Proctor GB, Horobin RW. (1987) Basic fuchsin homologues. Are pure dyes really necessary? Med Lab
Sci 44:398–400.
Puchtler H, Meloan SN, Waldrop FS. (1986) Application of current chemical concepts to metal-
hematein and — brazilein stains. Histochemistry 85:353–364.
Reynolds JI, Moyes RB, Breakwell DP. (2009) "Differential staining of bacteria: acid fast stain".
Current Protocols in Microbiology. Appendix 3: Appendix 3H.
Ryan KJ, Ray CG. (editors) (2004). Sherris Medical Microbiology (4th ed.) McGraw Hill. pp. 232–3.
Schulte E. (1986) Hematoxylin and the Feulgen reagent. In: Boon ME, Kok LP (eds.) Standardization
and quantitation of diagnostic staining in cytology. Coulomb Press, Leiden, pp 9–15.
Schulte E, Wittekind D. (1989) Standardization of the Feulgen-Schiff technique: staining characteristics
of pure fuchsin dyes. Histochemistry 91:321–331.
Schulte E, Wittekind D. (1989) The influence of Romanowsky-type stains on nuclear and cytoplasmic
features of cytological specimens. Anal Cell Pathol 1:83–86.
Scott JE. (1967) On the mechanism of the Methyl Green-Pyronin stain for nucleic acids. Histochemie
9:30–47.
Scott JE. (1972b) The histochemistry of Alcian Blue, note on the presence and removal of boric acid as
a major diluent in Alcian Blue 8GX. Histochemie 29:129–133.
Wittekind D. (1979) On the nature of Romanowsky dyes and the Romanowsky-Giemsa effect. Clin Lab
Haematol 1:247–262.
Wittekind D, Kretschmer V, Sohmer I. (1982) Azure B-Eosin Y stain as the standard Romanowsky-
Giemsa stain. Br J Haematol 1:391–393.
Wittekind D, Kretschmer V. (1987) On the nature of Romanowsky-Giemsa staining and the
Romanowsky-Giemsa effect. II. A revised Romanowsky-Giemsa staining procedure. Histochem J
19:399–401.
Yasumatsu H. (1977) Stain using celestine blue B as substitute nuclear stain in routine cytologic
examinations. Acta Cytologica 21:173–174.
CHAPTER 18
STAINING OF CARBOHYDRATES
Carbohydrates are the main sources of energy in the body, mobilized in the
form of monosaccharides (glucose) and stored in the form of polysaccharides,
either in pure form (glycogen), or bound to other substances (mucin). Glycogen
is made up of polysaccharides of glucose, and is normally stored in the liver,
heart and skeletal muscle, but it may be abnormally present in certain diseases.
Mucin is made up of hexosamines (neutral mucopolysaccharides) or mucus that
is secreted by the goblet cells of intestinal mucosa, respiratory lining cells and
certain glands, or found in intercellular substances and connective tissue fibers.
Both glycogen and mucin are stained by the Periodic Acid-Schiff (PAS)
technique.
Periodic Acid Schiff (PAS) Reaction
Periodic Acid Schiff is a histochemical stain that will demonstrate
carbohydrates and other substances in the tissue. The PAS technique uses
periodic acid to specifically oxidize the 1,2 glycol group of polysaccharides and
mucin, liberating aldehydes that are required for the coloration of Schiff's
reagent, thereby producing a red magenta or purplish-pink color.
The treatment with periodic acid oxidizes some of the carbohydrates in the
tissue to aldehydes. The carbohydrates involved are 1-2 glycols. Since not all
carbohydrates include this structure, the PAS is not a method for carbohydrates
in general but only for those which contain 1-2 glycols or closely related
structures, including polysaccharides, mucopoly- saccharides, glycoproteins and
glycolipids. The essential point is that treatment must be able to produce an
aldehyde on the carbohydrate component.
As a general rule, the intensity of PAS reaction is proportional to the content
of sugars (glucose, galactose, mannose, methylpentose, fucose and hexosamines)
present in the reacting substance. In order to have a PAS-positive staining
reaction, oxidation must occur to produce aldehyde. Oxidation may continue
beyond the aldehyde stage, and in such cases, the result will be negative since
this PAS reaction is specific for glycol or glycol amino group where oxidation
does not proceed beyond the aldehyde stage.
Periodic acid is not the only oxidizing agent that has been recommended for
the oxidation of carbohydrates although it is certainly the most used and
arguably the most effective. Periodic acid has been less popular for fungal cell
walls as staining of carbohydrates in the background may diminish the contrast
between the background pink and the deeper pink of the fungal cell wall. To
overcome this, the oxidant used for fungi is often chromic acid (chromium
trioxide in water) which is different from periodic acid in that it continues to
oxidize the aldehydes it produces. Over oxidation will eventually lead to a pale
or false negative reaction. Some other oxidizing agents have been used as well
including permanganic acid, performic acid, peracetic acid and lead tetracetate.
Although valuable for specific purposes, these are not in common use.
Periodic acid is generally applied to the sections as a 0.5 to 1.0% aqueous
solution for 2 to 20 (average 5) minutes at room temperature. Oxidation beyond
10 minutes increases basophilic methylene blue staining-probably due to
acidification of sulfhydryl groups into sulfonic acid. This can be manifested by
increased affinity of the nuclei for hematoxylin counterstain. A temperature
above 25°C which markedly accelerates the reaction, causing oxidation not only
of aldehydes but also of other groups, e.g., sulfhydryl and disulfide. Solution
must be discarded if it turns brown in color.
Most fixatives can be used with this staining technique, except those that
contain osmic acid, chromates and permanganates. Routine fixation and
decalcification of bone will cause considerable loss of PAS positivity. PAS stain
can be used to demonstrate the following substances: (1) Polysaccharides: These
macromolecules are composed of monosaccharide units joined by covalent
bonds. The main polysaccharide identified through histology staining is
glycogen, which is present in numerous tissues, including skeletal muscle,
cardiac muscle, liver, and kidney.
(2) Neutral mucus substances: PAS is also commonly used to stain and
identify glycoproteins, glycolipids, and neutral mucins, which are produced by
epithelial cells in different organs.
(3) Tissue basement membranes: These PAS-positive thin layers of reticular
connective tissue anchor and support epithelium and endothelium to underlying
connective tissue.
(4) Fungal organisms: The cell walls of some living fungal organisms
contain high levels of carbohydrate, and also stain positive with PAS.
General Principles of the PAS Stain
The reactivity of the PAS technique is based on the structure of the
monosaccharide units. The stain involves periodic acid acting as an agent to
oxidize the carbon-to-carbon bonds between two adjacent hydroxyl groups.
This produces aldehyde groups in the tissue section that then reacts with Schiff
reagent (made up of a mixture of basic fuchsin, hydrochloric acid, and sodium
metabisulphite). The basic fuchsin in the mixture reacts with newly formed
aldehyde groups in the tissue and produces a bright magenta color when the
section is rinsed in water. The intensity of the color is proportional to the
concentration of hydroxyl groups originally present in the monosaccharide
units.
Hematoxylin is typically used as a counter stain to visualize other tissue
elements. However, when PAS is used to demonstrate fungal organisms, a light
green counter stain is preferred.
Diastase (alpha-amylase) digestion may also be used to assist in the
diagnosis of glycogen storage diseases. Diastase hydrolyses and extracts starch,
glycogen, and breakdown products of tissue polysaccharides. When compared
to a slide of tissue containing glycogen, a diastase extraction slide will have no
visible PAS stain.
After examining routine hematoxylin and eosin-stained sections, the
pathologist can order a PAS stain to help with the diagnosis of:
Glycogen storage diseases: These are conditions in which excessive
quantities of glycogen are stored in the liver, muscles, or kidney. PAS is
often routinely used in the clinic to demonstrate glycogen accumulation
in biopsies of these tissues.
Tumors: Glycogen granules can also be present in some tumors,
including some of those that arise in tissues such as the pancreas, lung,
and bladder.
Fungal infection: PAS can be used to visualize some fungal organisms
in tissue sections.
Basement membranes: PAS can be used to highlight abnormal basement
membrane abnormalities – such as in glomerular diseases in the kidney.
Schiff Reagent
The essential component of Schiff reagent is basic fuchsin, which is a
mixture of three dyes (rosanilin, pararosanilin and magenta II). Sulfur dioxide
converts the magenta-colored basic fuchsin into colorless leukofuchsin.
Reoxidation by slow exposure to light and air or by addition of periodic acid
will restore the colorless leukofuchsin to the magenta colored basic fuchsin.
A good quality Schiff's reagent should be made from pararosaniline rather
than basic fuchsin, i.e. the specific component of basic fuchsin which produces
the brightest staining solution. Beware of dye batches which give a brown
solution when first made. Only a water clear or pale amber solution is
acceptable. Although this brown discoloration may be removed with activated
charcoal, the original depth of brown is indicative of the amount of non-
pararosanilin components present in the dye. If large amounts of charcoal are
needed to remove the brown color, or the charcoal has to be allowed to stay in
the solution for longer than about a minute to make it water clear, then it is
quite possible that the staining abilities of the Schiff's reagent may be
compromised.
The most common application for Schiff's reagent is the Periodic Acid
Schiff, or PAS, reaction. This is a technique for the demonstration of
carbohydrates in tissue sections. The purpose of the periodic acid is to oxidize
some of the tissue carbohydrates. This produces aldehyde groups, which can
then condense with Schiff's reagent forming a bright red coloration and
demonstrating the tissue component to which the carbohydrate is attached.
Schiff reagent can be prepared in different ways: (1) by using thionyl
chloride to release sulfur dioxide; (2) by adding sodium or potassium
metabisulfite; or (3) by using sulfur dioxide gas. All of these methods utilize
the same principle of sulfuration in order to rearrange the chromophore group
that is present in basic fuchsin. Any excess sulfur remaining in solution,
together with any nonspecific yellow dye contaminant that is sometimes
present in fuchsin, is absorbed and removed by subsequent treatment with
activated charcoal.
Schiff reagent is stored in the refrigerator so it is important to allow the
reagent to come to room temperature before use. Failure to do so may result in
weak staining. It is also important to store Schiff reagent in a tightly closed
container when not in use so that the solution remains potent and stable.
Barger and de Lamater Method (1948)
1. Dissolve 1 g. basic fuchsin in 400 ml. boiling distilled water.
(Remove the flask of water from the bunsen burner just before adding
the basic fuchsin, to prevent splashing of solution.)
2. Cool to 50°C and filter.
3. Add 1 ml. thionyl chloride to the filtrate.
4. Stopper, shake, and then let stand in the dark for 12 hours.
5. Add 2 gm. activated charcoal to decolorize, shake for l minute, and
filter into a brown stock bottle.
6. Store in the dark at 0 to 4°C.
7. Allow the aliquot required to reach room temperature before use.
De Tomasi-Coleman Method (1939)
1. Dissolve l gm. basic fuchsin in 200 ml. of boiling distilled water,
shaking for 5 minutes.
2. Cool to 50°C and filter.
3. To the warm filtrate add 20 ml. of 1 M HCl (98.3 ml. HCl, sp gr
1.16, made to 1000 ml. with distilled water).
4. Cool to 25°C.
5. Add l gm. anhydrous sodium or potassium metabisulfite.
6. Let stand in the dark for 16 to 24 hours (solution will be orange or
straw-colored).
7. Add 2 gm. activated charcoal to decolorize, shake for l minute, and
filter into a brown stock bottle.
8. Store in the dark at 0 to 4°C.
9. Allow the aliquot to reach room temperature before use.
Both Schiff reagents are stable and may last up to 6 months. However, it is
preferable to make fresh reagent every month. The reagent should be discarded
when it begins to form a color. Aside from running control sections when
staining, reactivity of the Schiff reagent may be tested by adding a few drops of
the reagent to 10 cc of 37- 40% formaldehyde. Rapid development of a reddish
purple color means that the Schiff reagent is still good and usable. If the
reaction is delayed and the resultant color is deep blue-purple, the solution is
breaking down and should be discarded.
STAINING OF GLYCOGEN
Glycogen is the main storage form of glucose, manufactured and stored
chiefly in the liver, but is also found normally in less quantity in muscles,
parathyroid and cartilage.
Glycogen is very soluble in water and insoluble in alcohol. Theoretically,
therefore, alcoholic solutions are supposed to be the best fixatives and aqueous
fixatives are not suitable. This is not entirely observed in practice because
glycogen is ultimately lost no matter what fixative is used. Glycogen is often
admixed with protein and lipids and hence is also coated with a protein
membrane during protein fixation, thereby preventing further loss of glycogen.
Furthermore, formalin and picric acid tend to bind glycogen with proteins.
Although alcohol renders glycogen insoluble, it penetrates the tissues
slowly; hence, preserves only the glycogen on the surface of the block. It also
causes polarization or streaming of glycogen to one end of the cell, causing
glycogen to appear in the form of clusters of large coarse granules along the
margins of the cell.
For adequate demonstration of glycogen, thin slices of tissues should be as
fresh as possible, and should be immediately placed in the fixative at 4°C to
prevent rapid breakdown of glycogen into glucose, due to the action of strong
glycogenolytic enzymes particularly in the liver.
For routine processing, the following fixatives are recommended, i.e.,
acetic acid, alcohol formalin, Bouin's, Brasil's, Kelly's and Gendre's solution.
From the fixative, the tissue blocks should go directly into absolute alcohol. If
minimal loss of glycogen is desired, it is advisable to float the sections onto
75% ethanol when cutting, and also to mount them on slides from 75% ethanol.
Because of its water solubility, rinsing of tissues in normal saline before
fixing should be avoided. For staining, blocks should be fixed in absolute
alcohol to prevent dissolving water soluble glycogen.
A positive control section should always be treated in parallel with the
section being examined, to ensure that the staining technique is working.
PERIODIC ACID-SCHIFF REACTION (McManus 1948, Carson 1983)
Fixation: 10% neutral buffered formalin or Bouin’s solution.
Sections: 4-5 µm Paraffin
Solutions:
Periodic Acid, 0.5% Solution
Periodic acid 2.5 gm
Distilled water 500 ml
1N Hydrochloric Acid
Hydrochloric acid, conc. 83.5 ml
Distilled water 916.45 ml
Add acid to the water and mix well.
Potassium Metabisulphite, 0.55%
Potassium metabisulphite 2.75 gm
Distilled water 500 ml
Schiff Reagent
Distilled water 800 ml
Basic fuchsin 4 gm
Sodium metabisulphite 4 gm
1N Hydrochloric acid 80 ml
Heat water to the boiling point. Remove from flame, add basic
fuchsin, and again heat solution to boiling point. Cool the solution to
50oC and then filter. Add 80 ml of 1N HCl, cool completely, and
then add 4 gm of sodium metabisulphite. Let the solution stand in
the dark overnight; it should turn light amber. Add 2 m of activated
charcoal and shake for 1 minute. Filter the solution, and store in the
refrigerator. The solution should be stable for 2-4 months.
Method:
1. Bring sections to water.
2. Oxidize in 5 minutes in 0.5% aqueous periodic acid.
3. Wash in running water for 5 minutes and rinse in 3 changes of
distilled water.
4. Place in Schiff's reagent for 10-20 minutes (10 minutes for frozen
sections). Schiff reagent should be allowed to warm to room
temperature before use.
5. Wash for 30 minutes in running water or rinse three times in 0.5%
aqueous sodium metabisulfite, freshly prepared, and wash in running
water for 10 minutes.
(The metabisulfite rinse is optional, to remove excess leucofuchsin
which might regain color on oxidation and cause false positive
staining).
6. Wash in running tap water or 10 minutes to develop full color
7. Optional: Counterstain in Harris hematoxylin with acetic acid (2 ml
acetic acid and 48 ml hematoxylin) for ½ minute.
8. Wash in tap water, "blue" in Scott's tap water substitute, and wash
for 5 minutes in running tap water.
9. Dehydrate in increasing concentrations up to absolute alcohol,
clear and mount in Clarite or Permount.
Results:
PAS-positive substances red or magenta red
Nuclei blue
NOTES:
The method described gives maximum reaction but may produce a
little background coloration. Alcoholic PAS reaction uses buffered
alcoholic solution of periodic acid and reducing sulfite rinse.
Mucoproteins are the most common PAS positive substances, e.g.,
mucin and intestinal mucoid secretions, tracheobronchial aspirates, and
hyaline casts (kidney). Carbohydrates, glycoproteins, glycolipids,
unsaturated lipids and phospholipids are also PAS positive, provided they
are retained in the section. PAS-positive staining can also be found in
certain bacteria, fungi, kerasin, connective tissue mucin, basement
membrane, thyroid and cartilage.
The PAS reaction is a useful indicator for glycogen when the technique
incorporates a diastase digestion stage.
In histotechnology, the word lipid refers to all fat and fat like, or fat
containing substances. This includes triglycerides, fatty acids, lipoproteins and
glycolipids. Lipids or fats are generally classified into simple lipids,
compound lipids, and derived lipids. They all have a common property of
solubility in organic solvents and insolubility in water.
1. Simple lipids (neutral fat) are esters of fatty acids with alcohols
and are usually found in the body as energy stores in adipose tissue.
Triglycerides are esters of fatty acids with glycerol constituents,
serving as storage fats in animals with high solubility for certain non-
ionic colored substances (lysochromes) stainable by Sudan Black B,
Sudan IV and Oil Red 0.
2. Compound lipids consist of a fatty acid, an alcohol and one or
more other groups such as phosphorus or nitrogen. They are generally
found in the central nervous system.
a. Phospholipids are the important components of cellular
membranes particularly found in mitochondria and nervous tissue
elements and are readily stained by Sudan Black B and acid
hematin.
b. Glycolipids are composed of fatty acids and hexoses,
possessing characteristics of both lipids and carbohydrates and are
therefore stained by Sudan Black B and PAS techniques.
3. Derived lipids are fatty acids that are derived from hydrolysis of
simple and compound lipids. Examples are cholesterol, bile acids, sex
hormones and adrenocortical hormones.
Adipose Tissue
Adipose tissue or fat is distributed throughout the body in distinct “white”
and “brown” adipose tissue depots. White adipose tissue (WAT) is largely
composed of unilocular lipid-filled adipocytes that specialize in lipid storage,
whereas brown adipose tissue (BAT) is largely composed of multilocular
adipocytes that specialize in lipid burning. Fat cells appear as “signet rings” on
H&E stain because large lipid droplet displace the nucleus and remainder of the
cytoplasm to the edge of the cell. With standard methods of fixation, lipids are
largely lost from tissues during processing. The clear areas in the section are
truly empty, because the triglycerides in the fat droplet are soluble in the organic
solvents used during processing of the section, and are therefore removed from
the section.
Protein is the basic component of living cells and is made of carbon,
hydrogen, oxygen, nitrogen and one or more chains of amino acids linked by
peptide bonds. Based on chemical composition, they occur in tissues either as:
1) Simple proteins: On hydrolysis they yield only the amino acids and
occasional small carbohydrate compounds. Examples are: albumins,
globulins, structural proteins, enzymes, histones and protamines. Simple
proteins can be demonstrated in tissue by histologic methods, amino acid
histochemical methods, enzyme histochemical methods, and
immunocytochemical methods.
2) Conjugated proteins: These are simple proteins combined with some
non-protein material in the body to form complex proteins. Examples
are: lipoproteins, mucoproteins, nucleoproteins, glycoproteins, and
phosphoproteins.
3) Derived proteins: These are proteins derived from simple or
conjugated proteins by physical or chemical means. Examples are:
denatured proteins and peptides.
The three types of proteins based on physical configuration are fibrous, globular,
and membrane.
1) Fibrous Proteins form muscle fiber, tendons, connective tissue and
bone. Examples of fibrous proteins are actin, collagen, elastin,
fibronectin, myosin, tau, tropomyosin and tubulin. The organic portion, or
protein fibers, found in connective tissues are either collagen, elastic, or
reticular fibers. Fibrous proteins are often structural, such as collagen, the
major component of connective tissue, or keratin, the protein component
of hair and nails. Collagen fibers provide strength to the tissue,
preventing it from being torn or separated from the surrounding tissues.
Histologic methods involve the demonstration of fibrous proteins based
on the physical configuration of their molecules, rather than their
chemical composition. Fibrous proteins can be demonstrated by selective
staining with small or large molecule dyes (trichrome method), and silver
impregnation (reticulin method), and specific dye-protein interactions
(e.g., Congo red stain for amyloid).
2) Globular proteins are more water soluble than the other classes of
proteins and they have several functions including transporting,
catalyzing, and regulating. Almost all globular proteins are soluble and
many are enzymes. Globular proteins are found in blood and tissue fluids
in amorphous globular form with very thin or non-existent membranes.
Examples of globular proteins are albumins, alpha globulin, beta
globulin, fibrin, gamma globulin, hemoglobin immunoglobulins and
myoglobin.
3) Membrane Proteins play several roles including relaying signals
within cells, allowing cells to interact, and transporting molecules.
Membrane proteins often serve as receptors or provide channels for polar
or charged molecules to pass through the cell membrane. Examples of
membrane proteins include c-myc, estrogen receptor, glycophorin D,
histones, hydrolases, oxidoreductases, and p53.
NUCLEIC ACIDS
Nucleic acids are usually combined with basic proteins to form
nucleoproteins. They consist of alternate sugar and phosphate groups, with a
nitrogenous base attached to each sugar group. There are two major nucleic
acids. Deoxyribonucleic acid (DNA) contains a 5-carbon sugar deoxyribose, and
is mainly found in the nucleus of the cell. The four nitrogenous bases of DNA
are purines (adenine and guanine) and pyrimidines (thymine and cytosine).
Ribonucleic acid (RNA) is found in the cytoplasm, and to a lesser extent in the
nucleus, particularly in the nucleolus. It contains ribose sugar with attached
nitrogenous bases of purines (adenine and guanine) and pyrimidines (uracil and
cytosine).
Principles of Staining
Staining depends largely on the attachment of dyes to proteins that have
both positively and negatively charged groups. Phosphate groups of DNA also
are important in nuclear staining. A tissue section contains many proteins that
differ in their isoelectric points. At an ideal pH, certain tissue components will
show a relative acidophilia whereas others display a relative basophilia.
If the pH is adjusted outside the range of about 4 - 8, some groups cease to
ionize altogether, and their staining is inhibited almost completely. For carboxyl
groups the relevant pH is about 4 and below. As the pH alters, there is an impact
on staining, but the impact is gradual. When the pH is at 1.5, no carboxyl groups
are involved with staining. However, phosphate radicals are still ionizable at that
pH and nuclear staining can still be done, although it tends to be highly selective.
Adding a very small amount of acetic acid to 1%-2% aqueous solutions of
neutral red, or the addition of borax to methylene blue can sharpen nuclear
staining. This small amount of acid slightly inhibits the ionic staining of
background tissues, making the largely unaffected ionic nuclear staining appear
more prominent. The final pH is usually about 4, depending on the buffering
capacity of other ingredients. This increases the ionization of tissue amino
groups. Similarly, minor adjustments to make solutions more alkaline can be
done with compounds such as sodium tetraborate (borax) or sodium carbonate.
Acidophilic dyes are attracted to acidic substances, such as mitochondria
and collagen which are anionic (negatively charged) at physiologic pH. Many
proteins are acidophilic at physiologic pH. The aniline dye, eosin, is an acid dye
that stains cytoplasm, muscle, and connective tissues various shades of pink and
orange. Eosin is a red or pink stain that is Acidic / Negative. It binds to
acidophilic substances (such as proteins - which are basic and positively
charged).Commonly substituted acid dyes include orange G or phyloxine. Eosin
is an acid aniline dye that will bind to and stain basic structures (or negatively
charged structures), such as cationic amino groups on proteins. Cytoplasm,
muscle, connective tissue, colloid, red blood cells and decalcified bone matrix all
stain pink to pink/orange/red with eosin. For acidic dyes, the dye in question can
often in addition be selective for particular acidophilic components. I.e. a
technique called the Mallory staining technique uses three acidic dyes: aniline
blue, acid fuchsin and orange G, which selectively stain collagen, cytoplasm and
red blood cells respectively.
Most proteins in the cytoplasm are basic because they are positively charged
due to the arginine and lysine amino acid residues. These form salts with acid
dyes containing negative charges, like eosin. Therefore, eosin binds to these
amino acids/proteins and stains them pink. This includes cytoplasmic filaments
in muscle cells, intracellular membranes, and extracellular fibers.
Basophilic dyes are attracted to basic substances, which are cationic
(positively charged) at physiologic pH. Proteins are basophilic at a pH lower
(more acidic) than their isoelectric point. When the environmental pH is below a
protein's isoelectric point, the protein is negatively charged and hence basophilic.
DNA/RNA in the nucleus, and RNA in ribosomes in the rough endoplasmic
reticulum are both acidic because the backbones of nucleic acids are negatively
charged due to presence of phosphate groups. The negatively charged acidic
backbones form salts with basic dyes containing positive charges. Therefore,
dyes like hematoxylin will bind to DNA and RNA and stain them violet.
Proteoglycans are basophilic due to sugars and esterified sulfates which are
negative at physiologic pH. For basic dyes, the reaction of the anionic groups of
cells (these include the phosphate groups of nucleic acids, sulphate groups of
glycosaminoglycans, and carboxyl groups of proteins) depends on the pH at
which they are used.
Hematoxylin (derived from hematein) is not strictly a basic dye, but it is used
with a 'mordant' that makes this stain act as a basic dye that is generally used in
combination with aluminum ions. The mordant (aluminum salt) binds to the
tissue, and then hematoxylin binds to the mordant, forming a tissue-mordant-
hematoxylin linkage. DNA (heterochromatin and the nucleolus) in the nucleus,
and RNA in ribosomes and in the rough endoplasmic reticulum are both acidic,
so nuclear heterochromatin stains blue and the cytoplasm of cells rich in
ribonucleoprotein also stains blue or purple. The cytoplasm of cells with
minimal amounts of ribonucleoprotein tends to be lavender in color. This
difference in staining intensity is useful in differentiating one tissue from
another. Common basic dyes often substituted for hematoxylin include
methylene blue, toluidine blue, thionine, carmine, basic fuchsin, and azure II. It
may be used after any fixation except fixation with osmium tetroxide.
Frequently, basic dyes (methylene blue, toluidine blue, thionine) will react with a
specific tissue component and impart to it a color different from that of the dye
itself. This phenomenon is called metachromasia and the cell or tissue
components that exhibit it are said to be metachromatic.
Hematoxylin & Eosin Stain (H & E)
The staining method involves application of hemalum, a complex formed
from aluminum ions and hematin (an oxidation product of hematoxylin).
Hemalum colors nuclei of cells (and a few other objects, such as keratohyalin
granules and calcified material) blue. The nuclear staining is followed by
counterstaining with an aqueous or alcoholic solution of eosin Y, which colors
eosinophilic structures in various shades of red, pink and orange.
The staining of nuclei by hemalum occurs due to binding of the dye-metal
complex to DNA, but nuclear staining can be obtained after extraction of DNA
from tissue sections. The mechanism is different from that of nuclear staining by
basic (cationic) dyes such as thionine or toluidine blue. Staining by basic dyes
occurs only from solutions that are less acidic than hemalum, and it is prevented
by prior chemical or enzymatic extraction of nucleic acids. There is evidence to
indicate that coordinate bonds, similar to those that hold aluminum and hematein
together, bind the hemalum complex to DNA and to carboxy groups of proteins
in the nuclear chromatin.
The eosinophilic structures are generally composed of intracellular or
extracellular protein. Most of the cytoplasm is eosinophilic. Red blood cells are
stained intensely red.
Histochemical Identification of Proteins
Histochemical methods are used to demonstrate the presence of amino acid
molecules rather than whole protein molecules. They are based upon
identification of specific linkages or groups within the amino acid molecule such
as the protein bound amino groups (e.g. in lysine), phenyl groups (e.g. in
tyrosine), disulfides and sulfhydryl linkages (e.g., in cystine and cysteine),
indole groups (e.g., in tryptophan and tryptamine) and guanidyl groups (e.g., in
arginine). Methods for histochemical detection of specific proteins or of
characteristic groups in proteins are few, and some of those presently available
are somewhat cumbersome for routine histological use, or result in formation of
highly unstable color complexes. If the various amino acids in tissues are to be
demonstrated histochemically, it is important to avoid fixatives such as mercuric
chloride which react with amino acid groups. Neutral buffered formol saline is
the most commonly used fixative for amino acid histochemistry.
Many of the microscope slides are prepared using material embedded in
plastic rather than in paraffin. The plastic embedding medium (glycol
methacrylate) is commonly used in histology and pathology because some of the
artifacts (shrinkage and distortion) caused by hot paraffin can be largely avoided.
Furthermore, plastic embedded sections can be cut at 1 or 2 micrometers thick,
allowing for improved visualization of the tissue. Because H&E stains can be
problematic with methacrylate, some of the plastic embedded material is stained
using a combination of substitute dyes that look similar to H&E but without the
problems.
Staining of ribboned epon sections 0.3-2 μ thick with two intense acid dyes,
Aniline Blue Black and Coomassie Brilliant Blue R 250 for light microscopy
allows precise localization of proteins and, because the sections are ribboned,
facilitates three-dimensional visualization of the structures involved. The dyes
may be used in combination with the periodic acid-Schiff reaction and with
autoradiography.
Alkaline Fast-Green Method for Basic Proteins (especially protamines and
histones)
Fast Green is an acid dye that stains basic groups in the tissues, particularly
basic protamines and histones which have higher isoelectrical points than the pH
of the staining solution. All other proteins have lower isoelectric points: their
basic groups are not ionized and therefore will not stain. Trichloracetic acid is
used to remove nucleic acid which would otherwise mask the basic group of
protamines and histones.
Peracetic Acid-Alcian Blue for Cystine and Cysteine
Peracetic Acid oxidizes cystine and cysteine, forming strong cysteic acid
which is stained blue-green by a basic dye. Sakaguchi’s test for arginine uses
NaOH, sodium hypochlorite (Milton's reagent) and pyridine chloroform,
producing orange-red color on objects containing arginine. The mechanism is
not known.
Proteins with enzyme properties can be demonstrated by histochemical
methods, based on their effect on specific substrates. Recently developed
immunocytochemical methods have also been successful in identifying and
localizing specific proteins such as immunoglobulins, enzymes and hormones.
Proteoglycans
Proteoglycans are proteins that are heavily glycosylated. The basic
proteoglycan unit consists of a "core protein" with one or more covalently
attached glycosaminoglycan chain(s). The chains are long, linear carbohydrate
polymers that are negatively charged under physiological conditions due to the
occurrence of sulfate and uronic acid groups. Proteoglycans occur in the
connective tissue and are a major component of the extracellular matrix. The
protein component of proteoglycans is synthesized by ribosomes and
translocated into the lumen of the rough endoplasmic reticulum. An inability to
break down proteoglycans is characteristic of a group of genetic disorders, called
mucopoly-saccharidoses. The inactivity of specific lysosomal enzymes that
normally degrade glycosaminoglycans leads to the accumulation of
proteoglycans within cells causing a variety of disease symptoms, depending
upon the type of proteoglycan that is not degraded.
Alcian Blue-PAS Staining for Proteoglycans
This is a combined method utilizing the properties of both the PAS and
Alcian blue methods to demonstrate the full complement of tissue proteoglycans.
The rationale of the technique is that by first staining all the acidic mucins with
Alcian blue, those remaining acidic mucins which are also PAS positive will be
chemically blocked and will not react further during the technique. Those neutral
mucins which are solely PAS positive will subsequently be demonstrated in a
contrasting manner. Where mixtures occur, the resultant color will depend upon
the dominant moiety.
STAINING OF NUCLEIC ACIDS
Demonstration of nucleic acids depends upon either reaction of the dyes with the
phosphate groups, or production of aldehydes from the sugar (deoxyribose). No
histochemical methods are available to demonstrate the nitrogenous base.
• Feulgen technique - demonstrates sugar
• Methyl green pyronin technique - demonstrates phosphate
• Acridine orange (by fluorescent method)
• Gallocyanin-chrome alum method demonstrates both DNA and RNA
This last staining method does not separate the two nucleic acids since it
stains both DNA and RNA blue, and suitable extraction technique must be used.
DNA is demonstrated by the Feulgen technique which uses 1 M HCl at
60°C to hydrolyze and break the purine-deoxyribose bond, thereby exposing the
aldehydes which are then stained by Schiff's reagent.
RNA is demonstrated by the methyl green-pyronin technique where methyl
green stains the nuclei by binding preferentially and specifically to DNA, while
pyronin binds to RNA and stains the cytoplasm red.
Phosphate groups of DNA and RNA are acidic and combine with
hematoxylin and other basic dyes by salt linkages. Nucleic acids are best
preserved in alcoholic and acidic fixatives (especially Carnoy's fluid that
contains both alcohol and glacial acetic acid). Formalin is an acceptable fixative,
but has only limited reaction with DNA and RNA. Strong inorganic acids such
as nitric or hydrochloric acid will extract nucleic acids, and should be avoided. A
number of routine histological fixatives such as Zenker's, Susa's, and Carnoy's
do not allow specific nuclear staining. The presence of mercuric chloride in
Zenker's and Susa's fluids is apt to introduce a staining artefact since a divalent
metal ion might serve as a link between carboxyl groups and acid dye ions.
Feulgen Staining for Nuclear DNA (Pearse 1968; Carson 1983)
Feulgen stain is a staining technique used to identify chromosomal material or
DNA in cell specimens. Acid hydrolysis removes purine bases from the DNA,
thereby unmasking free aldehyde groups. Feulgen reaction allows DNA in situ to
be specifically stained based on the reaction of Schiff or Schiff-like reagents
with the free aldehyde groups in proportion to the DNA concentration in the cell
which results in the purple staining. RNA is not hydrolyzed by the HCl treatment
and, thus, the reaction is DNA-specific.
The specimen is subjected to warm (60°C) hydrochloric acid, then to Schiff
reagent. Optionally, the sample can be counterstained with Light Green SF
yellowish. Finally, it is dehydrated with ethanol, cleared with xylene, and
mounted in a resinous medium. DNA should be stained red. The background, if
counterstained, is green.
The Feulgen reaction is considered to be specific for DNA. The other nucleic
acid, RNA, does not react the same way either because the acid hydrolysis
causes it to dissolve away, or because of the hydroxyl group present in ribose
which has lost its oxygen in deoxyribose. It is important to note, however, that if
acid hydrolysis is applied for too long, especially at elevated temperature, then
DNA also can be completely removed, and this is a known source of failure in
the technique. It depends on acid hydrolysis of DNA, therefore fixing agents
using strong acids should be avoided.
FIXATION: Zenker’s, Carnoy’s, Formalin, Kelly's, Regaud's, Flemming’s,
and Susa (except Bouin's and Brasil's fixatives due to their acid components
which may hydrolyze nucleic acid in varying degrees and duration). 5µ
paraffin sections of neutral buffered formalin fixed tissue are suitable.
Fixatives containing strong acids should be avoided as this method depends
on the acid hydrolysis of DNA, and acids in some fixatives may pre-
hydrolyze the tissue (such as picric acid in Bouin's aqueous formal-picric-
acetic mixture).
Formula:
Solution A (1 M hydrochloric acid)
Hydrochloric acid (concentrated) 83.5 ml
Distilled water 916.5 ml
Solution B: Schiff's reagent (to prepare)
Boil 200ml of distilled water, remove flask from Bunsen and add 1g
of basic fuchsin.
Allow to cool to 50°C.
Add 2g of potassium metabisulphate while mixing.
Cool to room temperature and add 2ml of concentrated hydrochloric
acid mix and stand in the dark overnight.
Add a large amount of activated charcoal, shake well and filter. The
solution should be clear/pale yellow.
Store at 4°C
Solution C: Bisulfite Solution
10% potassium metabisulfite 10 ml
1M hydrochloric acid 10 ml
Distilled water 180 ml
Method:
1. Deparaffinize sections to water.
2. Rinse sections in 1 M HCl at room temperature.
3. Place sections in 1 M HCl at 60°C for 8 minutes (for Carnoy or
formalin fixed tissue).
4. Rinse in 1 M HCl at room temperature for 1 minute.
5. Transfer sections to Schiff's reagent for 45 minutes.
6. Rinse sections in bisulfite solution for 2 minutes.
7. Repeat wash in bisulfite solution for 2 minutes.
8 Repeat wash in bisulfite solution (3rd wash) for 2 minutes.
9. Rinse well in distilled water.
10. Counterstain (optional) in 1% light green for 2 minutes.
11. Wash in water.
12. Dehydrate through alcohols to xylene and mount.
Enzyme histochemistry serves to detect early metabolic changes in biopsy
and autopsy tissue before manifestation on H&E staining or
immunohistochemistry. For critical enzyme histochemistry, it is essential not to
inactivate an appreciable proportion of the enzyme to be studied, especially
'soluble' enzymes, such as alkaline phosphatase. The precision of the
histochemical localization varies inversely with the length of time required in
the incubation medium to achieve an appreciable response.
Enzymes are tissue components that serve as catalysts for most biological
reactions. They may be bound to specific cell components (such as
mitochondrial enzymes) or may be free and soluble in the cytoplasm and body
fluids. With few exceptions (e.g., chloroacetate esterase), frozen sections are
generally required for histochemical demonstration of enzymes. Tissues frozen
to -70°C or below are usually well preserved, with little loss of enzyme activity.
The use of unfixed frozen sections is confined to enzymes extremely
sensitive to denaturation such as the dehydrogenases. Disadvantages of unfixed
frozen sections include mechanical disruption by freezing and thawing, uneven
section thickness, and diffusion of soluble enzymes and co-factors leading to
loss of reproducibility and false localization. Although, ideally, enzyme
histochemistry should be performed on unfixed sections, so as to avoid
potential artifacts inherent in chemical fixation, it is usually considered
necessary to briefly fix sections in order to stop the 'soluble' enzymes from
becoming lost into the incubation medium.
In general, the best fixative for all enzymes is chilled acetone, which, of all
fixatives, causes the least inactivation. Cytological details are not so good but
they are satisfactory for most purposes if the slices are thin enough (not over 3
mm. in thickness). Acetone is especially recommended when staining for acid
phosphatase. For other enzymes, cold 90-100% ethyl alcohol is preferable
because it gives a better cytological fixation and the tissue is easier to handle.
Most hydrolytic enzymes are reasonably resistant to formalin and can be fixed
in 10 per cent formalin (preferably adjusted to pH 6-6.5 with a small amount of
phosphate buffer). Methyl alcohol is entirely unsuitable as a fixative, because it
destroys most enzymes.
Metal precipitation is the most common technique for histochemical
demonstration of enzymes, based on simultaneous capture or coupling, which
involves the use of a suitable substrate and a diazonium salt. The primary
reaction product ("coupler"), formed by the hydrolytic reaction between
substrate and the enzyme, combines with the diazonium salt to produce a highly
colored and insoluble final reaction product. The substrate must be soluble in
water and in the buffer medium used, to allow maximum hydrolysis by the
enzyme.
Another technique uses soluble substrates which undergo molecular
rearrangement to give a colored insoluble reaction product after enzyme
hydrolysis.
Enzymes for which histochemical techniques are known belong in one of the
two groups:
(1) Oxidative enzymes
(2) Hydrolytic enzymes
OXIDATIVE ENZYMES
Oxidative enzymes (i.e. tyrosinase, peroxidase, monoamine oxidase,
cytochrome oxidase) catalyze the reaction between substrate and atmospheric
oxygen. They can be demonstrated by simultaneous coupling method, which
involves oxidation of the substrate and subsequent reduction of a tetrazolium
salt, resulting in the formation of a relatively insoluble formazan deposit at the
site of enzyme activity. The two tetrazolium salts commonly used as hydrogen
acceptors are monotetrazolium (MTT) which forms a lipid-soluble finely
granular formazan, and ditetrazolium chloride-nitro (NBT) that forms a lipid-
insoluble, highly colored formazan deposit on the site of enzyme activity.
The oxidative enzymes fall into three groups:
(a) Dehydrogenases, (b) oxidases, and (c) peroxidases
a) Dehydrogenases
The dehydrogenases catalyze the transfer of hydrogen to immediate
acceptors other than oxygen and peroxides, although the ultimate acceptor may
be oxygen. They require coenzymes, and some of them are also linked to the
diaphorase or cytochrome systems.
Dehydrogenases are enzymes that remove hydrogen from the substrate and
transfer it along a hydrogen acceptor (oxidative) pathway. The released
hydrogen is accepted by the coenzymes NAD or NADP, or the dehydrogenase
enzyme itself can act as an acceptor, in which case no coenzyme is required.
They can be demonstrated by the transferring the released hydrogen ions into
tetrazolium salt to produce formazan deposits. They are rather delicate enzymes
which are largely destroyed by any sort of fixation and completely destroyed by
embedding. They are rapidly inactivated even on standing.
NADH diaphorase demonstrates mitochondria and the fine detail of the
sarcoplasmic reticulum of the fiber. It is used to detect very minor or early
structural abnormality in the sarcoplasmic reticulum network of the fiber, as
well as mitochondrial abnormalities. The principle of their demonstration is the
observation of the change in color of suitable hydrogen acceptors when they are
reduced by the enzyme. The three main types of compounds used are: (1)
Methylene blue - is reduced to colorless leuco-methylene blue and thus
indicating the sites of activity by bleaching. The methylene blue technique is
not recommended because the negative image does not permit good
localization of the enzyme, and the method is cumbersome.
(2) Tetrazolium method - where the substrates are reduced to bright red,
purplish, or blue formazans, which are insoluble in water and soluble in
fats. The tetrazolium method is the most sensitive and results in
excellent localization of the enzyme, except for an occasional secondary
staining of fat droplets by formazan. The formation of dye should be
quite noticeable after about 5-10 minutes of incubation if good active
material is used.
(3) Tellurite - reduced to insoluble black elementary tellurium. The
tellurite method is considerably less sensitive, but it gives nice, sharp
pictures.
Even without the use of any substrate, positive reactions will be obtained
in most cases on account of the presence of various endogenous substrates in
the tissues, which can be avoided by rinsing the sections before incubation. The
optimum pH for the enzymatic activity is pH 7.3-7.6.
The tissue need not be absolutely fresh; refrigeration for 4 hours at 4°C
does not cause any noticeable loss of activity. Fixation in chilled acetone for 4
hours causes only 40 percent inactivation of the enzyme. Use frozen sections
25-50 µ thick because thinner sections often fail to stain. Incubation time at
37°C. Range from 20 minutes to 3 hours. Elementary tellurium is black or
brown-black. The sections can be counterstained with hematoxylin or carmine;
they should be mounted in glycerol or glycerol-jelly.
b) Oxidases
Oxidases are a group of enzymes having in common the property of
catalyzing the oxidation of various substrates, mainly phenols and amines, in
the presence of atmospheric oxygen. Substrate specificity is usually only
relative since the same enzyme can attack a number of substrates (although
while the same substrate may be attacked by a number of different enzymes.
Polyphenol oxidases (PPOs) are enzymes belonging to a group of copper-
containing metalloproteins. They are members of the oxido-reductases that
catalyze the oxidation of a wide range of phenolic compounds by utilizing
molecular oxygen. The ability of polyphenol oxidases to act on phenolic
compounds makes them highly useful biocatalysts for various biotechnological
applications.
Indophenol oxidase (Cytochrome oxidase)
Indophenol Oxidase (Cytochrome Oxidase) is a copper-yielding
cytochrome complex that catalyzes the oxidation of ferrocytochrome c to
produce ferricytochrome c and 2H2O. It forms part of Complex IV of the
respiratory chain. A deficiency of one or more of the polypeptides of this
complex results in neuronal loss in the brain leading to psychomotor retardation
and neurodegenerative disease.
To stain for cytochrome oxidase, a mixture of solutions of a phenol or
naphthol and an aromatic diamine is slowly oxidized on exposure to air, with
the formation of intensely colored (usually blue) indophenol dyes, most of
which are insoluble in water but very soluble in oils and fats. The reaction is
immediate in the presence of strong oxidants, such as dichromate or
hypochlorite. Cytochrome oxidase is a sensitive enzyme that is readily
destroyed by drying and by fixation with formalin.
Tyrosinases
Tyrosinases are copper containing monooxygenases that catalyze the
production of melanin and other pigments from tyrosine by oxidation. If
uncontrolled, increased tyrosinase activity may result in increased melanin
synthesis thereby causing melanoma. Decreasing tyrosinase activity has been
targeted to prevent conditions related to the hyperpigmentation of the skin.
Tyrosinase deficiency is associated with various forms of albinism. L-
tyrosinase is the initial substrate for melanin biosynthesis and its conversion to
dopaquinone is catalyzed by tyrosinase, whose expression is reported in
melanocytes and melanomas. The loss of activity with heat and marked
reduction of activity in slightly acid solution are properties common to all
known tyrosinases.
An improved histochemical method for demonstrating tyrosinase activity
has been described which utilizes small amounts of dopa to shorten the induction
period for the enzymatic oxidation of tyrosine. This method is a rapid,
reproducible and specific way to localize tyrosinase in tissue section. The
histochemical tyrosine-dopa method for tyrosinase has greater specificity than
the dopa oxidase method; it is more rapid, more reproducible and more sensitive
than the method using tyrosine alone as substrate; it is simpler, more direct and
more rapid than the auto-radiographic-histochemical method.
Dopa oxidase
Melanin pigment is formed from the amino acid, dihydroxy-phenylalanine
(DOPA), by the action of a specific oxidative enzyme (dopa oxidase) that is
responsible for the oxidation of l-tyrosine to dopa and dopa quinone. L-DOPA
is produced from the amino acid L-tyrosine by the enzyme tyrosine
hydroxylase and is the precursor to the neurotransmitters dopamine,
norepinephrine (noradrenaline), and epinephrine (adrenaline) collectively
known as catecholamines.
A specific dopa oxidase, which does not act on any substrate except dopa,
is easily inactivated by chemical and physical agents, and is present only in
cells concerned with the elaboration of melanin (chromatophores).
To demonstrate dopa oxidase, use frozen sections of fresh material or of
tissue fixed for only a few hours in 5 per cent formalin. Longer fixation may
cause partial inactivation of the enzyme. The sections are rinsed very briefly in
distilled water and transferred a 0.1 per cent solution of
dihydroxyphenylalanine, buffered with a phosphate buffer to pH 7.3-7.5, in an
open dish for 4-5 hours.
Temperature should be between 20° and 37°C. It is advisable to change the
incubating solution once or twice to avoid the deposition of a melanin
precipitate (by spontaneous oxidation of the substrate). At pH 7.7 the reaction
is much faster (about 1 hour), but the danger of precipitates is also increased.
Rinse sections, counterstain as desired, dehydrate, and mount. The sites of dopa
oxidase activity will appear dark brown-gray or brown-black. For greater
contrast, melanin formed during the reaction can be blackened by silver
c) Peroxidases
Peroxidases are heme-containing enzymes that use hydrogen peroxide as
the electron acceptor to catalyze a number of oxidative reactions. Enzymes of
the peroxidase group catalyze the reduction or transfer of oxygen from
hydrogen peroxide and other peroxides to a variety of substrates. This
biochemical function confers them a role in many different and important
biological processes including defense mechanisms and immune response.
Chemically, most if not all of the peroxidases appear to be heme proteins. They
are quite resistant to various chemical and physical agents, especially to acids
and heat.
For the histochemical demonstration of peroxidase, benzidine, naphthol,
and various leuco-dyes are utilized in the presence of hydrogen peroxide.
Benzidine is oxidized to a blue or brown dye; naphthol to a purple-black one,
while leuco-dyes are re-colorized to their original shades. It is important to run
controls without peroxide because positive reactions may be obtained even in
its absence Myeloperoxidase is a peroxidase enzyme that is most abundantly
expressed in neutrophil granulocytes (a subtype of white blood cells). It is a
lysosomal protein stored in azurophilic granules of the neutrophil and released
into the extracellular space during degranulation. It has a heme pigment, which
causes its green color in secretions rich in neutrophils, such as pus and some
forms of mucus. It also oxidizes tyrosine to tyrosyl radical using hydrogen
peroxide as an oxidizing agent.
As a hemoprotein, hemoglobin can, in the presence of hydrogen peroxide,
also act as a peroxidase. The peroxidase properties of hemoglobin, when it
reacts with physiologic oxidants such as hydrogen peroxide, have been
advocated to propagate oxidative cell and tissue damage. Horse radish
peroxidase is, a heme-containing enzyme that utilizes hydrogen peroxide to
oxidize a wide variety of organic and inorganic compounds; it is commercial
used as a component of clinical diagnostic kits and for immunoassays.
Peroxidase stain is a method for demonstrating peroxidase granules in
some neutrophils and in eosinophils where the enzyme promotes the oxidation
of benzidine by hydrogen peroxide. In the benzidine reaction the optimal
concentration of hydrogen peroxide is about 0.01 M in the case of myeloid
granules and much higher, about 0.1 M, in the case of hemoglobin. The activity
of myeloid granules is rapidly destroyed by heating to 75°-80°C or by
extraction with a warm chloroform-methyl alcohol mixture. The activity of
hemoglobin is entirely resistant to these influences.
Smears are fixed with acetone, alcohol, or formalin-alcohol (1:10). For
tissues the same fixatives or formalin-saline are recommended. It is important
that the fixative should not hemolyze the red cells, thereby causing a diffusion
of the reaction for hemoglobin. Frozen sections, are the best, although in most
cases excellent results are obtained after celloidin- or paraffin-embedding.
HYDROLYTIC ENZYMES
Hydrolytic enzymes are complex catalytic proteins that use water to break
down protein, carbohydrate, nucleic acids, starch, fats, phosphate esters and
other molecules into their simplest units. Most of the hydrolytic enzymes
demonstrable histochemically belong to the group of esterase; that is, they
hydrolyze esteric linkages. Depending on the substrate, hydrolysis yields an
acid ion and an alcohol or a phenol (or, in the case of phosphamidase, an acid
and an amide). Reactions have been devised for the demonstration of either the
acid or the alcoholic moiety.
The acids are demonstrated by their regular precipitation reactions with
metal ions, most often calcium, lead; cobalt, iron, and copper. The precipitate
formed is usually colorless and not easily seen under the microscope.
Therefore, it must be transformed into a colored, easily observable compound.
In the case of the heavier metals the sections can be treated directly with a
suitable reagent. Soluble sulfides, for example, will transform precipitates of
lead, cobalt, iron and copper into blackish, exceedingly insoluble sulfides.
The alcoholic (or phenolic) moiety can be demonstrated only if it is a thio-
alcohol or a naphthol. Some thio-alcohols form highly insoluble precipitates
with heavy metals; naphthols can be visualized as azo dyes. Under suitable
conditions, diazonium salts will couple with aromatic amines and hydroxy
compounds (and, in addition, with a number of heterocyclic compounds) to
form brightly colored, very insoluble azo dyes. Hydroxides (phenols and
naphthols) couple optimally at an alkaline reaction (pH 8 and up), whereas
amines couple at an acid reaction (pH 3-5).
Phosphatases
Phosphatases are enzymes capable of hydrolyzing organic phosphate
esters. Alkaline phosphatases exhibit maximum activity at a higher pH (9.0)
while acid phosphatases exhibit peak activity at a lower pH (around 5.0). Of the
large variety of phosphatases, histochemical methods are available for
nonspecific alkaline phosphatase, for 5- nucleotidase, acid phosphatase, and
phosphamidase. Some of the phosphatases (hexosediphosphatase, and
adenosine triphosphatase of muscle) are so sensitive that they will not tolerate
fixation and/or embedding. All fixatives cause considerable inactivation of both
alkaline and acid phosphatase. Good results may be obtained with refrigerated
tissue fixed as late as 48 hours after removal, although there may be some
blurring of the picture, owing to diffusion of the enzyme.
Alkaline Phosphatases
Phosphatases with a pH optimum around 9 occur in most organs. The
largest group, the nonspecific enzyme(s), will hydrolyze any monoester of
phosphoric acid and, in addition, nucleic acids. As a rule, aromatic esters are
hydrolyzed optimally at a higher pH (9.7-10) than aliphatic ones (pH 8.1- 9).
All enzymes of the group are activated by Mg. Frozen sections show a higher
activity than embedded tissues. However, there is a danger of loss of enzyme
by diffusion, since fixation in acetone or alcohol will not render the enzyme
completely and irreversibly insoluble. Alkaline phosphatase is not too sensitive
to minor variations in temperature; incubation at any temperature between 30°
and 45°C will do. The cheapest and easiest available substrate is
glycerophosphate, any commercial brand of which can be used; the
recommended concentration is 0.01-0.03 M.
The histochemical technique used for demonstrating the enzyme, alkaline
phosphatase, blackens the cells and tissue containing the enzyme. In general,
the degree of blackness is correlated with the quantity of enzyme present. Exact
localization is complicated by the fact that the enzyme may shift its
intracellular position during the histological procedure. Sections are incubated
in a solution consisting of sodium glycerophosphate and calcium nitrate.
Through the action of the phosphatase, calcium phosphate is precipitated in
those regions where the enzyme is present. For visualization in sections, the
calcium phosphate is converted into cobalt phosphate and finally into cobalt
sulfide, which is black.
The calcium phosphate method is based on the principle that, if sections
are incubated with glycerophosphate at an alkaline reaction in the presence of
Ca++ ions, the phosphate ions liberated will be precipitated at the site of
formation as insoluble Ca phosphate. The latter is then transformed, in a second
step, into metallic silver or black cobalt sulfide.
The pH of the solution should be between 9 and 9.8. Below pH 9 the
intensity of the reaction rapidly declines. Only sites of highest activities will be
stained after short periods, of incubation (up to 2 hours), and on greatly
prolonged incubation diffusion artifacts may become very disturbing.
Borax is better avoided because it inhibits the hydrolysis of
glycerophosphate and of certain other substrates and because of its
incompatibility with higher concentrations of Ca++. The concentration of the
buffer should be 0.05-0.1 M.
Gomori calcium method for alkaline phosphatase (Bancroft 2008)
This technique is used to demonstrate the enzyme, alkaline phosphatase. It
blackens the cells and tissue containing the enzyme. In general, the degree of
blackness is correlated with the quantity of enzyme present. Exact localization
is complicated by the fact that the enzyme may shift its intracellular position
during the histological procedure. Sections are incubated in a solution
consisting of sodium glycerophosphate and calcium nitrate. Through the action
of the phosphatase, calcium phosphate is precipitated in those regions where
the enzyme is present. For visualization in sections, the calcium phosphate is
converted into cobalt phosphate and finally into cobalt sulfide, which is black.
The technique involves simultaneous coupling reaction with sodium B-
glycerophosphate as the substrate that is hydrolyzed by the enzyme to produce
phosphate ions. This primary reaction product (phosphate) reacts with calcium
ions to form calcium phosphate, which is then treated with cobalt nitrate to
produce cobalt phosphate, which becomes visible as a black precipitate when
treated with dilute ammonium sulfide.
Fixation:
Formol calcium at 4°C
Sections:
Prefixed cryostat sections preferred
Solutions:
Incubating medium
2% sodium B-glycerophosphate 2.5 ml
2% sodium veronal 2.5 ml
2% calcium nitrate 5.0 ml
1% magnesium chloride 0.25 ml
Distilled water 1.25 ml
The final pH of the incubating medium should be between 9.0 and
9.4. The sodium veronal acts as the buffer vehicle, while magnesium
chloride acts as an enzyme activator.
Method:
1. After suitable fixation, bring sections to water.
2. Place in incubating medium at 37°C for 25 minutes to 6 hours,
depending on type of section. (Cryostat sections require the shortest
time.)
3. Wash well in distilled water.
4. Treat sections with 2% cobalt nitrate for 3 minutes.
5. Wash well twice in distilled water.
6. Immerse sections in 1% ammonium sulfide for 2 minutes.
7. Wash well in distilled water.
8. Counterstain in 2% methyl green (chloroform extracted).
9. Wash well in running tap water.
10. Mount in glycerin jelly.
Results:
Alkaline phosphatase activity brownish-black
Nuclei green
Acid Phosphatase
Acid phosphatase reaction: This histochemical technique is used to
recognize lysosomes due to their acid phosphatase content. Sections are
incubated in a solution containing a lead phosphate. The phosphate is released
by enzymatic activity of acid phosphatase (lysosomal enzyme) and is
precipitated as lead phosphate, and is then converted to lead sulfide, a black
deposit.
Acid phosphatase stain is used to o identify macrophages in necrotic fibers
and abnormal lysosomal activity in muscle fibers. Acid phosphatases, as a rule,
are not activated by Mg and almost invariably are greatly inhibited by fluoride.
The original histochemical method for acid phosphatase utilizes the hydrolysis,
of glycerophosphate at pH 5 in the presence of Pb++ ions. Fixation in cold
acetone and embedding in paraffin are recommended.
Gomori Lead method for acid phosphatase (Bancroft 2008)
This technique is used to demonstrate lysosomes due to their acid
phosphatase content. Sections are incubated in a solution containing a lead
phosphate. The phosphate is released by enzymatic activity of acid phosphatase
(lysosomal enzyme) and is precipitated as lead phosphate, and is then converted
to lead sulfide a black deposit.
In this metal precipitation technique, sodium B-glycerophosphate is used
as the substrate in a buffer medium at pH 5.0 to form phosphate ions as the
primary reaction product, which is then treated with lead ions to form lead
phosphate as final reaction product. Treatment with ammonium sulfide allows
the precipitate of lead sulfide to be demonstrated and seen at the site of enzyme
activity.
Fixation:
Formol calcium at 4°C
Sections:
Prefixed cryostat sections preferred
Solutions:
Incubating Medium:
0.05 M acetate buffer pH 5.0 10 ml.
Sodium B-glycerophosphate 32 mg.
Lead nitrate 20 mg.
The lead nitrate must be dissolved in the buffer before sodium B-
glycerophosphate is added.
The pH of the incubating medium should be approximately 5.0.
Method:
1. After suitable fixation, bring sections to water.
2. Place sections in incubating medium at 37°C for 30 minutes to 2
hours.
3. Wash in distilled water.
4. Immerse in 1% ammonium sulfide (fresh) for 2 minutes.
5. Wash well in distilled water.
6. Counterstain in 2% methyl green.
7. Wash in tap water.
Results:
Acid phosphatase activity black
Nuclei green
Technical Considerations:
Fixation of thin blocks in cold acetone, rapid embedding at a temperature
not exceeding 56° C, and the use of recently cut sections and of the
correct substrate mixture will produce good results in a vast majority of
instances; however, occasional unexplainable failures cannot be
eliminated completely.
Toluene or xylene should not be used; they will cause some fading of the
stain.
Above pH 6, the activity of alkaline phosphatase rapidly increases, and
one may obtain combination pictures of the distributions of acid and
alkaline phosphatase. The choice of substrates is rather limited because
the lead salts of most phosphoric esters are very insoluble at pH 5 or
higher.
5-Nucleotidase
The substrates of the enzyme are 5-nucleotides (muscle adenylic acid,
inosinic acid and, possibly, adenosine triphosphoric acid). The pH optimum is
around 7.8, but the enzyme is quite active even at pH 9. The histochemical
method for 5-nucleotidase is very similar to the method for alkaline phosphatase;
in fact, it may be identical except for the substrate. At this pH +/- 8.3, the 5-
nucleotidase is fully active, while the activity of alkaline phosphatase is only
about one-third of the maximum. A slight disadvantage of this low pH is a
tendency toward diffusion artifacts. It can be offset almost completely by a
sufficiently high concentration of Ca ions. While nonspecific alkaline
phosphatase will attack both glycerophosphate and the two nucleotides, 5-
nucleotidase cannot hydrolyze substrates other than 5-nucleotide.
Lead method for 5-nucleotidase (Wachstein & Meisel 1957)
In this metal precipitation technique, the substrate adenosine-5-phosphate is
hydrolyzed by the enzyme to phosphate ions in the presence of magnesium
which serves as an activator. The primary reaction product (phosphate) is
precipitated by lead ions to produce lead phosphate, which is then converted to
brown lead sulfide precipitate following treatment with ammonium sulfide.
Fixation:
Unfixed preferred, or formol calcium at 4°C
Sections: Cryostat, free floating
Incubating Medium:
1.25% adenosine-5-phosphate 4 ml
0.2M Tris buffer, pH 7.2 4 ml
2% lead nitrate 0.6 ml
0.1 M magnesium sulfate 1 ml
Distilled water 0.5 ml
Method:
1. Place in incubating medium at 37°C for 30 minutes to 1 hour.
2. Fix in formol saline if unfixed sections are used.
3. Transfer sections with glass rod to distilled
water.
4. Repeat wash in fresh distilled water.
5. Treat with 1% ammonium sulfide for 3 minutes.
6. Wash well in distilled water.
7. Repeat wash.
8. Mount on microscope slides and allow to partially dry.
9. Mount in glycerin jelly.
Result:
5-nucleotidase blackish-brown deposits.
Note:
Free floating cryostat sections of unfixed materials are recommended
because of considerable loss of enzyme activity when prefixed sections are
used.
Adenosine Triphosphatase (ATPase) (Dubowitz 1985; Carson 1983)
ATPase methods are used in combination to distinguish between Type 1
and Type 2 fibers, and to further subdivide the Type 2 fibers into 2A, 2B and
2C subtypes. This distinction is diagnostically important since some muscle
diseases have characteristic patterns of loss, atrophy or grouping of specific
fiber types or subtypes. Some types of structural fiber abnormality (e.g.,
periodic paralysis) are also demonstrated by the ATPase methods.
The technique for demonstrating ATPase involves metal precipitation,
using the adenosine triphosphate as substrate to form phosphate as primary
reaction product. The phosphate ion is then precipitated either by lead to form
lead phosphate, which is converted to dark brownish-black precipitate after
treatment with ammonium sulfide. An alternative way of precipitating
phosphate is by calcium-cobalt method (as with alkaline phosphatase) whereby
calcium is added to form calcium phosphate, which is then treated with cobalt
nitrate to produce a precipitate of cobalt phosphate. For skeletal muscle
biopsies, the substrate is incubated at different pH levels (pH 9.4 using 0.1 M
glycine buffer, or pH 4.2 and pH 4.6 using 0.1M veronal-acetate to distinguish
between type 1, and types 2A, 2B and 2C fibers.)
Nonspecific esterase:
Nonspecific esterase stain is used to identify cell types containing esterases that
have a characteristic ability to split esters under particular conditions. Increased
staining is seen in sites of lysosomal and macrophage activity. In one staining
method, α-naphthyl acetate is enzymatically hydrolyzed, liberating a free
naphthol compound. This then couples with a diazonium compound, forming
dark brown-red or black colored deposits at sites of non-specific esterase
activity. This enzyme is detected primarily in monocytes, macrophages and
histiocytes, and is normally absent in granulocytes. Neuromuscular and
myotendinous junction are also positive for esterase:
α- Napththyl acetate method for nonspecific esterase (Bancroft 2008)
This method uses α-naphthyl acetate as a substrate that releases α-naphthol
during enzyme hydrolysis. The α-naphthol is then coupled with a suitable
diazonium salt (fast blue B or pararosanilin-HCl) to produce an insoluble dye at
the site of enzyme activity.
Fixation:
Formal calcium at 4°C
Sections:
Prefixed cryostat preferred.
Solutions:
a. Substrate solution
α- naphthyl acetate 50 mg
Acetone 5 ml
b. Buffer solution
Disodium hydrogen phosphate 2.83 gm
Distilled water 100 ml
c. Sodium nitrite solution
Sodium nitrite 400 mg
Distilled water 10 ml
d. Pararosanilin-HCl stock solution
Pararosanilin hydrochloride 2 gm
2 M hydrochloric acid 50 ml
Heat gently, cool to room temperature and filter
e. Distilled water
Incubating medium:
Solution a 0.25 ml
Solution b 7.25 ml
Solution c 0.4 ml
Solution d 0.4 ml
Solution e 2.5 ml
Equal parts of solutions (c) and (d) should be mixed together before
adding to the incubation medium. Adjust pH to 7.4 with additional
solution (b) if necessary.
Method:
1. After suitable fixation, bring sections to water.
2. Incubate sections in incubating medium at 37°C for 2 to 20 minutes.
3. Wash in running water.
4. Counterstain in 2% methyl green (chloroform extracted).
5. Wash well in tap water.
6. Dehydrate rapidly through fresh alcohol to xylene and mount in
DPX.
Results:
Esterase reddish brown
Nuclei green
lndoxyl acetate method for nonspecific esterase (Holt 1958; Bancroft 2008)
This technique uses bromo-indoxyl acetate as the substrate to produce
bromoindoxyl which is then oxidized to an insoluble azo dye.
Fixation: Formol calcium at 4°C
Sections: Prefixed cryostat preferred
Incubating Medium:
5 bromo-4-chloro-indoxyl acetate 1 mg
Ethanol 0.1 ml
Tris buffer (0.2M), pH 7.2 2 ml
Potassium ferricyanide 17 mg
Potassium ferrocyanide 21 mg
Calcium chloride 11 mg
Distilled water 7.9 ml
The 5-bromo-4-chloro-indoxyl acetate is dissolved in ethanol and the
buffer is then added. The remaining chemicals are dissolved in the
distilled water and the solution is mixed. The final solution must be
freshly prepared just prior to use.
Method:
1. Bring prefixed cryostat sections to water.
2. Incubate sections in incubating medium at 37°C for 15 to 60
minutes.
3. Rinse in tap water.
4. Counterstain in Mayer's carmalum for 5 minutes.
5. Rinse in tap water.
6. Mount in glycerin jelly or dehydrate, clear in xylene and mount in
DPX.
Results:
Esterase activity blue
Nuclei red
Chloroacetate esterase
Also called specific esterase, naphtol AS-D chloroacetate esterase is a useful
stain that facilitates the identification of neutrophil polymorphs in both frozen
and paraffin sections. Chloroacetate is enzymatically hydrolyzed by "specific
esterase," liberating a free naphthol compound. This then couples with a
diazonium compound, forming highly colored deposits at sites of enzyme
activity. This enzyme is usually considered specific for cells of granulocytic
lineage and may be used to detect neutrophils in peripheral blood, bone marrow
or tissue sections which have been paraffin embedded.
Chloroacetate Esterase (Leder 1979; Carson 1983)
Sections:
Frozen or 4µm paraffin sections to demonstrate mast cells and cells of
granulocytic lineage.
Formula:
Veronal Acetate Stock Solution.
Na acetate (trihydrate) 1.94 g
or (anhydrous) 1.2 g
Na di-ethyl barbiturate (sodium barbitone) 2.9 g
Distilled water 100 ml
Veronal Buffer pH 9.1
Veronal acetate stock soln. 50.0 ml
Distilled water 197.5 ml
0.1N HCl (COSHH C H I) 2.5 ml
To prepare 4% Pararosaniline (Basic Fuchsin) stock
Pararosanilin 2 g
Distilled water 40 ml.
Heat until almost boiling, cool to room temperature.
Then Add
2 N HCl 10 ml.
Filter into bottle.
Pararosanilin (Basic Fuchsin) Solution
Equal amounts of A and B (i.e. 4 drops of each using a 1 ml disposable
pipette).
(A) 4% Pararosanilin in 20% HCl
(B) 4% Na nitrite (0.04 g/ml)
Method
1. Fix cryostat section in buffered formalin or take paraffin sections to
water.
2. In a 50 ml beaker take 4 drops 4% Pararosanilin hydrochloride
solution, add 4 drops freshly prepared 4% Na nitrite solution, and mix for
1 min. The mixture should turn straw colored.
3. Add 20 ml Veronal acetate buffer solution pH 9.1 adjust to pH 6.3
using N HCl.
4. Weigh out 0.01g Naphthol AS-D chloroacetate and dissolve in 0.5 ml
Dimethyl formamide.
5. Add this solution to the Pararosanilin/Buffer mixture, the resulting
solution should turn flocculent pale pink in color.
6. Filter onto slides and leave 20-30 min at room temperature.
7. Wash in water.
8. Lightly counterstain with Hematoxylin.
9. Wash in water, do not differentiate, blue in Scott’s tap water.
10. Dehydrate clear and mount in Permount.
1. One change of 70% ethanol – 10 Dips
2. Two changes of 95% ethanol – 10 Dips each
3. Two changes of 100% ethanol – 10 Dips each
4. Three changes of Xylene – 10 Dips each
5. Coverslip with Permount
TISSUE
Fig. 22-4. Avidin-Biotin Complex (ABC) Technique
Method:
1. Paraffin section or frozen section to water and rinse in PBS-Tween 20
twice for 2 minutes each time.
2. Perform antigen retrieval if necessary.
3. Incubate sections in normal serum – species the same as secondary
antibody.
Note: Since this protocol uses avidin-biotin detection system,
avidin/biotin block may be needed based on tissue type.
4. Incubate sections in primary antibody at appropriate dilution for 1
hour at room temperature or overnight.
Note: No serum blocking is needed if antibody diluent is used.
5. Rinse in PBS-Tween 20 buffer 3 times for 2 minutes each time.
6. Incubate sections in peroxidase blocking solution for 10 minutes at
room temperature.
Note: For acetone fixed frozen sections, perform this peroxidase
blocking step using 0.3% H2O2 in methanol prior to primary antibody
incubation to avoid tissue destruction.
7. Rinse in PBS-Tween 20 buffer 3 times for 2 minutes each time.
8. Incubate sections in biotinylated secondary antibody in PBS for 30
minutes at room temperature.
9. Rinse in PBS-Tween 20 buffer 3 times for 2 minutes each time.
10. Incubate sections in ABC-Peroxidase Solution for 30 minutes at room
temperature.
11. Rinse in PBS-Tween 20 buffer 3 times for 2 minutes each time.
12. Incubate sections in peroxidase substrate solution.
13. Rinse in PBS-Tween 30 buffer 3 times for 2 minutes each time.
14. Counterstain with counterstain solution.
15. Rinse in running tap water for 2-5 minutes.
16. Dehydrate through 95% ethanol for 1 minute, and then 100% ethanol
2 times for 3 minutes each time.
17. Clear in xylene 2 times for 5 minutes each time.
18. Coverslip.
Labeled Streptavidin Biotin Technique (LSAB Procedure)
A labeled avidin-biotin (LAB) method has been recently introduced and is
found to be 4 to 8 times more sensitive than the old ABC method. Also, avidin
has now been largely replaced by the use of streptavidin, leading to the labeled
streptavidin-biotin (LSAB) method. The staining sequence consists of primary
rabbit (or mouse) antibody, biotinylated anti-rabbit (or anti-mouse)
immunoglobulin and streptavidin-enzyme conjugate. The color reaction is then
developed with the appropriate substrate/ chromogen, such as horseradish
peroxidase.
Method:
1. Paraffin section or frozen section to water and rinse in PBS-Tween
20 times for 2 minutes each time.
2. Perform antigen retrieval if necessary.
3. Incubate sections in normal serum – species same as secondary
antibody.
Note: since this protocol uses avidin-biotin detection system,
avidin/biotin block may be needed based on tissue type.
4. Incubate sections with primary antibody at appropriate dilution for 1
hour at room temperature or overnight. No serum blocking is needed if
antibody diluent is used.
5. Rinse in PBS-Tween 20 buffer 3 times for 2 minutes each time.
6. Incubate sections in peroxidase blocking solution for 10 minutes at
room temperature.
Note: For acetone fixed frozen sections, perform this peroxidase
blocking step using 0.3% H2O2 in methanol prior to primary antibody
incubation to avoid tissue destruction.
7. Rinse with PBS-Tween 20 buffer 3 times for 2 minutes each time.
8. Incubate sections in Biotinylated secondary antibody in PBS for 30
minutes at room temperature.
9. Rinse with PBS-Tween 20 buffer 3 times for 2 minutes each time.
10. Incubate sections in HRP-Streptavidin solution for 30 minutes at
room temperature.
11. Rinse with PBS-Tween 20 buffer for 3 times for 2 minutes each
time.
12. Incubate sections in peroxidase substrate solution.
13. Rinse with PBS-Tween 20 buffer for 3 times for 2 minutes each
time.
14. Counterstain with hematoxylin.
15. Rinse in running tap water for 2-5 minutes.
16. Dehydrate through 95% ethanol for 1 minute, and then 100%
ethanol 2 times for 3 minutes each time.
17. Clear in xylene 2 times for 5 minutes each time.
18. Coverslip.
Immunofluorescence Method
Immunofluorescence technique has become an emerging prime alternative
to chromogenic approaches to IHC as it has the ability to generate high-
resolution images for protein localization studies and also the capacity to
quantitate the fluorescent signal. Immunofluorescent methods are extensively
used to detect antibodies, particularly for the diagnosis of glomerular disease in
frozen sections of renal biopsies. It is also applied to skin biopsies of patients
with systemic lupus and vasculitis, to examine the pattern of deposition of
immunoglobulins. In addition, technical advances in microscope development
and fluorophore have widened the selection of colors to use for both single- and
multi-color fluorescence microscopy greater than ever.
Immunofluorescence (IF) method is used in the evaluation of cells in
suspension, cultured cells, tissue, beads and microarrays for the detection of
specific proteins on both fresh and fixed samples. Its practical application in
laboratory include: (a) the analysis of antigens in fresh, frozen or fixed tissues,
sub-cellular localization of antigens in tissue culture monolayers and observation
of bacterial or parasitic specimens, (b) detection and localization of the presence
or absence of specific DNA sequences on chromosomes; and, (c) defining the
spatial-temporal patterns of gene expression within cells/tissues.
Fluorescence and phosphorescence are both types of luminescence. When
molecules with luminescent properties absorb light, they emit light of a different
wavelength. In the immunofluorescence method, antibodies are chemically
conjugated to fluorescent dyes such as fluorescein isothiocyanate or tetramethyl
rhodamine isothiocyanate. These labeled antibodies bind (directly or indirectly)
to the antigen of interest which allows for antigen detection through fluorescence
techniques. The fluorescence can then be quantified using a flow cytometer,
array scanner or automated imaging instrument, or visualized using fluorescence
or confocal microscopy.
Successful immunofluorescent techniques depend on adequate preservation
of substrate antigens, adequacy of antibody conjugate, careful staining and
incubation procedures, and quality of the fluorescence microscope.
Direct immunofluorescence technique for solid tissue biopsies
This is usually performed on thin (2 to 5 µm) cryostat sections of fresh
unfixed material, mounted on slides that have been previously coated with
gelatin adhesive or poly-L-lysine (supplied by Sigma) at 1:10 dilution. In this
technique, the tissue is reacted directly with a fluorescein-conjugated antibody
specific for the material being sought within the tissue.
Solutions:
Tris-Buffered Saline Wash (0.005M TBS)
Distilled water 1 liter
Sodium chloride 8 gm
TRIS (hydroxymethyl methylamine) 0.6 gm
1M HCl 4.4 ml
If necessary, adjust final pH to 7.6 with either 1 M HCl or 0.2M
Tris solution.
Substrate: DAB (Diaminobenzidine tetrahydrochloride)
DAB 5 mg
Tris-HCl buffer (pH 7.6) 10 ml
Horse radish peroxidase 0.1 ml
(Freshly prepared and added just before use.)
Method:
1. Bring sections to Tris-buffered saline (TBS), drain off, and
incubate in non-immune serum.
2. Drain off and wipe around section.
3. Incubate in optimally diluted peroxidase-labeled primary antibody
for 1-15 hours (traditional direct method) at ambient temperature or
4°C; or in EPOS peroxidase pre-diluted antibody (DAKO) for 1-2
hours at ambient temperature (enhanced polymer one-step method).
4. Gently wash in TBS.
5. Incubate in freshly prepared DAB solution at room temperature
until a dark brown reaction product is obtained, usually after 5 to 10
minutes. The reaction end-product resists alcohol dehydration and
clearing in xylene.
6. Rinse in TBS and wash in running water.
7. Dehydrate through 95% ethanol for 1 minute, and then 100%
ethanol 2 times for 3 minutes each time.
8. Clear in xylene 2 times for 5 minutes each time.
9. Coverslip.
Results:
Apple-green fluorescence when fluorescein is used as fluoro-chrome;
Orange-red fluorescence with rhodamine conjugates
Connective tissue constitutes a non-living framework within the various
organs, and is made up of various cell components that are found in between
other tissues everywhere in the body. It is one of the four types of biological
tissue that support, connect, or separate different types of tissues and organs in
the body. The other three types are epithelial, muscle, and nervous tissue.
Organs represent various combinations of these four basic tissue types, which
thus comprise the entire body. Each tissue type retains its connective tissue
forms a framework upon which epithelial tissue rests and within which nerve
tissue and muscle tissue are embedded. In the central nervous system the outer
membranes, the meninges that cover the brain and spinal cord are composed of
connective tissue. Blood vessels and nerves travel through connective tissue.
The individual bones of the skeleton are held firmly together by ligaments, and
muscles are attached to bone by tendons, both of which are examples of dense
connective tissue in which many fiber bundles are associated in parallel array
to provide great tensile strength.
The most common connective tissue cells are fibroblasts (which secrete
collagen and other elements of the extracellular matrix), adipocytes
(mesenchymal cells which store fat) mast cells, macrophages and lymphocytes
(cells with immune function which participate in inflammation). Connective
tissue matrix has a ground substance, consisting of water that is stabilized by
and fibers stabilized by glycosaminoglycans, proteoglycans, and glycoproteins.
In some areas, the connective tissue is loosely organized and highly cellular; in
others, its fibrous components predominate; and in still others, the ground
substance may be its most conspicuous feature. The anatomical classification
of the various types of connective tissue is based largely upon the relative
abundance and arrangement of these components. Individual connective tissue
cells are normally separated from one another by varying amounts of
extracellular matrix.
1. Loose connective tissue connects the epithelial surfaces to the
underlying structures and permits free passage of nutrients. It appears
as a loose network of numerous bundles of collagenous fibers with
some elastic and reticular fibers, admixed with fibroblasts, and small
blood vessels as well as lymphatic vessel. One very specific type of
loose connective tissue is the basement membrane, which is the well-
defined layer of extracellular matrix that serves as a base for epithelial
tissues.
2. Adipose tissue is derived from areolar tissue, made up mostly fat cells
surrounded by a well-developed network of reticular fibers, and is
associated with some capillaries and lymphatic vessels. Adipose or fat
cells are connective-tissue cells that receive glucose and fatty acids
from the blood and convert them to lipid, which accumulates in the
body of the cell as a large oil droplet. This distends the cell and
imposes upon it a spherical form. The nucleus is displaced to the
periphery, and other metabolically active constituents of the cell are
confined to a thin rim of cytoplasm around the large central droplet of
lipid. Where they accumulate in such large numbers that they become
the predominant cellular element, they constitute the fat or adipose
tissue of the body.
3. Dense connective tissue is made up of organized, dense masses of
collagenous fibers and fibroblasts that are oriented in the same
direction, as seen in the tendons and ligaments that support and connect
skeletal muscles to the skeleton because of their tensile strength. The
ubiquitous fibroblasts are the principal active cells of connective tissue,
occurring as long spindle-shaped cells stretched along bundles of
collagen fibrils. When organs are injured, cells known as fibrocytes,
which reside in the stroma, are stimulated to develop into fibroblasts.
The fibroblasts then migrate into the defect and deposit an abundance
of new collagen, known as dense connective tissue that forms a fibrous
scar.
4. Cartilage is a fairly dense network of collagenous fibers encased in or
mixed with an amorphous or homogenous intercellular substance of
chondroitin sulfate. It has abundant ground substance and a consistency
of gel that makes the tissue rigid and resistant to compression. The cells
of cartilage, called chondrocytes, are isolated in small lacunae within
the matrix. Cartilage is enclosed by the perichondrium, a dense fibrous
layer lined by cells that have the capacity to secrete hyaline matrix. The
cartilaginous skeletal elements present in fetal life are subsequently
replaced by bone. Cartilage develops from mesenchymal cells that
differentiate into chondroblasts, mature into chondrocytes, and lay
down intercellular substance.
5. Bone tissue is a type of mineralized connective tissue that contains
collagen and calcium phosphate, a mineral crystal. Bone tissue itself is
mostly extracellular material composed of a hard, mineralized form of
calcium phosphate. Interspersed within the hard extracellular
component of bone are osteocytes which are mature bone cells.
Osteocytes are the cells which secrete the calcium phosphate that
hardens and forms the bones. Calcium phosphate gives bone its
firmness.
6. Reticulin (Reticular Connective Tissue) made up of reticular fibers
are distinguished by their tendency to form fine-meshed networks
around cells and cell groups and by virtue of their property of staining
black, because of adsorption of metallic silver, when they are treated
with alkaline solutions of reducible silver salts. Reticulin is made up of
extracellular delicate fine branching fibers. They are usually not visible
in routine hematoxylin-eosin staining method. The reticulin fibers are
argyrophylic and therefore are best stained by silver impregnation
technique. They may have a faint pinkish color with van Gieson's stain.
Periodic Acid Schiff (PAS) also stains reticulin purplish red. This is not,
however, a satisfactory stain due to the delicate nature of the reticulum
fibers.
7. Elastic Tissue is present in the skin, ligaments, aorta, arterial elastic
lamina, and lung. Elastic fibers are composed of the protein elastin that
are highly distensible and, when broken, recoil like rubber bands. The
elastin that is found in the walls of arteries withstands the hemodynamic
stresses that the flow of blood imposes on the artery wall. They are, in
part, responsible for the loss of elasticity of the skin and of the blood-
vessel walls in old age. They are made up of fine, intertwining wavy
filaments that are insoluble in organic and inorganic solvents (unlike
collagen that is soluble in 2% acetic acid). They are extremely resistant
to hot water, to strong alkali, and even to digestion with the proteolytic
enzyme trypsin. They can be digested, however, by a specific enzyme,
elastase, present in the pancreas.
8. Blood Plasma is the watery component that serves as the matrix of
blood containing many dissolved substances, such as proteins, glucose,
mineral ions, hormones, carbon dioxide. The cells found within this
matrix are red and white blood cells, as well as platelets. Plasma, which
constitutes 55% of blood fluid, is mostly water (92% by volume) is the
main medium for excretory product transportation), and blood cells
themselves.
Reticulin Stain
Silver impregnation techniques for staining of reticulin depend on local
reduction and selective precipitation of silver by the carbohydrate aldehyde
groups of reticulin. Most are prepared by producing a precipitate from silver
nitrate with sodium, potassium, or ammonium hydroxide or with lithium or
sodium carbonate. Ammoniacal solution of silver carbonate is reduced by
reticulin to dark brown silver oxide which is precipitated on the fibers, and then
reduced to black metallic silver by formalin. Unreduced silver is removed by
sodium thiosulfate solution. Toning with yellow gold chloride is a valuable step
in removing the yellowish discoloration in the background caused by colloidal
metallic silver, which is replaced with gold chloride. Toning gives a very pale
gray background, which is better for photography and which also improves
subsequent counterstaining.
Reticular fibers are commonly demonstrated by the use of stains involving
silver solutions. These stains rely on the impregnation of silver ions to the fibers
and subsequent reduction of those silver ions to their visible metallic form.
Reticular fibers are argyrophilic in that they possess the ability to adsorb silver
from solution but are unable to reduce it to visible metallic form without the use
of a reducing solution to drive the reaction. Demonstration of reticular fibers
generally employs an ammoniacal silver solution as a source of silver ions. An
ammoniacal silver solution consists of a strong base (ammonium hydroxide)
added to an aqueous silver nitrate solution to form a silver diamine complex.
This method commonly calls for oxidation and sensitization of tissue prior to
application of this complex. Oxidation (potassium permanganate/periodic acid)
enhances subsequent staining, while the sensitizing agent (uranyl nitrate/dilute
silver nitrate) initially binds to the tissue component of interest. Silver ions
provided by the ammoniacal silver solution impregnate the fibers and replace the
sensitizer in the metal-organic compound. Subsequently, by the action of a
reducing agent (formalin), the silver diamine complex is reduced to visible
metallic form. Metallic silver is converted by use of a toning reagent (gold
chloride) to metallic gold, which is more stable and offers better contrast and
clarity. Unreduced silver and excess gold chloride are removed (sodium
thiosulfate), and the tissue section is then counterstained, if desired. Nuclear fast
red or light green counterstains are commonly used.
Gomori's Silver Impregnation Stain for Reticulin (Gomori 1937, Suvarna
2013, Luna 1986) Reticulin stains are silver stains based on the argyrophilic
properties of reticulin fibers. Reticulin fibres have little natural affinity for silver
solutions so, they must be treated with a suitable solution, (2.5% iron alum) and
potassium permanganate to sensitize areas within the fibres where silver
deposition can be initiated. The silver is in a form readily able to precipitate as
metallic silver (diamine silver solution). The optimal pH for maximum uptake of
silver ions is pH 9.0. A reducing agent, formalin, causes deposition of silver in
the form of metal. Any excess silver in the unprecipitated state is removed by
treating with sodium thiosulfate solution. “Toning” with gold chloride renders
the preparation permanent by replacing silver metal with metallic gold and
changes the color of reticulin fibers from brown to black. The two most common
reticulin stains are the Gomori’s stain and Gordon & Sweet’s stain.
Fixation: Formalin
Preparation of Solution:
1. Add 4 to 5 ml. of 10% potassium hydroxide to 20 ml. of 10%
silver nitrate solution. Mark the fluid level on the flask and pour off
the supernatant.
2. Wash the precipitated silver with distilled water once or twice until
the water is quite clear, and fill up to the fluid level with fresh
distilled water. This step will result in a cleaner background.
3. With continuous shaking, add 28% ammonia water, drop by drop,
until the precipitate is all dissolved.
4. Carefully add 10% silver nitrate solution, drop by drop, until the
precipitate that forms easily disappears on shaking.
5. Make the solution up to twice its volume with distilled water; i.e.,
add an equal volume of water.
6. If stored in a well-stoppered bottle in the dark, the solution may be
used for 2 days.
Method:
1. Bring paraffin sections of formalin-fixed material down to water.
2. Oxidize in 0.5% aqueous potassium permanganate for 1 to 2
minutes.
3. Rinse in tap water for 2 minutes.
4. Place in 2% aqueous potassium metabisulfite for 1 minute, or until
colorless.
5. Wash in tap water for 2 to 5 minutes.
6. Place in 2% aqueous ferric ammonium sulfate for 1 minute to
sensitize.
7. Wash in tap water for 2 minutes and then for 30 seconds in each of
two changes of distilled water.
8. Allow impregnation in the silver solution for 1 minute.
9. Rinse in distilled water for 20 seconds.
10. Reduce for 3 minutes in 20% formalin (10 ml. formaldehyde
with 40 ml. distilled water).
11. Wash in tap water for 3 minutes.
12. Tone in 0.2 gold chloride solution for 10 minutes.
13. Rinse in distilled water.
14. Place in 2% aqueous potassium metabisulfite for 1 minute to
reduce toning.
15. Fix in 2% aqueous sodium thiosulfate (hypo) for 1 minute.
16. Wash in tap water for 2 minutes.
17. Dehydrate, clear, and mount.
Results:
Reticulin fibers black
Note:
All ammoniacal silver solutions must be prepared fresh, to avoid
formation of explosive silver compounds with aging.
All glassware used, especially before and for the silver bath and
for the preparation of the silver solutions, must be thoroughly
washed with nitric acid and then rinsed in several changes of
distilled water.
The forceps used for handling slide during processing should be
nonmetallic, i.e., plastic, until after the sodium thiosulfite stage, to
prevent the nonspecific precipitation of silver on the slide.
Washing of the sections with distilled water must be thorough,
especially before impregnation.
Dust (not light) is the greatest single factor that causes
deterioration and precipitation of silver solutions, and therefore
must be avoided.
Avoid splashing or using glass rods without careful washing
between solutions.
Use glass-distilled water to avoid precipitating silver.
Mount the paraffin sections well to an albuminized slide and
thoroughly dry before staining the section, to prevent detaching
them from the slides due to the high alkalinity of the silver
solutions.
Inactivate any unused solution by adding excess of sodium
chloride solution or of dilute hydrochloric acid.
Ensure that both the ammonium hydroxide and potassium
hydroxide are fresh and full strength. Keep both well stoppered
when not in use.
Ammoniacal silver solutions can be explosive when allowed to
dry. Immediately after use neutralize the silver solution with
saturated sodium chloride and discard.
For the ammonium hydroxide, pour sufficient for use from the
stock bottle into a beaker, then immediately re-stopper the stock
bottle. Do not return excess ammonium hydroxide to the stock
bottle.
After making the ammoniacal silver solution, smell the solution to
ensure it has only a faint smell of ammonia. If the smell of ammonia is
strong it indicates that too much ammonium hydroxide has been
adde d. If so, it is preferable to make the solution again. Improperly
made ammoniacal silver solutions can affect the quality of the
impregnation.
Untoned sections give dark brown reticulin fibres on a paler brown
background. Toning for about 15 seconds to produce brown-black
reticulin fibres on a pale grey-brown background.
The staining solution (silver nitrate, potassium hydroxide, and
ammonia water) should be carefully prepared to avoid having silver
precipitate.
Clean glassware (used for preparing silver solution) with glassware
cleaning solution. Wash thoroughly before use with tap water and use
distilled water for the final rinse.
It is important not to over dissolve the precipitate at any stage as this
will result in a decrease in sensitivity
Silver nitrate crystals stored at room temperature will gradually take on
a grayish-violet color. This does not occur when silver nitrate is kept
refrigerated, even after several years.
Fig. 25-1. Reticulin stain of liver biopsy showing the fine interlobular septae
Reticulin Stain -Gordon and Sweets’ Method (1936) (Suvarna 2013, Carson
2009)
In this method, the tissue is oxidized by potassium permanganate to
enhance subsequent staining of reticular fibers. The excess permanganate
solution is removed by oxalic acid. The iron alum serves as sensitizer and is
subsequently replaced by silver solution to form silver oxide. Silver from silver
oxides is selectively deposited on the reticulin fibres, which appear black after
conversion to reduced silver, by the reducing agent (formalin). Gold chloride is
used as a toner to give a clearer background and unreduced silver is removed
by treatment with sodium thiosulphate.
Specimen:
Standard paraffin sections
Fixation:
10% neutral buffered formalin
Reagents:
(A) Silver Solution:
To 5mL of 10% Silver nitrate solution add strong ammonia until the
precipitate formed is just dissolved. Avoid excess of ammonia. Add
5mL of 3% Sodium hydroxide solution. Re-dissolve the precipitate by
adding strong ammonia drop by drop until the resultant solution
retains a faint opalescence. If at this stage any excess ammonia is
present, indicated by the absence of opalescence, add a few drops of
10% silver nitrate solution to produce a light precipitate. Make up to
50 mL with distilled water. Store in a dark bottle at 4øC - keeps 3
months. Filter before use (approximately 2 mL per slide). Note: All
glassware should be rinsed in distilled water and dried before use.
(B) Acidified Potassium Permanganate
0.5% Potassium permanganate 190 mL
3% Sulphuric acid 10 mL
(C) 1 % Oxalic Acid
(D) 4 % Iron alum (Ammonium Ferric Sulphate)
(E) 10 % Formalin (not buffered) - dilute in tap water not distilled
(F) 0.2 % Gold Chloride (Sodium Chloro-aurate)
(G) 5 % Sodium Thiosulfate
(H) 1 % Neutral Red (C.I. 50040)
Procedure:
1. Deparaffinize and hydrate to distilled water
2. Acidified potassium permanganate 2 min
3. Wash in water
4. 1 % Oxalic acid 2 min
5. Wash well in distilled water
6. 4 % Iron alum 10 min
7. Wash in distilled water
8. Silver solution (filter 2mLs per slide) 1 min
9. Rinse in distilled water
10. 10 % Formalin 2 min
11. Wash in water followed by distilled water
12. 0.2 % Gold chloride 2 min
13. Rinse in distilled water
14. 5 % (Sodium thiosulphate) 2 min
15. Wash in water
16. Counterstain with 1 % Neutral Red 2 min
17. Dehydrate rapidly, clear and mount
Note:
Dehydrate rapidly as the neutral red counterstain is removed in alcohol.
Use PLASTIC forceps, not metal.
Results:
Reticulin fibers Black
Nuclei Black
Background Red
COLLAGEN
Collagen forms a coarser extracellular framework than reticulin.
Collagenous fibers are found in ligaments, tendons, cartilage and bone. Its
doubly refractile, coarse connective tissue fibers stain yellow, lavender or
brown on silver impregnation, and red with van Gieson 's stain. Collagen and
most reticulin fibers stain selectively with acid aniline dyes (aniline blue, acid
fuchsin, methyl blue or indigo carmine) from fairly strong acid solutions. The
most commonly used acid is picric acid, which also acts as a counterstain for
muscle and cytoplasm. Collagen may be differentially stained by any of the
following techniques: 1. Van Gieson's stain
2. Masson's Trichrome stain
3. Mallory's Aniline Blue stain
4. Azocarmine stain
5. Krajian's Aniline Blue stain
Van Gieson's Stain for Collagen (Carson 2009) Van Gieson's Stain is the
simplest method of differential staining of collagen and other connective tissue
that uses a mixture of picric acid and acid fuchsin. In van Gieson stained
preparations collagen stains dark red while other tissue components appear in
varying shades of grey (nuclei) and yellow (cytoplasm). Areas of dense regular
connective tissue are usually easy to identify in these preparations. Coarse
collagen fibers are aligned with each other with only very narrow opens spaces
between them. Like in most other connective tissues, there will be only a few
cells between the fibers. Their cytoplasm is difficult to identify but the nuclei
can be seen scattered among the collagen fibers. Nuclei are often elongated, and
their long axis runs parallel to the course of the collagen fibers.
Fixation:
Mercuric chloride fixative, although formol-saline also gives good results.
Solution:
Saturated aqueous picric acid 95 ml.
1 % acid fuchsin 5 ml
This may be kept as a stock solution, but a freshly prepared solution of 10
ml. saturated aqueous picric acid and 1.5 ml. of 1 % acid fuchsin may give
better staining quality.
Method:
1. Sections to alcohol.
2. Stain with Weigert's iron hematoxylin for 15 minutes.
3. Wash in running water for 15 minutes.
4. Rinse with distilled water.
5. Place in Van Gieson's stain for 5 minutes.
6. Rinse in distilled water.
a. Rinse rapidly in 70% alcohol.
b. Dehydrate rapidly in absolute alcohol, clear and mount in
neutral balsam. Acid medium, if used for mounting, will make
stains fade rapidly.
Results:
Nuclei brownish black to black
Collagen (fibrous connective tissue) pink or deep red
Muscle, Cytoplasm, RBC and Fibrin Yellow
Notes:
1. If the duration of staining is strictly followed, there is no need to
differentiate in 1% acid alcohol. The sections are instead, differentiated
by picric acid in the Van Gieson Stain.
2. Differentiation of collagen and smooth muscles may be
accomplished in steps 5 and 6. Van Gieson's stain consists of acid
fuchsin (readily soluble in alcohol) and picric acid (readily soluble in
water). Washing with appropriate solvent will accentuate one and
remove the other.
3. Nuclei are stained with alum hematoxylin, but are readily
decolorized by picric acid. Iron hematoxylin may be used.
4. Young fibrils do not take the deep red stain imparted to mature
collagen.
Masson's Trichrome Stain (Luna 1968, Sheehan 1980)
This is often used to stain connective tissue. Trichrome - means the
technique produces three colors. Nuclei and other basophilic structures are
stained blue, cytoplasm, muscle, erythrocytes and keratin are stained bright-red.
Collagen is stained green or blue, depending on which variant of the technique
is used.
Masson 's trichrome stain uses dyes in acid solution involving nuclear
staining with iron hematoxylin, followed by cytoplasmic staining with a red
dye (e.g., Ponceau phosphotungstic acid, phosphomolydic acid or both, and
fixed staining of fibers with a blue or green stain (e.g. aniline blue or light
green). With the Masson’s trichrome stain Bouin’s solution is used initially as a
mordant to link the dye molecules to the tissue components of interest. Nuclei
are stained with Weigert’s hematoxylin, an iron hematoxylin, which is resistant
to decolorization by subsequent acidic staining solutions. Application of
Biebrich-scarlet-acid-fuchsin stains all acidophilic tissue elements such as
cytoplasm, muscle and collagen. Subsequent treatment by phosphomolybdic/
phosphotungstic acid serves as a decolorizer causing the Biebrich-scarlet-acid-
fuchsin to diffuse out of the collagen fibers while leaving the muscle cells red.
Subsequent application of aniline blue or methyl blue will stain the collagen
after which, 1% acetic acid is employed to properly differentiate the tissue
section.
The Masson’s trichrome stain consists of sequential staining with iron
hematoxylin which stains nuclei black; Biebrich scarlet which stain cytoplasm
including muscle red and aniline blue or aniline light green which stain
collagen blue or green respectively. The classic nuclear stain for the trichrome
technique is either Weigert’s or Heidenhain’s iron hematoxylin. Unlike
aluminum-based hematoxylins, the iron hematoxylin is more resistant and
therefore is not decolorized by the subsequent acid staining solutions. Mercuric
chloride or picric acid fixation (Bouin’s solution) gives best results. If tissue
was fixed in neutral buffered formalin, staining is enhanced by using Bouin's
fluid as a mordant.
Fixation: Zenker, Helly, Bouin's and formol sublimate solutions are strongly
recommended. Formalin-fixed sections should be premordanted in Bouin's
fluid for 1 hour at 56°C or overnight at room temperature prior to staining.
Sections: Paraffin sections.
Solutions:
Solution A
Acid fuchsin 0.5 gm.
Glacial acetic acid 0.5 ml.
Distilled water 100 ml.
Solution B
Phosphomolybdic acid 1.0 gm.
Distilled water 100 ml.
Solution C
Methyl blue 2.0 gm.
Glacial acetic acid 2.5 ml.
Distilled water 100 ml.
Method:
1. Sections to water.
2. Wash until the yellow color (from Bouin's) is gone, or remove
mercury deposits with iodine-thiosulfate sequence, as i ndicated.
3. Stain the nuclei either with Weigert's iron hematoxylin for 10 to 30
minutes 4. Wash in water.
5. Differentiate the nuclear stain with 1 % acid alcohol.
6. Wash in running tap water for 10 minutes until bl ue .
7. Rinse in distilled water.
8. Stain with acid fuchsin solution (A) for 5-10 minutes.
9. Rinse in distilled water.
10. Treat with phosphomolybdic acid mordant (B) for 5 minutes or
until collagen is decolorized, and only muscle, RBC and fibrin
remain. Discard acid solutions after use.
11. Rinse in distilled water.
12. Counterstain in methyl blue solution (C) for 5 to 10 minutes.
13. Wash well in 1% acetic acid for 1 to 3 minutes.
14. Blot, dehydrate in absolute alcohol, clear and mount.
Results:
Muscle, RBC and keratin red
Nuclei blue-black
Collagen and mucus blue
Notes:
• Fixing the tissue with 10% neutral buffered formalin will not yield
optimal trichrome staining results. The longer those tissues remain in
formalin fixatives, the less effective the staining will be. After formalin
fixation, mordanting the tissue sections with a picric acid solution such as
Bouin’s will enhance the trichrome staining intensity. The recommended
fixatives for trichrome staining are Bouin’s, Zenker’s, Formal-mercury,
Zinc formalin and Picro-mercuric alcohol.
• In order to achieve both adequate and even staining of connective tissue
fibers the dyes utilized in the trichrome techniques are prepared as low
pH solutions, usually in the range of 1.5 - 3.0.
Fig. 25-3. Elastic layer of arterial wall (Elastic Van Gieson Stain)
Aldehyde fuchsin elastic stain (Gomori 1950a, Sheehan 1980)
Hydrochloric acid and paraldehyde are added to an alcoholic solution of
basic fuchsin to form aldehyde fuchsin. Schiff bases are formed by the
aldehyde and the fuchsin, and staining is intensified by prior oxidation.
Fixative:
10% neutral buffered formalin is preferred; chromate fixatives should be
avoided. Formalin and Bouin fixed tissues will how a colorless background
and mercury fixed tissue show a pale lilac background.
Section:
Paraffin sections at 4 - 5 μm.
Reagents:
Aldehyde fuchsin solution
Pararosanilin (basic fuchsin, CI 42500) 1 gm
Ethyl alcohol, 70% 200 ml
Hydrochloric acid, concentrated 2 ml
Paraldehyde (must be fresh) 2 ml
Mix well and let stand at room temperature for 2 - 3 days or until the
stain is deep purple. Store in the refrigerator.
Light green stock solution
Light green SF yellowish 0.2 gm
Distilled water 100 ml
Glacial acetic acid 0.2 ml
Mix well.
Light green working solution
Light green stock solution 10 ml
Distilled water 50 ml
Procedure:
1. Deparaffinize sections and hydrate to 70% alcohol.
2. Stain sections in aldehyde fuchsin solution for 10 – 40 minutes; with
good solutions, 10 minutes is usually sufficient for staining
3. Rinse off the excess stain with 70% alcohol.
4. Wash the sections in water and check microscopically for staining of
elastic fibers. If a deeper stain is desired, rinse sections briefly in 70%
alcohol and return to the aldehyde fuchsin. If further differentiation is
needed, return sections to the 70% alcohol. Differentiation is stopped by
rinsing the sections with distilled water. The stain may be filtered and
reused.
5. Rinse the sections with distilled water.
6. Counterstain sections with the light green working solution for 1 to 2
minutes; discard the solution.
7. Dehydrate in 2 changes each of 95% and absolute alcohols, clear in
xylene, and mount with synthetic resin.
Results:
Elastic fibers Deep blue to purple
Other tissue elements Green
Notes:
• The paraldehyde used for preparation of the aldehyde fuchsin reagent
should be fresh. Do not use reagent that was opened previously.
• Old solutions of aldehyde fuchsin may not stain well, and the staining
time may need to be prolonged.
• Rosaniline (CI 42510) is not satisfactory
• The shelf life of aldehyde fuchsin may be prolonged by refrigerating a
small amount and freezing aliquots of the remainder.
Luna Staining Method and Protocol for Elastic Fibers and Mast Cells
(Luna 1992)
This method is used for identifying elastic fibers and mast cells on formalin-
fixed, paraffin-embedded tissue sections, and may be used for frozen sections as
well. The elastic fibers and mast cells will be stained purple and the nuclei will
be stained black and the background stained yellow.
Fixation: 10% formalin.
Section: paraffin sections at 5 um.
Reagents:
Aldehyde Fuchsin Solution:
Basic fuchsin 1 gm
70% Ethyl alcohol 200 ml
Hydrochloric acid, concentrated 2 ml
Paraldehyde 2 ml
Let stand for 2-3 days. Filter just before use. Store solution at 4 C and
it will be good for a few weeks.
Iron Hematoxylin Working Solution, Weigert's:
Stock solution A: 1 g hematoxylin in 100 ml 95% alcohol.
Stock solution B: 4ml 29% ferric chloride in 95 ml distilled water,
then add 1 ml concentrated hydrochloric acid.
Working solution: mix equal parts of stock solution A and B. This
working solution is reusable within 3 months.
Methyl Orange Solution:
Methyl orange (Sigma) 0.25 gm
Alcohol (95%) 100 ml
Mix well and filter before use.
Procedure:
1. Deparaffinize and hydrate sections to 95% alcohol.
2. Stain sections in aldehyde fuchsin solution for 30 minutes.
3. Rinse in 95% alcohol, 3 changes (for differentiation as well).
4. Stain in Weigert’s iron hematoxylin working solution for 10 minute.
5. Wash in running tap water for 10 minutes.
6. Rinse in 95% alcohol.
7. Counterstain in methyl orange solution for 5 minutes.
8. Dehydrate through 95% alcohol, absolute alcohol for 2 changes, 3
minutes each.
9. Clear in xylene, 2 changes, and 3 minutes each.
10. Coverslip with resinous mounting medium.
Results:
Elastic fibers purple
Mast cells purple
Nuclei black
Background yellow
Orcein (Taenzer-Unna Orcein Method)
Orcein is a naturally occurring vegetable dye, which has now been
synthesized. It is used to stain for elastic fibers, especially in dermatology due
to demonstration of the finest and most delicate fibers found in the skin. The
tissue is stained with Orcein, differentiated with acid-alcohol and
counterstained with methylene blue or alum hematoxylin. Elastic fibers stain
dark-brown while nuclei are stained blue. Variations between batches of dye
may produce erratic results with occasional insufficient staining.
Krajian's Technique This is a rapid method for staining elastic fibers, fibrin
and amyloid, employing Congo red. Elastic fibers appear bright red; fibrin and
connective tissues will appear dark blue; RBC will be colored orange-yellow.
BASEMENT MEMBRANE
Basement membranes are found throughout the body as a resilient matrix
made up of carbohydrate complexes, microfibrils and fibrous elements
separating connective tissues from epithelial, endothelial, or mesothelial cells.
The thickness of basement membrane varies from 15 to 50 nm. The glomerular
basement membrane is particularly thick, and measures up to 350 nm in a
healthy adult. The Jones methenamine silver stain is excellent for the
demonstration of glomerular and tubular basement membranes of kidney
biopsies.
Basement membranes are commonly demonstrated with a silver stain
employing a methenamine silver solution. Methenamine silver methods rely on
the oxidation of carbohydrates within the tissue to form aldehyde groups. These
groups will directly act to reduce silver ions from the methenamine silver
solution to metallic silver. The ability to bind silver ions from solution and
independently reduce silver to a visible metallic form is referred to as
argentaffin. The use of sensitizing and reducing solutions are not necessary
with this method.
Basement membranes may also be demonstrated using the Periodic Acid-
Schiff (PAS) technique. It is particularly useful for demonstration of the
glomerular basement membrane of the kidney, due to its carbohydrate content,
although electron microscopy seems to be the most informative. Basement
membranes are not readily stained and are difficult to distinguish on H&E
stains, although they are more conspicuous in the renal glomeruli, particularly
in disorders where they can be markedly thickened such as in diabetes or
membranous nephropathy . Trichrome stains and silver impregnation methods
are more useful for the purpose.
Jones' Impregnation Technique for Basement Membranes (Drury 1980)
This method is similar to the periodic acid Schiff reaction, except that
aldehydes produced by oxidation reduce a silver solution instead of combining
with Schiff's reagent to form a red compound. Consequently, those materials
which are red in a PAS will be black in Jones' stain, i.e. it is not specific for
basement membranes but will demonstrate any carbohydrates which can be
oxidised to aldehydes.
Fixative:
Alcoholic Bouin's, 10% formalin
Sections:
Cut paraffin sections 1-2µ
Reagents:
1% Periodic Acid:
Periodic acid 5 gm
Distilled water 500 ml
Mix well. Solution is stable for 6 months.
Stock Methenamine Silver
3% Methenamine 400 ml
5% Silver nitrate 20 ml
Use acid clean glassware. Store in the refrigerator, solution is
stable for 6 months.
CAUTION: Corrosive, possible carcinogen.
5% Borax:
Sodium borate 5 gm
Distilled water 100 ml
Mix well. Solution is stable for 6 months.
Working Methenamine Solution:
Stock methenamine silver 50 ml
5% borax 6ml
Prepare fresh, discard after use.
0.2% Gold Chloride:
1% Gold Chloride 1 ml
Distilled water 50 ml
Use acid clean glassware. Store in the refrigerator, solution is
stable for 6 months.
CAUTION: Avoid contact and inhalation.
5% Hypo (sodium thiosulfate):
See Stock Solutions
Routine Hematoxylin and Eosin stains.
Procedure:
1. Deparaffinize and hydrate to distilled water.
2. 1% Periodic acid, in 60°C waterbath, 15 minutes.
3. Distilled water, 3 changes.
4. ***Working methenamine solution and one coplin jar of distilled
water: microwave HIGH power for 60 seconds, dip slides in hot distilled
water, agitate silver solution, add slides to silver solution.
5. Place coplin jar of silver solution, in 60°C waterbath, check every 2 to
5 minutes. Allow slides to remain is silver solution until sections
become light brown, check under the microscope for black membranes.
6. Rinse in distilled water.
7. 0.2% Gold chloride, 20 dips, until gray.
8. Rinse in distilled water.
9. 5% Hypo, 1 minute.
10. Wash in water.
11. Counterstain in hematoxylin, 1-3 minutes.
12. Acid rinse, blue and wash in water.
13. Counterstain lightly in eosin.
14. Dehydrate, clear, and coverslip.
***Conventional Method:
On Step 4. Place in 60°C waterbath for 1 hour or until membranes
have turned black.
Results:
Basement membranes black
Nuclei blue
Background pink
Notes:
If tissue over stains, dip in a dilute (0.05 gm/50 ml water) potassium
ferricyanide solution (solution should be a pale yellow color).
Untoned sections give dark brown material on a paler brown
background. Toning for about 15 seconds to produce brown-black
material on a pale grey-brown background. Toning for a few minutes
will produce black material on a grey background. Longer toning
produces purple tones.
Sharper staining of the basement membrane and less background
staining can be obtained with the use of the microwave oven for silver
techniques.
Wear gloves, goggles and lab coat. Keep hot uncapped solutions under
the fume hood. Avoid contact and inhalation of dyes and chemicals.
Silver nitrate is a severe skin and eye irritant, and is an oxidizer.
Ingestion will produce violent gastrointestinal discomfort.
Sodium thiosulfate is toxic when ingested. It can irritate the stomach,
skin, eyes and respiratory tract
Fig. 27-5. Immunoperoxidase stain for glial fibrillary acid protein (GFAP) in
astrocytes
Additional Information:
Tissue Type: Brain (cerebellum, striatum)
Fixation: Formalin fixed paraffin sections, or acetone fixed frozen sections
Positive Control: Brain (cerebellum, striatum)
Negative Control: Omit primary antibody, isotype control or absorption
control
Blocking: 2-5% normal serum to reduce unspecific background staining;
0.5-3% H2O2 to block endogenous peroxidase activity; avidin/biotin to
block endogenous biotin activity if necessary Notes:
No need to perform antigen retrieval on frozen sections
NeuN Antibody Staining Protocol for Immunohistochemistry
(http://www.ihcworld.com/_protocols/antibody_protocols/neun_chemicon.htm)
PRINCIPLE: NeuN (or Neuronal Nuclei) reacts with most neuronal cell types
throughout the central and peripheral nervous systems. The
immunohistochemical staining is primarily localized in the nucleus of the
neurons with lighter staining in the cytoplasm. The few cell types not reactive
with MAB377 include Purkinje, mitral and photoreceptor cells. The antibody is
also an excellent marker for neurons in primary cultures and in retinoic acid-
stimulated P19 cells as well as for identifying neurons in transplants.
Primary Antibody: NeuN Antibody
Clone: Mouse monoclonal
Supplier: Chemicon. (Catalog Number: MAB377)
Dilution:
1:600 using IHC-TekTM Antibody Diluent (Cat# IW-1000 or IW-1001) to
reduce background and unspecific staining and serum blocking step is NOT
needed.
Incubation Time/Temp: 60 min/room temperature
Antigen Retrieval
Device: IHC-TekTM Epitope Retrieval Steamer Set (Cat# IW-1102)
Buffer/pH value: IHC-TekTM Epitope Retrieval Solution (Cat# IW-1100)
Heat/Cool Temperature: 95-100 ºC/room temperature
Heat/Cool Time: 20 minutes/20 minutes
Detection Methods
Standard Method: ABC Method or LSAB Method
Enhanced Method: Polymeric Methods
Chromogen Substrate
Reagent: DAB
Incubation Time/Temperature: 1-3 minutes/room temperature
Counterstain
Staining Time: 30 seconds
Results:
Staining Pattern: Nuclear/cytoplasmic (primarily in nuclei with lighter
staining in the cytoplasm)
Additional Information:
Species Reactivity: Human, mouse, rat
Fixation:
Formalin fixed paraffin sections. For staining of cultured cells,
permeabilizing with Triton X-100 is needed and lower dilution (1:100) is
required.
Positive Control: Brain
Negative Control: Omit primary antibody, isotype control, absorption control
Blocking: 2-5% normal serum to reduce unspecific background staining;
0.5-3% H2O2 to block endogenous peroxidase activity;
Avidin/biotin to block endogenous biotin activity if necessary
MBP Antibody Staining Protocol for Immunohistochemistry
(http://www.ihcworld.com/_protocols/antibody_protocols/mbp_ihcworld.htm)
Myelin basic protein (MBP) is a major constituent of the myelin sheath of
oligodendrocytes and Schwann cells in the central nervous system and the
peripheral nervous system, respectively. It is most abundant in hematopoietic
system and contains seven exons distributed over 32-34 kb. MBP isolated from
MS brain may differ in charge microheterogeneity which would affect antigenic
determinants. MBP is mapped to chromosome 18q22-23. Failure in this gene
expression would be correlated in the central white matter with extrapyramidal
system degeneration signs. Moreover, it is a candidate autoantigen in the disease
multiple sclerosis.
Primary Antibody
Name: MBP IHC Antibody
Clone: Rabbit polyclonal
Supplier: IHC World
Catalog Number: IW-PA1050
Dilution: Ready to Use
Incubation Time/Temp: 60 min/room temperature
Antigen Retrieval
Device: IHC-TekTM Epitope Retrieval Steamer Set (Cat# IW-1102)
Buffer/pH value: IHC-TekTM Epitope Retrieval Solution (Cat# IW-1100)
Heat/Cool Temperature: 95-100 ºC/room temperature
Heat/Cool Time: 20 minutes/20 minutes
Detection Methods
Standard Method: ABC Method or LSAB Method
Enhanced Method: Polymeric Methods
Chromogen Substrate
Reagent: DAB
Incubation Time/Temperature: 1-3 minutes/room temperature
Counterstain
Reagent: Mayer's Hematoxylin
Staining Time: 30 seconds
Results:
Staining Pattern: Cytoplasmic
Additional Information:
Species Reactivity: Human, mouse, rat, rabbit.
Fixation: Formalin fixed paraffin sections or cultured cells
Positive Control: Human liver, brain
Negative Control: Omit primary antibody, isotype control, absorption
control
Blocking: 2-5% normal serum to reduce unspecific background staining;
0.5-3% H2O2 to block endogenous peroxidase activity
Avidin/biotin to block endogenous biotin activity if necessary
Peripheral Nervous System (PNS)
The PNS comprises all nervous tissue outside the brain and spinal cord. It
consists of groups of neurons (called ganglion cells), a network of nerve fibers
(called plexuses), and bundles of parallel nerve fibers that form the nerves and
nerve roots. Nerve fibers, which originate from neurons within the CNS and pass
out of the CNS in cranial and spinal nerves, are called efferent or motor fibers.
Nerve fibers which originate from nerve cells outside the CNS but enter the CNS
by way of the cranial or spinal nerves are called afferent or sensory nerve fibers.
The large majority of the axon bundles called nerves belong to the
peripheral nervous system even when the cell bodies of the neurons to which
they belong reside within the brain or spinal cord. In the peripheral nervous
system, the myelin sheath is part of so-called Schwann cells. In addition to the
myelin sheath and the sheath of Schwann, peripheral nerve fibers are surrounded
by connective tissue, the endoneurium. The endoneurium is continuous with the
more abundant connective tissue perineurium, which envelops bundles of nerve
fibers. The nerve trunk is ensheathed in turn by the epineurium.
The peripheral nervous system is divided into:
1) Somatic - consists of nerves that innervate the skin, joints, and
muscles
2) Visceral - also known as the autonomic nervous system, contains
neurons that innervate the internal organs, blood vessels, and glands.
The autonomic nervous system itself consists of two parts: the
sympathetic nervous system and the parasympathetic nervous system.
The principal neurotransmitters in the PNS are acetylcholine and
noradrenalin.
Fixation and Processing
For morphology that includes electron microscopy, 2.5–3% glutaraldehyde is the
preferred fixative but it is not suitable for immunohistochemistry since this
fixative interferes with antigen detection. Paraformaldehyde is generally used in
concentrations of 1–4% for immunohistochemistry. Peripheral nerve segments
should be immersed in the fixative for 10–12 hours. Formalin fixation may be
done at room temperature, but samples immersed in glutaraldehye or
paraformaldehyde should be kept at in the refrigerator. The samples are then
post-fixed in 1% osmium tetroxide for two hours at room temperature,
embedded in epoxy resin in cross and longitudinal orientation, and then
sectioned at 1-µm thickness and stained with methylene blue. H & E staining of
paraffin-embedded tissue supplemented by special stains and
immunohistochemistry does not provide the resolution as epoxy resin–embedded
sections.
Sections fixed in glutaraldehyde/paraformaldehyde, post-fixed with osmium
tetroxide and embedded in glycerin or unpolymerized epoxy resin can be used
for teasing individual myelinated nerve fibers. Other stains, such as Sudan black
staining can also be used to demonstrate myelin sheaths, especially when
glycerin is used for infiltration.
Peripheral Myelin in Paraffin Sections
In routinely prepared paraffin sections of nerves stained with hemalum and
eosin Y (H&E), the myelin sheaths appear as largely empty zones surrounding
eosinophilic axons and encircled by eosinophilic Schwann cell cytoplasm and
other components of the endoneurium. Although most of the lipids have been
extracted, myelin can be strongly and selectively stained in paraffin sections.
There are two groups of techniques: those based on dye metal complexes of iron,
and those making use of water insoluble anionic dyes.
Methylene blue-azure II-basic Fuchsin (Humphrey and Pittman 1974)
Fixation:
Glutaraldehyde
Sections:
Semi-thin resin sections
Solutions:
0.2 M sodium dihydrogen orthophosphate dehydrate
NaH2PO.2H2O 3.121 gm
Distilled water 100 ml
0.2 M disodium hydrogen orthophosphate
Na2HPO4 2.839 gm
Distilled water 100 ml
0.1 M phosphate buffer, pH 6.9
Methylene blue/azure A
Methylene blue 0.39 gm
Azure A 0.06 gm
Glycerol 30 ml
Methanol 30 ml
0.1 M phosphate buffer, pH 6.9 90 ml
Distilled water 150 ml
50% ethanol in deionized water
Basic Fuchsin, stock solution
Basic Fuchsin 0.5 gm
50% ethanol 50 ml
Basic Fuchsin, working solution
Basic Fuchsin, stock solution 1 ml
Deionized water 19 ml
Procedure:
1. Filter methylene blue/azure A solution into Coplin jar.
2. Put into water bath set at 65oC.
3. Stain sections in this solution for 30 minutes.
4. Rinse well in distilled, filtered water.
5. Do not allow sections to dry.
6. Filter basic fuchsin working solution onto slides and stain at room
temperature for 4 minutes.
7. Rinse well in distilled water.
8. Drain and allow to dry.
9. Mount in DPX.
Fig. 27-6. Peripheral nerve. Methylene Blue-Azure-Basic Fuchsin Stain
Result:
Myelin blue
Other tissue elements light blue
Collagen pink/red
Elastin red
Note:
Do not leave sections stained with methylene blue/azure A in distilled water
before counterstaining as the blue will wash out and the stain will be too pale.
Osmium Tetroxide
Another fixative that provides insoluble, visible deposits at sites of unsaturation
is osmium tetroxide, which can be used as a primary fixative or for post-fixation
after the addition of formaldehyde or glutaraldehyde. Osmium tetroxide, or
OsO4, is a creamy-white solid, soluble to 7% in water, but much more soluble in
hydrophobic organic liquids. OsO4 penetrates tissues slowly; it is applied to
specimens less than 1 mm thick. As a strong oxidizing agent, OsO4 reacts with a
wide range of organic compounds and is itself reduced to a black lower oxide,
OsO2. Further reduction and deposition occur when OsO4 reacts with ethanol or
methanol used for dehydrating the tissue.
The osmium solution must be stored in a manner that minimizes evaporative
loss of this toxic and very expensive compound. The container of the solution
must be an extremely clean glass bottle with a black rubber stopper. Ground
glass stoppers allow the escape of vapor, which can blacken nearby paper, plastic
and wood. The solution should be stored in a fume hood since storage in a
refrigerator may slightly retard evaporative losses from inadequately stoppered
bottles but escaped vapor blackens plastic.
To make a working solution for blackening myelin (usually 0.5% or 1% OsO4),
use a disposable Pasteur pipette to withdraw 1–2 mL of the 2% solution. Add
this to an equal or greater volume of a suitable diluent. For unfixed tissue, the
diluent should be phosphate-buffered saline, pH 7.2–7.6. For tissue that has been
well fixed in formaldehyde or glutaraldehyde, water is a suitable diluent. The
concentration of osmium tetroxide is not critical, and there is no need to measure
the volumes accurately.
REFERENCES
Adams JC. (1979) A fast, reliable silver-chromate Golgi method for perfusion-fixed tissue. Stain
Technol 54:225–6.
Angulo A, Fernandez E, Merchan JA, Molina M. (1996) A reliable method for Golgi staining of retina
and brain slices. J Neurosci Methods 66:55–9.
Arthur RP, Shelley WB. (1959) The Technology of In Vitro Staining of Nerves in Human Skin with
Thiazin Dyes. The Journal of Investigative Dermatology (1959) 33, 121–144.
Bradl M, Lassmann H. (2010) Oligodendrocytes: biology and pathology. Acta Neuropathol 119, 37–53.
Carson FL. (1997) Histotechnology: A Self-instructional Text. 2nd ed. Chicago, American Society of
Clinical Pathologists.
Carson F. (1980) Nerve tissue. In: Theory and Practice of Histotechnology. Sheehan D. and Hrapchack
B., Eds. The C.V. Mosby Company, London, pp. 266.
Chan KK, Lowe J. (2002) Techniques in Neuropathology. Chapt 8 In: Theory and practice of
histological techniques. Bancroft JD and Gamble M (eds). Churchill Livingstone, Livingstone, 371.
Churukian CJ. (2000) Manual of the Special Stains Laboratory (2000 edition). Rochester, NY,
University of Rochester Medical Center.
Clasen RA, Simon G, Scott RV, Pandolfi S, Lesak A. (1973) The staining of the myelin sheath by luxol
dye techniques. J Neuropathol Exp Neurol 32:271–283.Cook HC (1974). Manual of Histological
Demonstration Techniques. London: Butterworths, 159-163.
Cox G. (1973) Neuroglia and microglia. In: Cook, H.C. (ed.) Histopathology -Selected Topics. Bailliere
Tindall, London.
Culling CFA. (1974) Handbook of Histopathological and Histochemical Techniques. 3rd ed. London,
Butterworths.
Davenport HA. (1960) Histological and Histochemical Technics. Saunders, Philadelphia.
Dawson TP, Neal JW, Llewellyn L. (2003) Neuropathology Techniques. London: Arnold.
De Rutter JP. (1983) The influence of post mortem fixation delay on the reliability of the Golgi silver
impregnation. Brain Research, 266: 143.
Drury RAB, Wallington EA. (1980) Carleton’s Histological Technique. 5th ed. Oxford University Press,
London.
Elleder M, Lojda Z. (1973) Studies in lipid histochemistry. X. Lipids in paraffin sections. Histochemie
34:143–156.
Esiri MM. (1982) Immunohistological techniques in neuropathology. In: Smith, E and Cavanagh JB
(eds.) Recent Advances in Neuropathology No. 2. Churchill Livingstone, Edinburgh.
Feigin I, Naoumenko J. (l976) Some chemical principles applicable to some silver and gold staining
methods for neuropathology studies. Journal of Neuropathology and Experimental Neurology 35: 495.
Friedland DR, Los JG, Ryugo DK. (2006) A modified Golgi staining protocol for use in the human
brain stem and cerebellum. Journal of Neuroscience Methods 150:90–95
Globus JM. (1927) The Cajal and Hortega glia staining methods. A new step in the preparation of
formaldehyde fixed material. Archives of Neurology and Psychiatry, 18: 263.
Graeber MB, Streit WJ. (2010) Microglia: biology and pathology. Acta Neuropathol 119, 89–105.
Hernan J, Aldana M, Ferrari CC, Benitez I, Affanni JM. (1996) Standardization of Fixation, Processing
and Staining Method for the Central Nervous System of Vertebrates. Biocell 20(3): 265-272.
Horobin RW, Tomlinson A. (1976) The influence of the embedding medium when staining sections for
electron microscopy: The penetration of stains into plastic sections. J Microsc 108:69–78.
Humphrey D and Pittan FE. (1974 A simple methylene blue-azure-basic fuchsin stain for epoxy-
embedded tissue sections. Stain Technology 49(1): 9-14.
Kiernan JA. (1965) Some histochemical observations relating to the so-called ground substance of the
central nervous system. J Anat 99:926–928, 1965
Kiernan JA. (1999) Histological and Histochemical Methods: Theory and Practice. 3rd ed. Oxford:
Butterworth Heinemann.
Kiernan JA. (2005) Nissl: the man, the stain and the substance. Microscopy Today 13(6):50.
Kiernan JA. (2007) Histochemistry of staining methods for normal and degenerating myelin in the
central and peripheral nervous systems. J Histotechnol 30(2):87-106.
Kitoh T, Matsushita M. (1980) A new staining method of astrocytes for paraffin section. Acta
Neuropathologica, 49: 67.
Kluver H, Barrera A. (1953) A method for the combined staining of cells and fibers of the nervous
system. Journal of Neuropathology and Experimental Neurology, 12: 400.
Lamy C, Duyckaerts C, et al. (1989) Comparison of seven staining methods for senile plaques and
neurofibrillary tangles in a prospective series of 15 elderly patients. Neuropathology and Applied
Neurobiology, 15(6): 563.
Lillie RD. (1965) Histopathologic Technique and Practical Histochemistry. New York: McGraw Hill.
Lillie RD. (1956) The mechanism of Nile blue staining of lipofuscins. J Histochem Cytochem 4:377–
381.
Lillie RD, Henderson R. (1968) A short chromic acid-hematoxylin stain for frozen sections of formol-
fixed brain and spinal cord. Stain Technol 43:121–122.
Lillie RD. (1969) Mechanisms of chromation hematoxylin stains. Histochemie 20:338–354.
Lowe J, Cox G. (1990). Neuropathological techniques. In: Theory and Practice of Histological
Techniques. Bancroft J. And Stevens A., Eds. Churchill Livingstone, London, pp. 343 378.
Luna LG, ed. (1968) Manual of Histologic Staining Methods of the Armed Forces Institute of
Pathology, ed. 3, New York, McGraw-Hill Book Company.
Mahoney R. (1966) Histological techniques. In: Laboratory Techniques in Zoology. Butterworth & Co.
(Publishers) Ltd., Great Britain, pp. 177-266.
Manns E. (1960) A combined myelin Nissl stain. Stain Technol. 35: 349 351.
Mazzarello P. (1999) Camillo Golgi's scientific biography. J. Hist. Neurosci. 8, 121
McManus JFA, Mowry RW. (1960) Staining Methods: Histologic and Histochemical. New York,
Hoeber.
Naoumenko J, Feigin I. (1961) A modification for paraffin sections of the Cajal gold-sublimate stain for
astrocytes. Journal of Neuropathology and Experimental Neurology, 20: 602.
Page KM. (1965) A stain for myelin using solochrome cyanin. J Med Lab Technol 22:224-225.
Pearse AGE. (1968) Histochemistry, Theoretical and Applied. Edinburgh: Churchill Livingstone.
Pearse AGE. (1985) Histochemistry, Theoretical and Applied, 4th ed. Edinburgh, Churchill
Livingstone, 1985, pp 786–849
Perry VH, Hume DA, Gordon S. (1985) Immunohistochemical localization of macrophages and
microglia in the adult and developing mouse brain. Neuroscience 15: 313.
Puchtler H, Sweat F., et al. (1962) On the binding of Congo red by amyloid. J of Histochemistry and
Cytochemistry, 10: 355.
Puchtler, H., Sweat, F. (1965) Congo red as a stain for fluorescence microscopy of amyloid. Journal of
Histochemistry and Cytochemistry, 13(8): 693.
Puchtler H, Meloan SN, Waldrop FS. (1986) Application of current chemical concepts to metal-
hematein and metal-brazilein stains. Histochemistry 85:353–364.
Schulte EKW. (1991) Standardization of biological dyes and stains: pitfalls and possibilities.
Histochemistry 95: 319 328.
Sevier, A.C., Munger, B.L. (1965) Journal of Neuropathology and Experimental Neurology. 24: 130.
Sheehan, D.C., Hrapchak, B.B. (1980) Theory and Practice of Histotechnology, 2nd ed., The C.V.
Mosby Company, St. Louis.
Spacek, J., Fiala, J. (2002) Visualization of Dendritic Spines. Synapse Web. Retrieved 2010-06-17.
Swank L, Davenport HA. (1934) Chlorate-osmic-formalin method for degenerating myelin. Stain
Technol 10:87–90, 1934
Suvarna SK, Layton C, Bacroft JD. (2013) Bancroft’s Theory and Practice of Histological Techniques.
7th edition, Elsevier, Churchill-Livingstone
Vallet, P.G., Guntem, R. et al. (1992) A comparative study of histological and immunohistochemical
methods for neurofibrillary tangles and senile plaques in Alzheimer's disease. Acta Neuropathologica,
83(2): 170.
Velasco, M.E., Dahl, D., Roessmann, V, and Gambetti P. (1980) Immunohistochemical localization of
the glial fibrillary acidic protein in human glial neoplasms. Cancer 45: 484.
Vinters H. V., Kleinschmidt-DeMasters B. K. (2008). General pathology of the central nervous system.
Chapter 1 in Greenfield’s Neuropathology (Love S., Louis D. N., Ellison W. eds.), 8th Edition, Chapter
1, pp. 1–62. Edward Arnold, London.
Weil A. (1928) A rapid method for staining myelin sheaths. Arch Neurol Psychiat 20:392–393.
Windle WF, Rhines R, Rankin J. (1943) A Nissl method using buffered solutions of thionin. Stain
Techn, 18: 77 86.
CHAPTER 28
STAINING OF MICROORGANISMS
The microscopic appearance of routinely stained tissue may reveal
infection, as evidenced by the presence of inflammatory infiltrates (neutrophils,
eosinophils, plasma cells or lymphocytes), granulomas, microabscesses or
caseation necrosis in the section being examined. Although adequate H&E
staining will demonstrate many bacteria, e.g. streptococci, staphylococci,
appropriate dyes may be necessary to stain different parts of the bacteria
structures such as capsules, flagella, granules, and spores, and to visualize those
components that are otherwise too difficult to see under a light microscope,
such as mycobacteria, rickettsia, spirochetes, and others.
BACTERIA
Bacteria are infectious microorganisms that lack nuclei but have a cell wall
composed of two phospholipid bilayer membranes separated by a
peptidoglycan layer (gram-negative organisms) or an inner membrane
surrounded by a peptidoglycan layer (gram-positive organisms). Gram-positive
bacteria include staphylococci, streptococci, listeria, and clostridium. Gram-
negative bacteria include escherichia, citrobacter, salmonella, shigella,
klebsiella, enterobacter, proteus, bacteroides, neisseria, pseudomonas, and
brucella. Many bacteria remain extracellular when they invade the body,
whereas facultative intracellular bacteria (e.g., acid-fast mycobacteria) can
survive and replicate either outside of host cells or within host cells.
Staphylococci and streptobacilli, when present in large numbers, appear as
blue-gray granular masses on H&E stain. Romanowsky stains such Giemsa will
also stain many organisms, while other infectious agents will require special
techniques. It is essential to use known positive control sections with all special
staining methods for demonstrating microorganisms.
Negative staining
A simple staining method for bacteria that is usually successful, even when
the "positive staining" methods fail, is to use a negative stain. In a negative
staining technique, an acidic, anionic dye is used to change the color of the
background, not the cells, causing the cells to stand out. This can be achieved
by smearing the sample onto the slide and then applying nigrosin (a black
synthetic dye) or India ink (an aqueous suspension of carbon particles). It will
turn the background a dark brown to black, leaving the clear, bright cells
unstained and highly visible.
Simple Staining
Simple stains are single dyes used to stain the organism and it has limited
clinical application. The dye is negative and the bacterium is positively charged
and they will get stained due to its interaction with a negatively charged dye.
Before a sample can be stained with a simple stain, it must be heat fixed to the
slide. During heat fixation, a glass slide is waved over an open flame. This kills
the bacteria, attaches the cells to the slide, and enhances the stain uptake. This
process makes staining more effective but can damage or distort the cells,
changing their appearance from a truly natural, free-living state. Methylene
blue is a classic example of a simple stain. This blue stain will color all cells
blue, making them stand out against the bright background of the light
microscope.
Differential Staining
Differential staining is a procedure that takes advantage of differences in
the physical and chemical properties of different groups of bacteria. The most
commonly used differential stain is the Gram stain, which divides bacteria into
two groups, those which are Gram-positive and those which are Gram-negative.
Gram Stain
The basis for the differential Gram stain reaction is due to a difference in
the permeability and structure and chemical components of the bacterial cell
wall. Gram positive bacteria have a thicker cross-linked wall of peptidoglycan
and are not lipid-rich. Gram negative bacteria have very little peptidoglycan,
but do have an outer layer of lipopolysaccharide and they have a greater lipid
content in their cell walls than Gram positive cells. Lipids are soluble in
alcohol, which is used to decolorize Gram negative bacteria during the Gram
stain procedure.
In classic Gram staining techniques, the application of a primary stain
(crystal violet) stains all cells blue/purple. The iodine solution (mordant) is
added to form a crystal violet-iodine complex so that all cells continue to
appear blue. The decolorization step distinguishes gram-positive from gram-
negative cells. The organic solvent such as acetone or ethanol, extracts the blue
dye complex from the lipid-rich, thin walled gram negative bacteria to a greater
degree than from the lipid poor, thick walled, gram-positive bacteria. After
decolorization, the gram-positive cell remains purple in color, whereas the
gram-negative cell loses the purple color and is only revealed when the
counterstain, the positively charged dye (safranin or carbol fuchsin) is added,
staining the decolorized gram-negative cells red/pink while the gram-positive
cells remain blue.
The Gram stain also allows for the recognition of the shape and pattern or
arrangement of bacteria. The shapes are cocci (round), bacilli (rod), or
spirochete (spiral). Based on how the bacteria divides during replication,
different patterns or arrangements may be produced. The cellular morphology,
or shapes, of the individual cells and their arrangement in pairs, chains, or
clusters are useful in the identification of the bacteria.
Gram stain for bacteria in smears (Gram 1884)
This method is only suitable for rapid diagnosis and identification of the
bacteria in the smears take from abscesses, or suspected infection during autopsy
or in the frozen section room.
Procedure:
1. Fix dry film by passing it three times through a flame or placing it on a
heat block.
2. Stain for 15 seconds in 1% crystal violet or methyl violet, and then
pour off the excess.
3. Flood for 30 seconds with Lugol’s iodine, pour off excess.
4. Flood with acetone for not more than 2-5 seconds, wash with water
immediately.
5. Alternatively, decolorize with alcohol until no more stain comes out.
Wash with water.
6. Counterstain for 20 seconds with dilute carbol fuchsin, or freshly
filtered neutral red for 1-2 minutes.
7. Wash with water and carefully blot the section until it is dry.
Results:
Gram positive organism blue-black
Gram negative organism red
Modified Brown-Brenn method for Gram-positive and Gram-negative
bacteria in paraffin sections (Churukian and Schenk 1982)
Fixation:
Formalin
Sections:
4-5 µm paraffin-embedded sections
Solutions:
Crystal violet solution (commercially available)
Crystal violet, 10% alcoholic 2 ml
Distilled water 18 ml
Ammonium oxalate 80 ml
Mix and store; always filter before use
Modified Gram’s iodine (commercially available) or
Iodine 2 gm
Potassium iodide 4 gm
Distilled water 400 ml
Dissolve potassium iodide in a small amount of the distilled water,
add iodine and dissolve; add remainder of distilled water.
Ethyl alcohol-acetone solution
Ethyl alcohol, absolute 50 ml
Acetone 50 ml
0.5% basic fuchsin solution (stock) commercially available, or
Basic fuchsin or pararosaniline 0.5 gm
Distilled water 100 ml
Dissolve with aid of heat and a magnetic stirrer
Basic fuchsin solution (working)
Basic fuchsin solution (stock) 10 ml
Distilled water 40 ml
Picric acid-acetone
Picric acid 0.1 gm
Acetone 100 ml
Acetone-xylene solution
Acetone 50 ml
Xylene 50 ml
Procedure:
1. Deparaffinize and rehydrate through graded alcohols to distilled water.
2. Stain with filtered crystal violet solution for 1 minute.
3. Rinse well in distilled water.
4. Iodine solution, 1 minute.
5. Rinse in distilled water, blot slide but NOT the tissue section.
6. Decolorize by dipping in alcohol-acetone solution until the blue color
stops running (one to two dips only).
7. Counterstain in working basic fuchsin for 1 minute. Be sure to agitate the
slides well in the basic fuchsin before starting the timer
8. Rinse in distilled water and blot slide but not the section.
9. Dip in acetone, one dip.
10. Dip in picric acid-acetone until the sections have a yellowish-pink color.
11. Dip several times in acetone-xylene solution. At this point, check the
control for proper differentiation. (Go back to picric acid-acetone if you
need more differentiation.)
12. Clear in xylene and mount.
Result:
Gram positive organisms, fibrin, some fungi blue
Gram-negative organism red
Nuclei red
Other tissue elements yellow
Notes:
1. Dry picric acid is explosive. Purchasing pre-made picric acid-acetone is
recommended.
2. Do not allow the tissue sections to dry at any point in the staining
process. If this occurs after treatment with iodine, decolorization will be
uneven and difficult.
3. The crystal violet treatment must precede iodine treatment. Iodine acts as
a mordant, i.e., it increases the affinity of the cells for the crystal violet.
Iodine alone has no bacterial staining capabilities.
4. Decolorization must be short and precise. Too long an exposure to 95%
alcohol will decolorize Gram-positive as well as Gram-negative cells.
Gram-Twort Stain for Bacteria (Twort 1924, Ollett 1947)
Twort's stain can be used effectively in place of neutral red as a counterstain
in the basic Gram method. The green counterstain facilitates the detection of
red-staining Gram-negative organisms.
Fixation:
Formalin
Sections:
Paraffin Solutions:
Crystal violet solution (commercially available)
Crystal violet, 10% alcoholic 2 ml
Distilled water 18 ml
Ammonium oxalate, 1% 80 ml.
Mix and store; always filter before use.
Gram’s iodine (commercially available)
Iodine 2 gm
Potassium Iodide 4 gm
Distilled water 400 ml
Dissolve potassium iodide in a small amount of the distilled water,
add iodine and dissolve; add remainder of distilled water.
Twort’s stain
1% neutral red in ethanol 9 ml
0.2% fast green in ethanol 1 ml
Distilled water 30 ml
Mix immediately before use.
Method:
1. Deparaffinize and rehydrate through graded alcohols to water.
2. Stain in crystal violet solution for 3 minutes.
3. Rinse in gently running tap water.
4. Treat with Gram's iodine for 3 minutes.
5. Rinse in tap water and blot dry.
6. Differentiate in preheated acetic alcohol until no more color washes
out. This may take 15 to 20 minutes. The section should be light
brown or straw colored.
7. Rinse briefly in water.
8. Stain with Twort's solution for 5 minutes.
9. Wash in distilled water.
10. Rinse in acetic alcohol until no more red runs out of the section;
this takes only a few seconds.
11. Rinse in fresh absolute alcohol, clear and mount.
Results:
Gram positive organism blue-black
Gram negative organism pink-red
Nuclei red
RBCs and most cytoplasmic structures green Elastic fibers black
Fig. 28-1. Gram- Twort stain showing gram-negative rods
Mycobacteria
Mycobacteria are difficult to demonstrate by Gram's technique because
they have a fatty acid capsule that influences the penetration and resistance to
removal of the stain by acid and alcohol (acid and alcohol-fastness). The speed
by which the primary dye is removed by differentiation with acid alcohol is
proportional to the amount of fatty coat.
Mycobacterium tuberculosis is associated with caseating granulomas and
the presence of 1-2 µm, blunt-ended, acid and alcohol fast bacilli. It still
frequently causes tuberculosis in underdeveloped countries, particularly as an
opportunistic infection associated with AIDS.
Mycobacterium avium intracellulare is a group of intracellular
opportunistic bacteria that cause an often lethal infection in the
immunosuppressed patients, particularly in association with AIDS. They
produce non-caseating lesions with collections of vacuolated macrophages that
often contain vast numbers of organisms. Sometimes, there is little cellular
reaction seen on H&E stained section, and the organism is detected only by
acid-fast stain such as Ziehl-Neelsen or Fite methods.
Acid-Fast Stain
The acid-fast stain is a differential stain which distinguishes organisms
with waxy cell walls that can resist decolorization with acid alcohol. Acid-fast
bacteria have a waxy substance called mycolic acid in their cell walls, making
them impermeable to many staining procedures, including the Gram stain.
These bacteria are termed "acid-fast" because they are able to resist
decolorization with acid alcohol. Carbol fuchsin is the primary stain in this
procedure, and it contains phenol to help solubilize the cell wall. Heat is also
applied during the primary stain to increase stain penetration. All cell types will
take up the primary stain. Addition of acid-alcohol will decolorizes all cells
except the acid-fast ones. Methylene blue is then applied to counterstain any
cells which have been decolorized. At the end of the staining process, acid-fast
cells will be reddish-pink, and non-acid fast cells will be blue.
Acid alcohol-fast staining is recommended for mycobacterium TB,
mycobacterium avium intracellulare and mycobacterium leprae, which are
selectively resistant to staining, but once stained by a strong dye with the aid of
heat, cannot be decolorized or removed by acid. The most commonly used
method is the Ziehl-Neelsen method. A modification of this stain, known as the
Fite stain, has a weaker acid for supposedly more delicate mycobacterium
leprae bacilli. The most sensitive stain for mycobacteria is the auramine-
rhodamine stain which requires a fluorescence microscope for viewing.
Ziehl-Neelsen Stain for Mycobacteria (Kinyoun 1915)
Fixation:
Formalin or fixative other than Carnoy’s
Sections:
Paraffin
Solutions:
Carbol-fuchsin (commercially available)
Basic fuchsin 0.5 gm
Absolute alcohol 5 ml
5% aqueous phenol 100 ml
Mix well and filter before use.
Acid Alcohol
Hydrochloric acid 10 ml
70% alcohol 1000 ml
Methylene blue stock solution (commercially available)
Methylene blue 1.4 gm
95% alcohol 100 ml
Methylene blue working solution
Methylene blue stock solution 10 ml
Tap water 90 ml
Procedure:
1. Deparaffinize and rehydrate through graded alcohol to distilled water.
2. Carbol-fuchsin, 30 minutes.
3. Wash well in tap water.
4. Differentiate in acid alcohol until solutions are pale pink (2-5 dips).
5. Wash in tap water for 8 minutes, then dip in distilled water.
6. Counterstain with working methylene blue solution until sections are
pale blue.
7. Rinse in tap water, then dip in distilled water.
8. Dehydrate, clear and mount.
Results:
Mycobacteria, some fungal organisms red
Background blue
Notes:
1. Care should be taken to avoid counterstaining as scant organisms
may be missed
2. Formic acid is recommended for decalcification. Stronger acids
can destroy the acid-fastness.
3. The blue counterstain may be patchy if extensive caseation is
present.
4. Decalcification using strong acids may destroy acid-fastness; formic
acid is recommended.
Diagnostic Cytology simply means microscopic examination of cells from
different body sites for diagnostic purposes. Diagnostic cytology includes
exfoliative cytology and fine needle aspiration. For cytologic examination to
be of diagnostic value, the sample must include representative material and the
method used to process the specimen must give rapid results, without
sacrificing cellular detail. Consistency and reliability are most important in
cytological interpretation. Cytologists rely heavily on the quality and
appearance of the stain.
Specimen for cytologic examination may be derived from various sources:
1. Exfoliative cytology
2. Fine needle aspiration
3. Body fluids
Exfoliative Cytology
Exfoliative cytology deals with the microscopic study of cells that have
been desquamated from epithelial surfaces. Exfoliated cells may be found in
smears that have been spontaneously shed or physically removed from
epithelial and mucous membranes. The cytological specimens collected from
female genital tract include cervical smear, vaginal smear, and endometrial
smear. Spontaneous exfoliation is observed in normal cells due to constant
growth and replacement with new cells - more readily observed in malignant
tumor cells. Specimen can be collected from the epithelial surfaces by lightly
scraping the surface, by swabbing, aspirating or washing the surfaces.
Exfoliative cytology is usually recommended for the following:
• Detection of malignant cells in body fluids, mainly used for staging
cancer.
• Detection of precancerous cervical lesions in women (cervicovaginal
smear/Pap smear).
• Assessment of female hormonal status in case of sterility and
endocrine disorders. This is achieved by microscopic evaluation for
determination of maturation index (MI), based on examination of
smears taken from the lateral vaginal walls.
• For determination of genetic sex -most of the nuclei of females exhibit
conglomeration of chromatin, representing XX chromosomes (Barr
body), which may be demonstrated in the smears from buccal or vaginal
mucosa.
• For detection of infectious agents.
Smear Preparation
Smears should be made from fresh material, prepared in the doctor's office
or radiology units. For direct smear preparation, the material should be
smeared evenly on a clean slide. The patient's identity, including name, age and
date and type of specimen must be legibly indicated on the laboratory
requisition form and the laboratory identifying number should be put on the
slide (preferably on a frosted -end slide with printed label, or with a diamond-
point pen).
Histotechnicians sometimes perform special stains on cytology smears,
blood films and cytopreps from other departments within the laboratory.
Increasingly, the commonly received cytoprep is that of the “thin prep.” These
smears are wet-fixed in 95% ethanol immediately after preparation to preserve
the fine structure of the chromatin and help in the evaluation of nuclear
changes. Air drying is avoided with smears for cytological detection of
neoplasia because it changes the appearances of the cells. Slides bearing blood
or bone marrow smears, on the other hand, are usually air-dried. Marrow
smears are stained in parallel to sections of the bone marrow core biopsy.
Cervical Smear:
Cancer of the uterine cervix is the commonest cancer that can be detected
even at the pre-invasive stage. Cervical cytology screening involves the
microscopic examination of cell samples that have been taken primarily from
the ecto- and endocervix, smeared on glass slides and stained by the
Papanicolaou (Pap) method. The entire procedure is known as Pap smear.
Because cervical cytology is a screening test, abnormal findings must be
confirmed histologically.
The patient should abstain from coitus, not douche the vagina for at least a
day, and not apply intravaginal preparations for at least one week before the
examination. Smears should not be taken during menstrual bleeding, because
of contamination with blood, endometrial component, and tissue debris that
can obscure the cells during smear examination.
Various collecting systems such as cotton swabs, wooden or plastic
spatula, and cervical brushes, so-called cytobrushes, are generally used to
collect gynecology cells. In brush biopsies, more endocervical cells and blood
may be present in the smears, and this may lead to valuation difficulties. The
use of cotton swab for collection of cervical smear is to be discouraged because
of the drying artifacts and loss of cells that are caused by this method. Wooden
spatula is preferable to plastic spatula, because of its mildly rough surface that
can collect more material. Endo-cervical brushing is used strictly for taking
materials from endocervix.
After smear collection, the sample is evenly smeared on to the center of
the non-frosted area of the glass slide and fixed immediately. Excessively thin
or thick smears can result in false-negative reports.
Impression Smear
Impression smears are often used for ulcerated surface lesions to allow an
immediate assessment of the lesion before fixation and processing of the tissue
sample. The preparations should be quickly air dried and then stained. It is also
indicated in the case of tumors especially of lymph nodes. Soon after an
excision biopsy of lymph node, the specimen is cut using a sharp scalpel blade
an imprint of the smear is taken by touching the cut surface with a clean slide
and fixing immediately.
Sputum Smear
• Obtain at least 3 consecutive morning sputum specimens.
• Collect early morning sputum by a deep cough in a wide -mouthed jar
containing Saccomanno fluid (50% ethyl alcohol and 2% carbowax).
If the patient cannot cough up sputum spontaneously, induced sputum
should be collected using inhalation of an aerosol solution for 20 minutes to
produce a deep cough sample. If a more extensive study is to be made, it is
recommended that a minimum of 2-4 slides be prepared, and one is air dried
for Giemsa staining. At least two slides should be stained by Papanicolaou
method.
The collected sputum specimen is poured into a Petri dish and examined
first for blood-flecked or solid particles which are removed, placed on the
slide, crushed slightly with another slide and distributed evenly with a small
amount of the liquid portion. If no solid particles are found, an attempt should
be made to secure representative samples from both thin and thick portions.
With the end of a wooden applicator stick, these samples are evenly spread on
the slides and immediately placed in fixative for a minimum of one hour.
Due to the hardening effect of alcohol, specimen fixed in said solution
should be sent to the laboratory and smears should be made without delay.
Sputum collected should have been coughed from "down-deep" to ensure
that the specimen is a true representative of the sputum and not just saliva. The
mucus present preserves the cell constituents; however, it is highly
recommended that the specimen be as fresh as possible when examined, if
better cellular detail is to be appreciated.
Alveolar macrophages are found on the sputum smears from a deep cough.
Absence of alveolar macrophages suggests "saliva" rather than sputum and
results an unsatisfactory specimen.
Bronchoscopy specimens:
Bronchial Brushing specimen is directly smeared onto two labeled slides
by pull technique (usually done by a bronchoscopic specialist at the
bronchoscopy laboratory). The slides are then fixed by a spray fixative or
immediately immersed in 95%alcohol. Failure to fix the slides within a few
seconds will produce unsatisfactory cytologic results due to air drying artifact.
Bronchial Washing specimens are freshly collected in the bronchoscopy
collection container and hand delivered to the laboratory.
Bronchial Aspirates: The secretion obtained at bronchoscopy are collected
either by aspiration into a glass suction apparatus or by washing the bronchi
with 1-2 cc. of saline, into a cup, if sufficient in amount, and sent immediately
to the laboratory for preparation and examination. Care should be taken to
collect specimen taken directly from the bronchus, to insure that the smear
contains epithelial cells (ciliated bronchial cells) from the bronchial mucosa,
not just red blood cells and leukocytes.
Smears of Gastric Secretions and Aspirates
Gastric smear preparations are quite difficult to make due to inaccessibility
of the specimen and the presence of gastric juices which have a deleterious effect
on the morphology of exfoliated cells. Smears are usually collected by simple
irrigation and aspiration technique. The collected specimen is then sent to the
laboratory. Specimen should be examined as soon as possible since any delay of
more than I /2 hour, before fixation, will digest the cells and make the specimen
unsatisfactory for evaluation.
The patient should have fasted for at least 8 hours before gastric washing is
performed. Esophageal washings are to be examined immediately.
Smears of Breast Secretion
Cytologic examination of nipple discharge has an extremely low diagnostic
yield for diagnosis of breast carcinoma. Spontaneous nipple discharge is usually
a result of hormonal imbalance in young patients, and when the secretion is
bloody a benign intraductal papilloma should be considered clinically. The
spontaneous nipple discharge should be smeared on a clean glass slide, and
immediately placed in fixative.
In women, except during lactation and the immediate post-lactation period,
any discharge from the nipple is abnormal .The nipple discharge is usually due to
a benign breast lesion such as duct ectasia and papilloma , or due to endocrine
problems. However the major value of cytologic examination of nipple discharge
is potential detection of malignant cells in a patient with clinically undetected
carcinoma.
Collection Technique:
Gently strip the subareolar area and nipple using the thumb and forefinger.
Place the labeled slide upon the nipple and draw it quickly across the nipple. If
more than a drop is collected, use another slide to smear with a pull-up
technique. Immediately drop slide in a bottle of 95% isopropanol or use spray
fixative.
If the secretion is scanty in amount, smears should be restricted to a small
area of the slide to prevent drying. Secretions obtained from both breasts should
be properly identified as left or right. For localized breast lesions producing
discharge upon pressure, the secretion may be smeared directly on the slide after
expressing material from the breast.
Fine Needle Aspiration (FNA)
Fine needle aspiration is the study of cellular samples obtained from organs
that do not shed cells spontaneously, such as breast, thyroid, lymph nodes, liver,
lungs, skin, soft tissues and bones. It is useful in lesions that are easily palpable,
like growth of skin, subcutaneous soft tissue tumors, thyroid, lymph nodes,
salivary glands and breast.
The basic technique uses a 25-gauge needle and a 10-ml syringe. The
needle is inserted into the lesion and repeatedly redirected to sample a number
of areas while applying a small amount of suction on the syringe. Tissues
composed of mesenchymal cells (connective tissue) tightly adhere to each
other and do not exfoliate easily, requiring a larger bore needle and increased
suction may be necessary. The sample should be air dried as quickly as
possible to reduce the effects of shrinkage.
FNA of superficial masses (e.g. breast, thyroid, and peripheral lymph
nodes) is usually done by the clinicians, or in some centers by the pathologists.
Deeply seated lesions such as lung, mediastinum, abdominal organs (liver,
pancreas, etc.) and retroperitoneal organs (kidney, adrenal, lymph nodes) are
performed under laparoscopy computerized tomography (CT scan) or
ultrasound (sonography).
Slide preparation:
When a solid lesion is aspirated, usually a few drops from the tip of the
needle has the most diagnostic material for cytologic evaluation. On the other
hand when the specimen is bloody, the diagnostic cells are diluted and hard to
find on a direct smear. We recommend preparation of maximum 4 slides: using
1-2 drops on each slide and using slide-pull technique (similar to the technique
used for peripheral blood smears). Then rinse the needle in a preservative
solution such as Saccomano fluid, and send it to the laboratory. It will be
processed like any other body effusion specimen at the cytology laboratory.
An ideal aspirate is of creamy consistency with numerous cells suspended
in a small amount of tissue fluid without admixture with blood. In lymph node
aspiration, a cell suspension can be prepared in addition to direct smears.
Smears obtained by FNA are fixed based on the requirements of the stain to be
used.
• Colloid, mucin and smears to be stained with hematological stains
(such as May–Grunwald–Giemsa) should air dried. Smears that are not
correctly made and dried quickly will produce artefacts. Rapid stains
like Diff Quik (2-3 minutes), are particularly useful in preliminary
assessment of adequacy of the sample before the patient is released.
• Smears to be stained by Papanicolaou (Pap) or hematoxylin and eosin
(H&E) should be rapidly fixed in alcohol (wet fixation) to show nuclear
details and allow better identification of malignant cells. If the smears
are allowed to dry and not quickly fixed in alcohol, drying artefact can
occur, the cytoplasm will be more eosinophilic, and nuclear details will
appear fuzzy.
For Transbronchial Fine needle Aspiration (FNA) specimens, a
drop or two should be released onto a slide, smeared by two-slide
pull method and fixed immediately.
Body Fluids:
Cytological investigation of body fluids such as urine samples,
cerebrospinal fluid, pleural or peritoneal effusions, obtained by aspiration, can
cast light on the origin and type of primary tumors as opposed to reactive
processes.
Serous effusion refers to the fluid accumulated in the three serous cavities
namely pleural, pericardial and peritoneal, which are important sources of
diagnostic material. The presence of malignant cells in serous effusions usually
indicate metastatic involvement and, therefore, a higher stage of cancer.
Collections of specimen are usually processed in the same way as a bronchial
secretion.
Jelly-like clots forming alter removal may be prevented by adding 300
units of Heparin for every 100 ml. of aspirate. This is usually done by
collecting the specimen in heparinized collection containers. They can be
collected in tubes or syringes that may be either plain or pre-heparinized, to
prevent coagulation. Freshly tapped specimens are preferred for cytology. If
immediate processing is not possible, it can be preserved in the refrigerator for
a period of 24-48 hours or pre-fixed in 50% ethanol. Albuminized slides should
be used to prepare smears from prefixed sample.
Cytospin preparation is by far the best method to collect cells from body
fluid (e.g., urine, pleural or peritoneal fluid). For those that have no access to a
cytospin, centrifugation of the preparation and sampling of the centrifuged
sediment is the usual method of cell concentration. For cytological evaluation,
the specimen is centrifuged and one or two drops of sediment are place on a
glass slide, spread out and fixed immediately. A major objection to the use of
cytocentrifuge is the distortion of cellular morphology due to air drying
artifacts, which can be avoided by immediate fixation or by using an equal
volume of polyethylene glycol.
Fig. 29-3. Parabasal cells with smaller cytoplasm and larger nuclei are seen with
a few intermediate cells.
Cells Found in Cervico-vaginal Smears During examination, a wide variety of
vaginal cells may be present, the proportion of which may determine the stage of
sexual period of the patient on the time of ovulation.
Cells found in cervico-vaginal smears are usually divided into: a) Mature
superficial cells - These polygonal squamous cells measure 45-50 µm in
diameter and are usually identified by the presence of pale, pink-staining
cytoplasm and dark pyknotic nuclei, less than 6 µ in diameter. True acidophilia
is characteristic of superficial vaginal cells under estrogen influence (this is not,
however, a reliable index of maturation). Pseudo-acidophilia may be observed
due to the drying of smears especially before fixation, prolapse and drying of
vaginal epithelium, infection and chemicals.
b) Intermediate cells - are medium sized polyhedral or elongated cells
with basophilic vacuolated cytoplasm.
c) Parabasal cells - are round to oval cells with small dense basophilic
cytoplasm, and a total cell diameter of 15-30 µm. They are smaller
than intermediate cells, and have a larger vesicular nucleus. They are
normally found from two weeks of age to puberty, after childbirth, with
abortions and after menopause.
Other cells that may be found in cervico-vaginal smears include: •
Navicular cells are boat-shaped intermediate cells with strong tendency
to fold or curl on edges. Their presence suggests a combined estrogen-
progesterone effect. They are found in the latter half of the menstrual
cycle, during pregnancy and menopause.
• Pregnancy cells are round, oval or boat-shaped cells with
translucent basophilic cytoplasm observed greatest at the center of the
cell, due to glycogen accumulation, pushing the nucleus to the side or
towards the cell membrane. This appearance is characteristic due to a
deeper blue stain of the cytoplasm at the periphery .
• Endometrial cells are small cells, slightly cylindrical with less
basophilic cytoplasm, occurring in tightly packed groups of 3 or
more. They are found during and 1-10 days after menstruation, and
are shed in response to ovarian hormones A smear taken during
menstruation will contain endometrial cells and numerous
erythrocytes and leukocytes, frequently rendering the smear
unsatisfactory for a reliable assessment..
• Endocervical glandular cells occur in large groups or small sheets.
The cytoplasm is usually stained pale blue/gray and is finely
vacuolated, often with indistinct cell borders and nuclei with finely
granular chromatin. They may present a honeycomb appearance
when viewed on end.
Vaginal Hormonal Cytology
Vaginal hormonal cytology, aside from being relatively inexpensive, may
be performed regularly without undue risk, even in pregnant women. Vaginal
smears prepared for such purpose are best taken from the upper lateral third of
the vaginal wall, because it is more accessible and less likely to be
contaminated by cellular debris or vaginal discharges.
Smears should be examined first under low magnification to assess the
quality of smear and staining, to detect the presence of RBC and leukocytes
and the type of exfoliated cells, and to give a rough assessment of the
proportion of mature superficial pyknotic acidophilic cells. A quantitative
evaluation of the smear under 40 x objective is then in order.
This test is not commonly used in today's practice of gynecology.
Staining Procedure for Non-Gynecologic Specimens:
We use a modified Papanicolaou technique to provide a standardized
method for staining non-gynecologic specimens. Harris' hematoxylin is the
optimum nuclear stain and the combination of OG- 6 and EA 50 gives the
subtle range of green, blue and pink hues to the cell cytoplasm.
Equipment: Shandon Varistain 24-3
Method:
Solutions Time
1. 80% Isopropyl alcohol (in
seconds)
8
70% Isopropyl alcohol 8
2.
50% Isopropyl alcohol 8
3.
Distilled water 8
4.
Hematoxylin (Harris), 35
5. mercury free
Distilled water 8
6.
Distilled water 8
7.
Distilled water 8
8.
50% Isopropyl alcohol 8
9.
Ammonium hydroxide 60
10. (NH40H)
70% Isopropyl alcohol 9
11.
80% Isopropyl alcohol 8
12.
95% lsopropyl alcohol 8
13.
OG-6 15
14.
95% Isopropyl alcohol 8
15.
95% lsopropyl alcohol 8
16.
EA-65 75
17.
95% Isopropyl alcohol 8
18.
95% Isopropyl alcohol 8
19.
95% Isopropyl alcohol 8
20.
Absolute isopropyl alcohol 5
21.
Absolute isopropyl alcohol 8
22.
Absolute Isopropyl alcohol 8
23. and Xylene II
Xylene 10
24.
Modified Papanicolaou Staining:
This procedure provides optimum nuclear detail information, which is
important for cytologic evaluation of Pap smears, nongynecological and FNA
cytologic specimens.
1. Stain conventional Pap smears by routine Papanicolaou staining
procedure.
2. For Pap smears prepared with liquid- based technique, an automated
stainer should be used.
3. To avoid contamination:
a. Stain non-gynecologic and FNA specimens separately.
b. Do not stain fluid specimens in close proximity to other cases.
c. Stain suspicious cases separately when necessary.
d. Assess cellularity of fluids and FNA specimens and stain those with
high potential for cross contamination separately.
4. Change all stains weekly or as needed depending on work load.
5. Discard first rinsing alcohol daily, advance subsequent rinses and place
new alcohol as the last rinse. Do the same for xylene.
6. Smears should not be allowed to dry in between any of the staining
steps.
7. Keep a record of changes in staining procedure next to the stainer.
8. All problems with staining should be identified, monitored, corrected,
and recorded.
May-Grunwald Giemsa Stain:
This is one of the common Romanowsky stains used in cytology. It is useful
for studying cell morphology in air-dried smears. It is superior to Papanicolaou
stain when studying the cytoplasm, granules, vacuoles, and basement membrane
material. For nuclear staining Papanicolaou stain is superior.
Notes:
• Do not let the specimens dry at any stage of the staining procedure.
• Wash properly to avoid dye artifacts.
• Staining result is dependent on pH. Alkaline pH increases blue and
acidic pH pink or reddish tinge in the stained specimen.
Take care not to over-stain smears. Under-stained smears can be re-
stained for further periods to increase staining intensity.
• Staining solutions should be filtered daily in order to remove any loose
cells/cell components.
• When precipitates are formed on the slide, the stains should be mixed
thoroughly or replaced.
It is important to renew alcohol baths (ethanol 96% and 100%)
regularly in order to achieve good differentiation and stain
transparency.
• The last alcohol, xylene or xylene-substitute baths must be absolutely
clean and free of water. Any water remaining can cause the slide to
become decolored as a result of oxidation. Make sure that the smears are
completely dry before staining.
If bacteria and/or fungi are regularly noted within examined smears,
then the staining solutions are likely contaminated and need to be
replaced.
Stains will lose potency over time and need to be replaced.
Rehydration of air-dried smear with normal saline will restore the
transparency of the cell or hemolyzed RBCs, while the use of 4%
formaldehyde/65% ethanol fixative can reduce the time needed for
proper fixation and staining of the smears.
Mounting
Long-term specimens are mounted with mounting media that are first applied
to the slide in dissolved form and then harden as the solvent evaporates. The
refractive index of mounting media is approximately 1.5 and is close to that of
glass. For optimum optical properties, transparency and brilliance of specimens
it is important to ensure that the mounting medium contains the solvent that was
used for clearing. The advantages of mounting agents containing xylene or
toluene include: • Optical brilliance
• Good drying times
• No air bubbles under the coverslip
• Color stability of stained slides
Immunohistochemistry
lmmunohistochemical studies for cell surface antigens on cell smears,
imprints, and cytocentrifuge preparations show sensitivity equal to, or greater
than, that of histologic sections. By contrast, intracytoplasmic and intranuclear
antigens may be more difficult to demonstrate in cytologic material, probably
because cells remain structurally intact and do not allow for easy penetration of
immunologic reagents. False negative immunoperoxidase results for
intracellular antigens are more common in cytologic samples than in histologic
specimens. Cell suspensions are seldom used for routine
immunohistochemistry. Conventional filter preparations produce an undesirable
background staining, probably due to nonspecific absorption of reagents by the
filter. The methods for processing and handling cellblock preparations are
similar to handling and processing histologic samples.
Samples stored for several months, either at room temperature, 4oC or
-20oC can be processed for DNA and protein analysis. Polymerase chain
reaction (PCR) and subsequent direct sequencing can be used to analyze
mutations of p53 and other genes from relatively few suspicious or malignant
cells. Fluorescence In Situ Hybridization (FISH) is the most objective
technique for assessment of Her2/neu of fine needle aspirates for assessment of
breast cancer.
REFERENCES
Bales CE, Durfee GR. (1992) Cytologic techniques. In: Diagnostic Cytology and Its Histopathological
Basis, ed. Koss LG, 4th ed., pp. 1451-1515, J. B. Lippincott, Philadelphia, PA.
Bancroft JD, Cook HC. (1994) Manual of Histological Techniques and Their Diagnostic Application,
pp. 24-27, Churchill Livingstone, Tokyo.
Bibbo M. (1991) Comprehensive Cytopathology: Saunders W B (3rd ed.), Philadelphia, pp 881-906.
Biswas R, Paral CC, Dey R, Biswas SC. (2008) Rapid Economic, Acetic Acid, Papanicolaou Stain
(REAP) -Is it suitable alternative to standard PAP stain? Al Ameen J Med Sci 1 (2):99 -103.
Blenman KRM. (2013) Techniques in Cytology – Cytospin: Distinguishing Benign Cells from
Malignant Cells. Sanguine Bioscience Blog PBMC Basics.
Bonime RG. (1966) Air-dried smears for cytologic studies. Obstet Gynecol 27:783-790.
Boon ME, Drijver JS. (1986) Routine Cytological Staining Techniques: Theoretical Background and
Practice, Elsevier Science Ltd., Oxford.
Boon GD, Rebar AH, DeNicola DB. (1982) A cytologic comparison of Romanowsky stains and
Papanicolaou-type stains. I. Introduction, methodology and cytology of normal tissues. Vet Clin Pathol
11:22-30.
Celik C, Gezginc K, Toy H, et al. (2008) A comparison of liquid based cytology with conventional
cytology. Int J Gynecol Obstet, 100, 163-6.
Chan JKC, Kung ITM. (1988) Rehydration of air-dried smears with normal saline: application in fine-
needle aspiration cytologic examination. Am J Clin Pathol 89:30-34.
Chaudhry S, Fink A, Gelberg L, et al. (2003) Utilization of Pap smears by south Asian women living in
the United States. J Gen Int Med, 18, 377-84.
Dighe SB, Ajit D, Pathuthara S, Chinoy R. (2006) Papanicolaou stain: Is it economical to switch to
rapid, economical acetic acid papanicolaou stain? Acta Cytol 50:643-6.
Garbar C, Mascaux C, Fontaine V. (2005) Efficiency of an inexpensive liquid-based cytology
performed by cytocentrifugation: A comparative study using the histology as reference standard. Cytol J
2: 15
Holiday DB, McLarty JW, Farley ML, Mabry LC, Cozens D, Roby T, et al. (1995) Sputum cytology
within and across laboratories. A reliability study. Acta Cytol 39:195-206.
Horobin RW. (1986) Fundamental mechanisms of cytological staining. In: Standardization and
Quantitation of Diagnostic Staining in Cytology, ed. Boon ME and Kok LP, pp. 9-14, Coloumb Press,
Leyden.
Horobin RW, Walter KJ. (1987) Understanding Romanowsky staining. I. The Romanowsky-Giemsa
effect in blood smears. Histochemistry 86:331 -336. 1987
Johnson T, Maksem JA, Belsheim BL, et al. (2000) Liquid- based cervical-cell collection with brushes
and wooden spatulas: a comparison of 100 conventional smears from high-risk women to liquid-fixed
cytocentrifuge slides, demonstrating a cost-effective, alternative monolayer slide preparation method.
Diagn Cytopathol, 22, 86-91.
Jorundsson E, Lumsden JH, Jacobs RM. (1999) Rapid Staining Techniques in Cytopathology: A
Review and Comparison of Modified Protocols for Hematoxylin and Eosin, Papanicolaou and
Romanowsky Stains. Veterinary Clinical Pathology 28(3): 100-108.
Jones CA. (1996) Papanicolaou staining of air-dried smears: value in rapid diagnosis. Cytopathology
7:333-339.
Joshi A, Mahajan N, Karmarkar PJ, Mahore SD. (2014) Diagnostic utility of various techniques used in
body fluid cytology. IOSR Journal of Dental and Medical Sciences (IOSR-JDMS) 13(1): 13-18.
Koss, L. (1992) Diagnostic Cytology and Its Histologic Bases.4thEdition, New York, Tokyo, Igaku-
Shoin.
Koss LG, Zajicek J. (1992) Aspiration biopsy, Part I, Introduction to techniques and interpretation. In:
Diagnostic Cytology and Its Histopathological Basis, ed. Koss LG, 4th ed., pp. 1234-1250, J. B.
Lippincott, Philadelphia, PA.
Koss LG, Woyke S, Olszewski W. (1984) Principles of aspiration biopsy. In: Aspiration Biopsy:
Cytologic Interpretation and Histologic Bases, pp. 3-21, Igaku-Shoin, New York, NY.
Manual for Cytology. (2005) Manuals for Training in Cancer Control. Directorate General of Health
Services, Ministry of Health and Family Welfare, Government of India
Nadji M, Morales AR. (1990) Immunohistochemical Techniques. Chapt 6, In: Silverberg, SS (ed.)
Principles and Practice of Surgical Pathology, Vol. l, Churchill Livingstone, New York.
Orell S, Sterret GF, Walters MN, Whitaker D. (1992) Manual and Atlas of Fine Needle Aspiration
Cytology, 2nd ed, Churchill Livingstone, Tokyo.
Pak HY, Yokota SB, Teplitz RL. (1983) Rapid staining techniques employed in fine needle aspirations.
Acta Cytol 27:81-3.
Pathology Services Policy and Procedure Manual, Cytopathology laboratory, University of Miami,
Jackson Memorial Medical Center, Miami, Florida, USA.
Prophet EB, Mills B, Arrington JB, Sobin LH. (1992) Laboratory Methods in Histotechnology,
American Registry of Pathology, Armed Forces Institute of Pathology, Washington, D.C.
Sato M, Taniguchi E, Kagiya T, Nunobiki O, Yang Q, Nakamura M, et al. (2004) A modified rapid
Papanicolaou stain for imprint smears. Acta Cytol 48:461-2.
Sherwani RK, Khan T, Aktar K. (2007) Conventional Pap smear and liquid based cytology for cervical
cancer screening-A comparative study. J Cytol, 24, 167-72.
Veena VS, George PS, Jayasree K, Sujathan K. (2012) Cytological Analysis of Sputum: The Simplest
and Preliminary Method of Lung Cancer Diagnosis – A Retrospective Analysis of 8690 Samples of
Symptomatic Patients. International Journal of Scientific and Research Publications, 2(12): 1-6.
Wittekind DH. (1983) On the nature of Romanowsky-Giemsa staining and its significance for
cytochemistry and histochemistry: an overall view. Histochem J 15:1029-1047.